P638 EN M Bc3 610-612

Easergy MiCOM P638
Transformer Differential Protection Device

for Railway Applications
P638/EN M/Bc3
Version P638 -302 -403/404 -610

P638 -302 -403/404 -611
P638 -303 -405/406 -612
Technical Manual
Content P638/EN M/Ca2 (-610)

P638/EN AD/Ab2 (-611)
P638/EN AD/Ac3 (-612)
Easergy MiCOM P638

P638/EN M/Da2
Version P638 -302 -403/404 -610
Technical Manual
! Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the
equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors
are used, wire end ferrules must be employed.
Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper
storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance, and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.
Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification
is made without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and
may render the product unsafe.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being
connected;
are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to
energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;
are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;
are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note:
The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation.
However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In
the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the
appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric,
including settlement of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the
contents of the operating manual.
Modifications After Going to Press
Contents
1 Application and Scope 1-1
2 Technical Data 2-1

2.1 Conformity 2-1
2.2 General Data 2-1
2.3 Tests 2-3
2.3.1 Type Tests 2-3
2.3.2 Routine Tests 2-5
2.4 Environmental Conditions 2-5
2.5 Inputs and Outputs 2-5
2.6 Interfaces 2-7
2.7 Information Output 2-9
2.8 Settings 2-9
2.9 Deviations 2-10
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values 2-10
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages 2-11
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition 2-12
2.10 Recording Functions 2-13
2.11 Power Supply 2-14
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications 2-15
3 Operation 3-1
3.1 Modular Structure 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication 3-3
3.3 Configuration of the Measured (Function Group HMI) 3-4
Value Panels
3.4 Serial interfaces 3-7
3.4.1 PC Link (Function Group PC) 3-7
3.4.2 Rear Port Communications (Function Group COMM1) 3-9
Interface 1
3.4.3 Rear Port Communications (Function Group COMM2) 3-18
Interface 2
3.4.4 Communication interface (Function Groups IEC, 3-21
IEC 61850 GOOSE and GSSE)
3.4.4.1 Communication interface (Function Group IEC) 3-21
IEC 61850
3.4.4.2 Generic Object Oriented (Function Group GOOSE) 3-23
Substation Event
3.4.4.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE) 3-25
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) 3-27
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY) 3-28
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode (Function Group INP) 3-30
of the Binary Inputs
3.8 Measured Data Input (Function Group RTDmA) 3-32
3.8.1 Direct Current Input 3-33
3.8.2 Input for Connection of a 3-37
Resistance Thermometer
3.9 Configuration, Operating Mode, (Function Group OUTP) 3-38
and Blocking of the Output Relays
3.10 Analog Output Channel (Function Group mA_OP) 3-41
3.10.1 BCD Measured Data Output 3-44
3.10.2 Analog Measured Data Output 3-46
3.10.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured 3-50
Data
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode (Function Group LED) 3-51
of the LED Indicators
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7

Contents
(continued)
3.12 General Functions of the P638 (Function Group MAIN) 3-54

3.12.1 Conditioning of the Measured 3-54
Values
3.12.2 Operating Data Measurement 3-56
3.12.3 Configuring and Enabling the 3-61
Protection Functions
3.12.4 Multiple Blocking 3-63
3.12.5 Blocked/Faulty 3-64
3.12.6 Fault Direction Signal 3-65
3.12.7 Starting Signals and Trip Logic 3-66
3.12.8 Time Tag and Clock 3-75
Synchronization
3.12.9 Resetting Mechanisms 3-77
3.12.10 Assigning Rear Port 3-80
Communications Interfaces to
Physical Communications
Channels
3.12.11 Test Mode 3-81
3.13 Setting group selection (Function Group GROUP) 3-82
3.14 SelfTesting and Diagnostics (Function Group CHECK) 3-84
3.15 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) 3-87
3.16 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) 3-88
3-17 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) 3-89
3.18 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) 3-91
3.19 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) 3-93
3.20 Fault Recording (Function Group OSCIL) 3-98
3.21 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF) 3-104
3.22 Transverse Differential Protection (Function Groups DIF_A 3-115
and DIF_B)
3.23 Definite-Time Overcurrent (Function Groups DTOC1 3-119
Protection and DTOC2)
3.24 Definite-Time Overcurrent (Function Group DTOCN) 3-129
Protection, Residual Current
System
3.25 Inverse-Time Overcurrent (Function Group IDMT) 3-131
Protection
3-26 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM) 3-146
3.27 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>) 3-156
3.28 Frequency Protection (Function Group f<>) 3-159
3.29 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1 3-165
and CBF_2)
3.30 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Groups CBM_1 3-169
and CBM_2)
3.31 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) 3-181
3.31.1 Monitoring of Measured Variables 3-181
in the Measured Data Input
3.31.2 Limit Value Monitoring of 3-184
Transformer Ends a and b
Currents
3.31.3 Limit Value Monitoring, Residual 3-185
Current System
3.31.4 Limit Value Monitoring, Voltage 3-186
3.32 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC) 3-188
8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

Contents
(continued)
4 Design 4-1
4.1 Designs (Case Types) 4-1
4.2 Dimensional Drawings 4-3
4.2.1 Surface-Mounted Case 4-3
4.2.2 Flush-Mounted Case 4-4
4.3 Modules 4-6
5 Installation and Connection 5-1

5.1 Unpacking and Packing 5-1
5.2 Checking the Nominal Data and the Design Version 5-2
5.3 Location Requirements 5-3
5.4 Installation 5-4
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding 5-10
5.6 Connection 5-11
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits 5-11
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B interface 5-14
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces 5-14
5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams 5-18
6 User Interface (HMI) 6-1

6.1 Display and Keypad 6-2
6.2 Changing Between Display Levels 6-6
6.3 Illumination of the Display 6-7
6.4 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general) 6-7
6.5 Control at the Panel Level 6-9
6.6 Control at the Menu Tree Level 6-10
6.6.1 Navigation of the Menu Tree 6-10
6.6.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode 6-11
6.6.3 Change-Enabling Function 6-12
6.6.4 Changing Settings 6-15
6.6.5 Setting a List Setting 6-16
6.6.6 Memory Readout 6-18
6.6.7 Resetting 6-22
6.6.8 Password-Protected Control Actions 6-24
6.6.9 Changing the Password 6-25
7 Settings 7-1
7.1 Parameters 7-1
7.1.1 Device Identification 7-1
7.1.2 Configuration Settings 7-6
7.1.3 Function Settings 7-51
7.1.3.1 Global 7-51
7.1.3.2 General Functions 7-56
7.1.3.3 Setting Groups 7-67
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 9

Contents
(continued)
8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

8.1 Operation 8-1
8.1.1 Cyclic Values 8-1
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data 8-1
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals 8-4
8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals 8-11
8.1.2 Control and Testing 8-24
8.1.3 Operating Data Recording 8-29
8.2 Fault and Event Records 8-30
8.2.1 Event Counters 8-30
8.2.2 Measured Event Data 8-31
8.2.3 Event Recording 8-34
9 Commissioning 9-1
9.1 Introduction 9-1
9.2 Product Familiarisation 9-1
9.3 Equipment Required for Commissioning 9-2
9.4 Product Checks 9-3
9.5 Setting Checks 9-9
9.6 On-Load Checks 9-13
9.7 Final Checks 9-14
9.8 P638 Commissioning Test Record 9-15
9.9 “As-Fitted” Settings Record 9-23
10 Troubleshooting 10-1
11 Maintenance 11-1
12 Storage 12-1
13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1
14 Order Information 14-1
Appendix AN-1
Contents AN-2
A Glossary A-1
B List of Signals B-1
C Overview of Changes C-1
TERMINOLOGY NOTE:
The P638 menu texts ("Data Model") referred to throughout this manual are regional texts which have been
customised for the UK market. Most diagrams contained in this manual use the same terminology. Some
diagrams however contain standard English menu texts when those were very similar to the "regional" ones
and modifying those diagrams was not deemed essential to comprehension. In those diagrams, references
are made to "Parameter Set(s)": This is the direct equivalent to the regional term "Setting Group(s)".
Similarly, the terms "PSx", "PS1", "PS2", "PS3" and "PS4" are respectively equivalent to "SGx", "SG1",
"SG2", "SG3" and "SG4".
10 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

1 Application and Scope
The P638 differential protection device is designed for fast and selective short circuit
protection, ground fault protection, and overload protection of transformers in railway
applications (two-winding arrangement) in railway substations.
This protection device may be installed in standard-gauge railway substations operating

on any normal frequency and voltage level.
The selection of protection functions has been optimised for transformer protection in a
wide range of substations, and at the same time they offer back-up protection for both
incoming and outgoing feeders.
Protection functions P638
87T DIFF Transformer differential protection
Vector group matching
Inrush restraint, through-stabilization
Zero current filter high and low voltage side
DIF_a, DIF_b Transverse differential protection high and low voltage side
50 / 51 DTOC1 Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages
67 Short-circuit direction determination, per stage
Undervoltage enable, per stage
Starting conditions for timer stages (starting / direction), per stage
50 / 51 DTOC2 Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages
51 IDMT Inverse-time overcurrent protection, phase selective, with one stage
Short-circuit direction determination
Undervoltage enable
Starting conditions for timer stages (starting / direction)
50 / 51 DTOCN Dead tank protection, definite-time ground overcurrent protection
Instantaneous high-current stage
49 THERM Thermal overload protection
27 / 59 V<> Time-voltage protection
81 f<> Over-/ Underfrequency Protection
50BF / 62 CBF_1, CBF_2 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
CBM_1. CBM_2 Circuit Breaker Monitoring
LIMIT Limit value monitoring
LOGIC Programmable logic

= standard
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 1-1

(continued)
Global functions P638
GROUP Setting group selection
F_KEY Function keys 6

= Standard
Measured Value Functions P638
RTDmA / mA_OP Analogue measured value input / output ( )
PT 100 measuring input ( )
20 mA measured value input, with one settable input value ( )
20 mA measured value output, with two settable output values ( )

= standard; ( ) = ordering option
Input/output functions P638
INP / OUTP Binary signal inputs / output relays (maximum number) 32 / 46
Current / voltage measuring inputs
Phase currents system 2X2
Residual current 1
Voltage 1
Communication Functions P638
COMM1, COMM2 2 communication interfaces, RS 485 or fibre-optics ( )
IRIGB IRIG-B time synchronization ( )
IEC Communication interface, RS 485 or fibre-optics (IEC 61850) ( )

( ) = ordering option
By means of a straightforward configuration procedure, the user can adapt the device
flexibly to the scope of protection required in each particular application. The unit’s
powerful programmable logic also makes it possible to accommodate special
applications.
1-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Functions
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 1-3

(continued)
General Functions
The functions listed in the table above are complete function groups, which may be
individually configured or cancelled (except for ILOCK), depending on the application
(e.g. included in or excluded from the protection device’s configuration).
A function is selected by a mouse click in the operating program:
Unused or de-configured function groups are hidden to the user (except for the
configuration setting), thus simplifying the menu. (An exception is the function MAIN,
which is always visible.) Communication functions and measured value functions may
also be configured or excluded.
This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of
the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the other hand simple
and clear settings and adaptations to each protection scheme (and optional control
purposes) can be made.
1-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Global functions
In addition to the features listed above, the P638 differential protection device provides
comprehensive self-monitoring as well as the following global functions:
Setting group selection (four independent setting groups available)

Measured operating values to support commissioning, tests and operation
Operating data recording (time-tagged event logging)
Overload data acquisition
Overload recording (time-tagged signal logging)
Fault data acquisition
Fault data recording (time-tagged signal logging with fault value recording of currents
and voltages).
Design
The P638 protection device is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a
robust aluminium case and electrically interconnected via one analogue module and one
digital module.
Inputs and outputs

For measuring inputs their nominal current values and nominal voltage value can be set
with function parameters.
The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC. The auxiliary
voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended range. The nominal
voltage ranges are 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. There is also a model
available for the lower nominal voltage range of 24 to 36 V DC.
All output relays can be utilized for signalling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 measuring input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for
PT-100 resistance thermometers as per IEC 751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero

suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input variable via
20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data and
stored measured event data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via
the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined via 3 adjustable
interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for slave-side
open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling, and a limitation to lower
nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available,
a selectable measured variable can be output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 1-5

(continued)
Interfaces
Local control and display:
User interface (HMI)

LED indicators, 18 of the red and green LED indicators offer user-definable functional
assignment (amber/yellow results when both red and green LED indicators are
illuminated simultaneously)
PC interface
Communication interfaces (optional)
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or the
optional rear communication interfaces. One of the communications interfaces is
designed to conform either to international standard IEC 60870-5-103 or to
IEC 60870-5-101, MODBUS, or DNP 3.0 for integration into a substation control system.
The second communications interface is designed to conform to international standard
IEC 60870-5-103 and intended for remote access, typically by a MODEM link and
MiCOM S1 setting software.
Function keys
With cases 40T and 84T there are six function keys available that offer user-definable
functional assignment. These may be used for easy control operation access.
Information interfaces
Information is exchanged through the user interface (HMI), the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).
Using one of the two available communication interfaces (communication protocols per
IEC 870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-101, DNP 3, MODBUS or Courier) the numerical protection
device can be wired either to the substation control system or a telecontrol system.
The second communication interface (communication protocol per IEC 60870-5-103

only) is designed for remote control.
External clock synchronization can be accomplished by means of the optional IRIG-B

input.
1-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P638, version -302-403/404-610
Declaration of conformity
(As per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC.) The product designated
Easergy MiCOM P638 Transformer Differential Protection for Railway Applications
has been designed and manufactured in conformance with the European standards
EN 60255-6 and EN 60010-1 and with the ‘EMC Directive’ and the ‘Low Voltage
Directive’ issued by the Council of the European Community.
2.2 General Data
General device data

Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for
19" cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
Vertical ± 30°.
Enclosure Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
IP 52; IP 20 for rear connection space with flush-mounted case.
Weight
84 TE case: approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections

See dimensional drawings (Chapter 4) and terminal connection diagrams (Chapter 5)
Terminals
PC interface (X6):
EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
Communication interfaces COMM1, COMM2:

Optical fibers (X7 and X8): F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 60874-2
for plastic fibers
or
optical fiber connection BFOC-(ST®) connector 2.5
per IEC 60874-10-1 for glass fibers
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
or
Leads (X9 and X10): M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections to
1.5 mm2.
P638/EN M/Da2 // AFSV.12.10183 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 2-1

2 Technical Data
(continued)
IEC Communication interface:

Optical fibers (X7 and X8): optical fiber connection BFOC-(ST®) connector 2.5
per IEC 60874-10 for glass fibers
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
or
Optical fibers (X13): Fiber optic adaptor (Simplex) type SC per
IEC 60874-14-4 for glass fibers
and
Twisted pair connection (X12): RJ45 connector per ISO/IEC 8877.
IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug
Current Measuring Inputs:

Pin-terminal connection:
M5 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor
cross-sections  4 mm2
Ring-terminal connection:
M4 threaded terminal ends
Other Inputs and Outputs:

Pin-terminal connection:
M3 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-
sections from 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
Ring-terminal connection:
M4 threaded terminal ends
Creepage Distances and Clearances

Per EN 61010-1§ and IEC 664-1.
Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
2-2 P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3 Tests
2.3.1 Type Tests
Type tests
All tests per EN 50255-6 or IEC 255-6.
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022§ or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
Ring Wave Immunity Test

Per IEC 61000-4-12, Class III:
100 kHz ring wave
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s, Source impedance: 200 
Per IEC 255 Part 22-1§ or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III:
1 MHz ring wave
Test duration: > 2 s, Source impedance: 200 
1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test

Per IEC 255 Part 22-1§ or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III.
Test duration: > 2 s
Source impedance: 200 
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per EN 60255-22-2§ or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3.
Contact discharge, single discharges: > 10
Holding time: > 5 s, test voltage: 6 kV
Test generator: 50 to 100 M, 150 pF / 330 
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Per EN 61000-4-3§ and ENV 50204,§ severity level 3.
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %
Single test at 900 MHz AM 200 Hz / 100 %
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements

Per IEC 60255-22-4, Class B:
Power supply: Amplitude: 2 kV , Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Inputs / outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV , Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Communications: Amplitude: 1 kV , Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Per DIN EN 61000-4-4, severity level 4.
Power supply:
Amplitude: 4 kV , Burst frequency: 2.5 kHz and 5 kHz
Inputs / outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV , Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Communications: Amplitude: 2 kV , Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns
Impulse duration: 50 ns
Burst duration: 15 ms
Burst period: 300 ms
Source impedance: 50 
P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 2-3

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Power Frequency Immunity

Per IEC 60255-22-7, Class A:
Phase-to-phase:
RMS value 150 V,
Coupling resistance 100 
Coupling capacitor 0.1 μF, for 10 s.
Phase-to-ground:
RMS value 300 V,
Coupling resistance 220 
Coupling capacitor 0.47 μF, for 10 s.
To comply with this standard, the parameter
I N P : F i l t e r (010 220) should be set as advised
in Chapter 7.
Surge Immunity Test

Per EN 61000-4-5§ or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4.
Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 µs
Fault current: 8 / 20 µs
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV, Pulses: > 5 / min,
Source impedance: 12 / 42 
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields

Test voltage: 10 V
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Frequencies: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Per IEC 255-11, 12 %.
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per DIN EN 61010 or IEC 255-5.
2 kV AC, 60 s.
Direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test of the power supply inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Per IEC 255-5.
Front time: 1.2 µs, Time to half-value: 50 µs
Peak value: 5 kV, Source impedance: 500 
2-4 P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Mechanical robustness 1
Valid for the following case variants:
 Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 1 (without angle brackets and frame)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1§ or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1.
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation), test
severity class 1 ,
5 g for 11 ms,
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport), test
severity class 1 ,
15 g for 11 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 1
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
Mechanical robustness 2
Valid for the following case variants:
 Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
 Surface-mounted case
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1§ or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 2.
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 2 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation), test
severity class 2,
10 g for 11 ms;
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport), test
severity class 1,
15 g for 11 ms
Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during transport), test
severity class 1,
10 g for 16 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 2
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 7.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 2-5

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3.2 Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6§ or IEC 255-6

and DIN 57435 Part 303.
Voltage Test
Per IEC 255-5.
2.5 kV AC, 1 s.
Direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test of the power supply inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Additional Thermal Test

100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded
2.4 Environmental Conditions
Environment
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range: -5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
Storage and transit: -25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F)
Humidity
 75 % relative humidity (annual mean),
56 days at  95 % relative humidity and 40°C, condensation not permissible.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2.5 Inputs and Outputs
Measuring inputs
Current
Nominal current In: 1 and 5 A AC (adjustable)
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.1 VA at In
Load rating:
continuous: 4 In (20 A)
for 10 s: 30 In (150 A)
for 1 s: 100 In (500 A)
Nominal surge current: 250 In
Voltage
Nominal voltage Vn: 50 to 130 V AC (settable)
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vn = 130 V AC
Load rating: continuous 150 V AC
Frequency
Nominal frequency fn:
16 2/3 Hz, 25 Hz, 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable)
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fn
2-6 P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Binary (opto) signal inputs

Threshold Pickup and Drop-off Points as per Ordering Option
18 V standard variant (VA,n: = 24 to 250 V DC):
Switching threshold in the range 14 V to 19 V DC
Special variants with switching thresholds from 58 to 72 % of the nominal input voltage
(i.e. definitively 'low' for VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively 'high' for VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage)
"Special variant 73 V": Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC

Power consumption per input (depending upon order option)

Standard variant:
Vin = 19 to 110 V DC: 0.5 W ± 30 %,
Vin > 110 V DC: Vin  5 mA ± 30 %.
Special variant:
Vin > Switching threshold: VA  5 mA ± 30 %.
Notes
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most
applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300V DC.
Direct Current Input

Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,n (IDC,n = 20 mA)
Maximum permissible continuous current: 50 mA
Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V
Input load: 100 
Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,n (adjustable)
Resistance thermometer
Resistance thermometer: only PT 100 permitted,
Mapping curve as per IEC 751.§
Value range: -40,0 ... +215.0 °C
3-wire configuration: max. 20  per conductor.
Open and short-circuited input permitted.
Open-circuit monitoring:  > +215 °C und  < -40 °C
P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 2-7

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Output relays
Binary I/O module X (4H):
with heavy duty contacts, use only for direct voltage/current
Rated voltage: 250 V DC
Continuous current: 10 A
Short-duration current: 250 A for 30 ms,
30 A for 3 s
Making capacity: 30 A
Breaking capacity: 7500 W (resistive load) or 30 A at 250 V DC,
Maximum values: 30 A and 300 V DC
2500 W inductive(L/R 40 ms) or 10 A at 250 V DC,
Maximum values: 10 A and 300 V DC
All other modules:

Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC
Continuous current: 5A
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4
BCD measured data output

Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399
Analog measured data

output
Value range: 0 to 20 mA
Permissible load: 0 to 500 
Maximum output voltage: 15 V
2-8 P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.6 Interfaces

Input or output:
via 7 keys and an LCD display consisting of 4 x 20 characters
State and fault signals:

23 LED indicators (5 fixed assignment, 18 freely configurable)
PC interface
Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
Communication interfaces
Communication module A can have two communication channels – depending on the
version.
Channel 1 is designed for twisted pair connection or fiber optic connection, whereas
Channel 2 is intended for twisted pair connection only.
For one channel, interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101,
MODBUS, or DNP 3.0 can be set. The second channel can only be operated using the
interface protocol based on IEC 60870-5-103, as compatible with MiCOM S1.
Wire Leads
Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged:
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Module Transmission rate Transmission Protocol

A 0336 426 300 to 19 200 baud (adjustable) IEC 60870-5-103
(one channel available)
A 9650 356 300 to 64 000 baud (adjustable) Can be set by user for
(two channels available) one channel
Plastic Fiber Connection

Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
Optical input: max. -5 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 45 m

1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 2-9

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

Distance to be bridged 1) : max. 400 m

Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125

Optical output: min. -16 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 1400 m

IEC Communication
interface
Wire Leads
IEC 61850-compliant, Ethernet-based communications:
Transmission rate: 10 or 100 Mbit/s
RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
Maximum distance: 100 m
for optical fibers (100 Mbit/s)

IEC 61850-compliant, Ethernet-based communications:
ST connector or SC connector
Optical wavelength: typically 1,300 nm
Glass fiber G50/125:
Glass fiber G62.5/125:
Optical output: min. -20 dBm
IRIG-B interface
B122 format
Amplitude-modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
BCD-coded variation data (daily)
1) 1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
2-10 P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.7 Information Output
Counters, measured data, and indications: see Chapters 7 and 8.
2.8 Settings
Typical characteristic data

Main function
Minimum output pulse duration for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Differential protection
Minimum tripping time:
without inrush stabilization: approx. 0.5 periods
with inrush stabilization: approx. 1.3 periods,
Resetting ratio: 0.95
Transverse differential protection

Minimum tripping time: Two sampling intervals (dependent on system frequency set)
Minimum command time: approx. 0.6 periods
Resetting ratio: 0.95
Definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection

Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis): 0.95
Shortest tripping time:
Timer stages:
non-directional operation: approx. 0.7 periods
directional operation: approx. 1.2 periods
Residual current stage:  0.25 periods (with tIN> = 0 ms)
Starting reset time: approx. 1.5 periods (with double operate value set to 0)
Time-voltage protection
Shortest tripping time:
V<, V<<: approx. 0.8 periods
V>, V>>: approx. 0.8 periods,
Starting reset time: approx. 1.5 periods,
Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis):
adjustable from 1 to 10%
P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 2-11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9 Deviations
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values
Definitions
‘Reference Conditions’
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fn, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,n
‘Deviation’
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Inrush Stabilization
(Harmonic Restraint)
Deviation: ± 5 %
Differential protection,
Transverse differential
protection
Differential measuring system
for Id = 0.2 Iref: ± 5 %
Harmonic restraint: ± 10 %
Definite-time and inverse-

time overcurrent protection
Deviation: ± 3 %
Over-/undervoltage
protection
Operate Values: ± 3 % (in the range 0.6 to 1.4 Vn)
Over-/underfrequency
protection
Operate values f<>: ± 40 mHz
Operate values df/dt: ± 0.1 Hz/s
Thermal overload
protection
Operate values : ± 5 %
20 mA direct current input

Deviation: ± 1 %
PT100 resistance
thermometer
Deviation: ± 2 ° or ± 1 %
20 mA analog measured
data output
Deviation: ± 1 %
Output residual ripple with max. load: ± 1 %
2-12 P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages
Definitions
‘Reference Conditions’
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,n.
‘Deviation’
Definite-time stages
Deviation 1 % + 20 ms to 40 ms
Inverse-time stages
Deviation where I 2 Iref: ± 5 % + 10 to 25 ms
For IEC characteristic ‘extremely inverse’ and for thermal overload
characteristics: ± 7.5 % + 10 to 20 ms
P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 2-13

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Definitions
Reference Conditions
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,n.
Deviation
Operating Data
Measurement
Measuring Input Currents
Deviation: ± 1 %
Measuring Input Voltages

Deviation: ± 0.5 %
Frequency
Deviation: ± 10 mHz
Direct Current of Measured Data Input and Output

Deviation: ± 1 %
Temperature
Deviation: ± 2 °C
Fault data acquisition

Short-Circuit Current and Voltage
Deviation: ± 3 %
Restraining and Differential Currents

Deviation: ± 5 %
Internal clock
With free running internal clock:
Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval  1 min):

Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface: ± 1 ms
2-14 P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.10 Recording Functions
Organization of the Recording Memories:
Operating data memory

Scope: All signals relating to normal operation; from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals
Depth: The 100 most recent signals
Monitoring signal memory

Scope: All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals
Depth: Up to 30 signals
Overload memory
Number: The 8 most recent overload events
Scope: All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals
Depth: 200 entries per overload event
Fault memory
Number: The 8 most recent fault events
Scope: Signals:
All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals
Fault values:
Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
Depth: Signals:
200 entries per fault
Fault values:
max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user; storage capacity with a
total of 32 s is available for all faults, i.e.
2
533 cycles for fn = 16 /3 Hz
800 cycles for fn = 25 Hz
P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 2-15

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Resolution of the Recorded Data:
Signals, Fault Values:

Time resolution: 20 samples per period
Currents
Dynamic range: 25 In
Amplitude resolution: 2.0 mA r.m.s. for In = 1 A
10.1 mA r.m.s. for In = 5 A
Voltages
Dynamic range: 150 V AC
Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mV r.m.s.
2.11 Power Supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,n:

24 V DC or 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (as per ordering option)
Operating range for direct voltage:

0.8 to 1.1 VA,n with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,n
Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,n
Nominal burden where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration:

Relay energized, approx.: 11 W
Relay operated, approx.: 44 W
Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms

Permitted supply interruption: 50 ms for interruption of VA 220 V DC
2-16 P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications
The following equation is used to calculate the specifications of a current transformer for
the offset maximum primary current:
 
Vsat  Rn  R i   n  In  R op  R i  k  I'1, max
with:
Vsat: saturation voltage (IEC knee point)
I'1,max: non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side
In: rated secondary current
n: rated overcurrent factor
k: over-dimensioning factor
Rn: rated burden
Rop actual connected operating burden
Ri internal burden
The specifications of a current transformer can then be calculated for the minimum
required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:
Vsat  (Rop+Ri)  k  I'1,max
As an alternative, the specifications of a current transformer can also be calculated for

the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pn as
follows:
Rop+Ri Pop+Pi I'1

n  Rn+R  k  Pn+P  K 
i i max,In
with:
Pn = Rn  In²
Pop = Rop  In²
Pi = Ri  In²
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated for lack of
saturation by inserting instead of the required over-dimensioning factor k its maximum
value:
k max  1  T1
with:
: system angular frequency
T1: system time constant
P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 2-17

2 Technical Data
(continued)
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to calculate the over-

dimensioning factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function
is guaranteed under the given conditions.
The transformer differential protection device is equipped with a saturation discriminator.

This function will generate a stabilizing blocking signal if a differential current occurs as a
consequence of transformer saturation with an external fault (in contrast to an internal
fault). For the passing maximum fault current in the case of an external fault,
overdimensioning is, therefore, obviated.
For the maximum fault current with an internal fault, static saturation up to a maximum
saturation factor ‘fS’ of 4 is permissible. This corresponds to an overdimensioning
factor ‘k’ of 0.25.
The implementation of these requirements is comparatively unproblematic as

transformer differential protection would require overdimensioning in accordance with the
total fault clearing time, which includes the total circuit-breaker open time for an external
fault.
Current transformers should observe the error limit values for class 5P.
2-18 P638/EN M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
3 Operation
3.1 Modular Structure
The P638, a numerical device, is part of the Easergy MiCOM 30 family of products.
The device types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware
modules. Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P638.
3-1 Basic hardware structure
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-1

3 Operation
(continued)
The external analog and binary quantities - electrically isolated - are converted to the
internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y and X. Commands and signals
generated by the device internally are transmitted to external destinations via floating
contacts through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to
the power supply module V, which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required
internally.
Analog data are transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B
to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary
for the conversion of measured analog variables, including multiplexers and
analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y is
transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed
to the processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The
processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary signals,
generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X
via the digital bus module. The processor module also handles overall device
communication. As an option, communication module A can be mounted on the
processor module to provide serial communication with substation control systems.
The control and display elements of the integrated user interface (HMI) and the
integrated PC interface are housed on control module L.
3-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between the user
and the device:
Integrated front panel user interface (HMI)

PC interface
Rear communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged
within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the
device family. The main branches are:
‘Settings’ branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings, including the
device identification data, the configuration parameters for adapting the device's
interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for adapting the device functions
to the process. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means
that the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails.
‘Measurement + Tests’
branch
This branch carries all information relevant for operation such as measured operating
data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently
is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here, for example those for
resetting counters, memories and displays.
‘Fault and Events’ branch

The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this group is
therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault
data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can be read out when
required.
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance
with the user’s choice. The P638's settings and signals are listed in tabular format in
chapters 7, 8 and 10.
The configuration of the user interface (HMI) also permits the installation of Measured
Value 'Panels’ on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically displayed for
specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal operation to
operation under overload conditions to operation during a ground fault to operation
following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P638 provides the measured data
relevant for the prevailing conditions.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-3

3 Operation
(continued)
3.3 Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (Function Group HMI)
The P638 offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured values relevant at
a given time.
During normal power system operation, the Operation Panel is displayed. As an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel - provided that measured
values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload event, the
display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event.
In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault
memories are reset.
Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at
least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on the
Operation Panel by means of an ‘m out of n’ parameter. If more measured values are
selected for display than the HMI display can accommodate, then the display will switch
to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at H M I : P a n e l H o l d -
T i m e or when the appropriate key on the user interface (HMI) is pressed.
LOC: Fct.
Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
Measured value 1 m out of n

Measured value 2
Measured value 3 LOC: AAutom. LOC: Autom.
return time return time
[ 003 014 ]
Measured value n
LOC: Hold-time LOC: Hold-time
Selected meas. values for Panels for panels
[ 031 075 ]
FT_RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
S1 1 ≥1 C
R1
OL_RC: Record.
in progress ≥1
[ 035 003 ] Operation Panel
GF_RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 005 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
50Z01CXA_EN
3-2 Operation Panel
3-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel
by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the HMI display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at H M I : P a n e l H o l d - T i m e or when the
appropriate key on the user interface (HMI) is pressed.
LOC: Fct. Fault

Panel
[ 053 003 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Selected meas.values
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
Fault Panel
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
50Z01EJA_EN
3-3 Fault Panel
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-5

3 Operation
(continued)
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there
is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured.
The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload event ends, unless a fault
occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel
by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the HMI display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at H M I : P a n e l H o l d - T i m e or when the
appropriate key on the user interface (HMI) is pressed.
LOC: Fct.
Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values

LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Overload Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0140 A_EN
3-4 Overload Panel
3-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Function keys on the front

panel user interface (HMI)
The front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with six function keys that offer user-
definable functional assignment. Each function key may either be assigned with an
individual function by setting the parameters F _ K E Y : F c t . A s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1
to F6), with one of the two available group reset selections or with one of the two
available menu jump lists.
The figure in section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' shows the
operation with function key F1 as an example. Function key F1 is only enabled after the
associated password, as defined at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d F u n c t . K e y 1 , has been
entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the
time period set at F _ K E Y : F c n K e y R e t u r n T i m e . Thereafter, the function key
is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to
F6.
Further information on function keys and their application can be found in Chapter 3,
section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting
Actions' as well as in Chapter 8, section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)'.
Note: Each of the 6 keys has an LED indicator situated next to it which is freely
configurable, such as the other12 LED indicators, but independent of the configuration of
the function keys (i.e. the function assignment is for red and green light emission).
Configuration of the
READ key
Similar to the setting at H M I : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t x up to 16 functions may also
be selected from the same menu jump list at H M I : F c t . R e a d K e y . They are
triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the READ key.
CLEAR C key
Similar to the setting at M A I N : F c t . A s s i g n . R e s e t x up to 10 reset functions may
be selected from a list at H M I : F c t . R e s e t K e y . These are carried out by pressing
the CLEAR C key.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-7

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4 Serial interfaces
The P638 has a front port PC link as standard. Optionally the communication module A
providing two communication channels is available. Communication between the P638
and SCADA is through the communication module A. Setting and interrogation is
possible through all P638 interfaces.
Two rear port communications interfaces may be fitted. The settings of rear port
communications interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communications
channels 1 or 2 (see function group "MAIN"). If the COMM1 settings have been
assigned to communications channel 2, then the settings of communications interface 2
(COMM2) will automatically be active for communications channel 1. Communication
channel 2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P638 if its PC link has been
de-activated. As soon as the PC link is used to transmit data, communication channel 2
becomes "dead".
If tests are run on the P638, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this way the
PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see
function group "MAIN").
3-8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.1 PC Link (Function Group PC)
Communication between the device and a PC is done through the PC link. In order for
data transfer between the P638 and the PC to function, several settings must be made in
the P638.
There is an operating program available as an accessory for control of the P638 (see
Chapter 13).
PC: Manufacturer
[ 003 183 ]
PC: Bay Address

[ 003 068 ]
PC: Relay Address

[ 003 069 ]
PC: Baud Rate

[ 003 081 ]
PC: Parity Bit

[ 003 181 ]
PC: Spontan. Sig.

Enable
[ 003 187 ]
PC: Select.
Spontan.Sig.
[ 003 189 ]
PC: Sig/Meas.
Val.Block PC: Transm Enab
[ 003 086 ] Cycl Dat
[ 003 084 ]
0
Cycl. Data ILS Tel.
1 [ 003 185 ]
0: No
PC: Delta
1: Yes Meas.v.ILS Tel
[ 003 155 ]
PC: Delta t
MAIN: Prot. Ext.
Disabled [ 003 058 ]
[ 038 046 ]
PC: Time-Out
[ 003 188 ]
PC: Command
Blocking
[ 003 182 ] C
0
1 C
0: No
1: Yes
PC Interface
MAIN: Test Mode

[ 037 071 ]
68Z60ECA_UK
3-5 PC link settings
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-9

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.2 Rear Port Communications Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)
Several interface protocols are available at the rear port communications interface 1.
The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P638:
IEC 60870-5-103, “Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative

interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI
Recommendation, “Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility
level 2”, February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring
IEC 870-5-101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission
protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks", first edition
1995-11
ILS-C, internal protocol of Schneider Electric
MODBUS
DNP 3.0
COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P638.
The rear port communications interface can be blocked through a binary signal input.
In addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal
input.
3-10 P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-6 Rear port communications interface 1, selecting the interface protocol
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-11

3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line Idle COMM1: Octet

State Address ASDU
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 073 ]
COMM1: Baud Rate COMM1: Spontan.

Sig. Enable
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 177 ]
COMM1: Parity Bit COMM1: Select.

[ 003 171 ] Spontan.Sig.
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1: Mon.33-bit COMM1: Transm Enab
Dead Time Cycl Dat
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: Mon. Time COMM1: Cycl. Data
COMM1: Selected Polling ILS Tel.
protocol [ 003 202 ] [ 003 175 ]
304 415
COMM1: IEC COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta

870-5-103 Comm. Address Meas.v.ILS Tel
[ 003 219 ] [ 003 072 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: Test COMM1: Delta t
Monitor On
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: Enabled
USER COMM1: COMM1: Contin.
[ 003 170 ] Manufacturer General Scan
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 077 ]
0
C
1
0: No
C
1: Yes
COMM1: Command
Blocking C
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: Test Mode Communication

[ 037 071 ] interface
COMM1: USER Sig/

Meas Block
[ 003 076 ]
0
1
COMM1: Sig/Meas.
0: No Val.Block
1: Yes [ 037 075 ]
COMM1: Sig/meas.
Block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN: Prot. Ext.

Disabled
[ 038 046 ]
68Z60FFA_UK
3-7 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol
3-12 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line Idle COMM1: Contin.

State General Scan
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Baud Rate COMM1: Comm.

Address Length
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 201 ]
COMM1: Parity Bit COMM1: Octet 2

[ 003 171 ] Comm. Addr.
[ 003 200 ]
COMM1: Mon.33-bit COMM1: Cause

Dead Time Transm. Length
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 192 ]
COMM1: Mon. Time COMM1: Address
Polling Length ASDU
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 193 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Octet 2

Comm. Address Addr. ASDU
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 194 ]
COMM1: Test COMM1: Addr.

Monitor On Length Inf.Obj
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 196 ]
COMM1: COMM1: Oct.3 Addr.
Manufacturer Inf.Obj.
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 197 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Inf.No.<-
Address ASDU >Funct.Type
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 195 ]
COMM1: Spontan. COMM1: Time Tag

Sig. Enable Length
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 198 ]
COMM1: Select. COMM1: ASDU1 /
Spontan.Sig. ASDU20 Conv.
[ 003 179 ] [ 003 190 ]
COMM1: Transm Enab COMM1: Konver-

Cycl Dat tierung ASDU2
[ 003 074 ] [ 003 191 ]
COMM1: Selected COMM1: Cycl. Data COMM1: Initializ
protocol ILS Tel. Signal
304 415
[ 003 175 ] [ 003 199 ]
COMM1: IEC
870-5-101 COMM1: Delta COMM1: Balanced
[ 003 218 ] Meas.v.ILS Tel Operation
[ 003 150 ] [ 003 226 ]
COMM1: Delta t COMM1: Direction

COMM1: Enabled Bit
USER [ 003 053 ] [ 003 227 ]
[ 003 170 ]
COMM1: Mon.Time to
Acknowl.
0 [ 003 228 ]
1
C
0: No
1: Yes
C
COMM1: Command
Blocking
[ 003 174 ]
C
MAIN: Test Mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1: MUSER Sig/ C
Meas Block
[ 003 076 ]
0 Communication
interface
1
0: No COMM1: Sig/Meas.
Val.Block
1: Yes [ 037 075 ]
COMM1: Sig/meas.
Block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN: Prot. Ext.

Disabled
[ 038 046 ]
68Z60FGA_UK
3-8 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-13

3 Operation
(continued)
68Z60FHA_UK
3-9 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the ILS_C interface protocol
3-14 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-10 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-15

3 Operation
(continued)
3-11 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol
3-16 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-12 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-17

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
For interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, or ILS_C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control
station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting parameters.
3-13 Checking spontaneous signals
3-18 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.3 Rear Port Communications Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2)
The rear port communications interface 2 supports the interface protocol based on
IEC 60870-5-103.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P638.
COMM2: Delta V
68Z60ELA_UK
3-14 Setting the rear port communications interface 2
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-19

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting parameters.
3-15 Checking spontaneous signals
3-20 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.4 Communication Interface IEC61850

(Function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)
The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups and
the Ethernet module.
Note:
The IEC 61850 Communic. function group is only available as an alternative to function
group COMM1 (hardware ordering option!).
3.4.4.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)
As a further option the P638 now includes an interface protocol according to the Ethernet
based communication standard IEC 61850.
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard.
The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability
of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company
or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation.
Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level,
for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a
data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically
created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices
and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate
engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device,
based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and
processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control
device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations
and signal images.
The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used
with the P638, is available:
IDC file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language)
with a description of data, properties and services, available from the device, that are
to be imported into the system configurator.
PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available services.
MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available object types.
ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter
addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with
the device data model as per IEC 61850.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-21

3 Operation
(continued)
Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface
where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of the two interfaces
is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter
I E C : E t h e r n e t M e d i a . For the optical interface on the Ethernet communications
module the user may either select the ordering option ST connector or SC connector
with 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm. The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote
access with the operating program MiCOM S1 (function group COMM2).
Notes: The P638 may only be equipped with the optional Ethernet module as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet based communication protocol IEC 61850 is only available as an
alternative to function group COMM1.
Activating and Enabling

The IEC function group can be activated by setting the parameter I E C : I E C 6 1 8 5 0
C o m m u n i c . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication
module is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated with this
function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting I E C : G e n e r a l E n a b l e
USER.
The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e
C o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with
MAIN: Enable Configuration.
Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is
common with other protocols. Instead server or client functionalities, as defined in the
'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the
devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices.
A client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'.
In a network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic
information.
In its function as server the P638 can supply up to 16 clients with information.
Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization occurs via the SNTP protocol, defined as
standard for Ethernet. Here the P638 functions as a SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from
SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization
occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the network,
and in the second operating mode the P638 requests the device specific time signal
during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is used only when messages are no
longer received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the MAIN
function then, by selecting "COMM1", synchronization per IEC 61850 is automatically
active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
3-22 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault Transmission
Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer".
Transmission of "Goose
Messages"
The so-called "Goose Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas
normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "Goose
Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority.
Furthermore these "Goose Messages" can be received by all participants in the
respective sub-network, independent of their server or client function. In IEC 61850
"Goose Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between
two or more devices. Application fields are, for example, a reverse interlocking, a
transfer trip or a decentralized substation interlock. In future the "Goose Message" will
therefore replace a wired or serial protective interface.
According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "Goose Messages", GSSE and
IEC-GOOSE. The GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple
configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However IEC-GOOSE
enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary
information, integer values or even analog measured values. But this will require more
extensive configuration with the help of the data model from the field unit situated on the
opposite side. With IEC-GOOSE the P638 at this time supports sending and receiving of
binary information.
Communication with the
Operating Program
MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet
Interface
Direct access by the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface on the
device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an
Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated operating
program MiCOM S1 (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is
accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client
communication and "Goose Messages".
Available are all the familiar functions offered by the operating program MiCOM S1 such
as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group IEC are described
in chapters 7 and 8.
3.4.4.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic

devices) in a local network, the P638 provides function group GOOSE (IEC-GOOSE) as
defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GOOSE features high-speed and secure
transmission for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands,
blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
"Goose Messages" are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. "Goose
Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on.
The GOOSE function group can be activated by setting the parameter
G O O S E : G e n . O b j O r . S u b s t E v e n t . This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all
data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals
etc.) become visible.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-23

3 Operation
(continued)
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting G O O S E : G e n e r a l

Enable USER.
C o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with
M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n E n a b l e d . In addition function group IEC must be configured
and enabled.
Sending GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary state
signals is made by setting G O O S E : O u t p u t n F c t . A s s i g . (n = 1 to 32).
Assignment of data object indexes to logic state signals is made in the range from 1 to
32 according to the assignment to GOOSE outputs.
GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state
signal or an external device. There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending
time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after
2 seconds there is no further state change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at
2-second intervals.
In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the
Goose ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered
through setting parameters. Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration
Revision' with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up
of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string
"System/LLNO$GooseST".
GOOSE-DataSet: LLN0$GooseST
Identification: Multicast MAC address: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
VLAN Identifier: 0
VLAN Priority: 4
Application ID: 12288
Goose ID: "Local IED"
DataSet Ref. : "Local IEDSystem/LLNO"
DataSet Cfg. Revision: 100
Data range: Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out1/stVal GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig.
Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out2/stVal GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig.

… …
Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out32/stVal GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.
64Z6090B_EN
3-16 Basic structure of sent GOOSE
3-24 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Receiving GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 16 logic binary state signals and the two-pole contact position signals
from up to 16 external devices can be received. Configuration of the logic state signals
received
(G O O S E : I n p u t n F c t . A s s i g . (n = 1 to 16))
is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration
of validity has elapsed without having received this GSSE again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective
default value ( G O O S E : I n p u t n D e f a u l t (n = 1 to 16)).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
3.4.4.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic

devices) in a local network, the P638 provides, as an additional functionality, the function
group GSSE (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the standard IEC 61850. GSSE features
high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as reverse
interlocking, trip commands, blocking, enabling and other signals.
Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter
G S S E : G e n . S u b s t . S t a t . E v e n t . This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data
points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.)
become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
GSSE: General Enable USER.
c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with
M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition the function group IEC must be configured and
enabled.
Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary state
signals is made by setting
G S S E : F c t . A s s i g n m . O u t p . (n = 1 to 32). Each selected state signal is to be
assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (G S S E : O u t p u t n b i t p a i r (n = 1 to 32)), which will
transmit this state signal.
GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will
be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs
at the given cycle time set with the parameter G S S E : M i n . c y c l e . The cycles for
the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set
with the parameter G S S E : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to
the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (G S S E : M a x . c y c l e ) , then
GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which
was set in function group IEC.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-25

3 Operation
(continued)
Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the
logic binary state signals received (G S S E : I n p u t n F c t . A s s i g . , n = 1 to 32) is
made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the required
information, must be selected by setting the IED name (G S S E : I n p u t n I E D
n a m e , n = 1 bis 32) . Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will
occur by setting the bit pair (G S S E : I n p u t n B i t P a i r , n = 1 bis 32) .
Each GSSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the duration
of validity has elapsed without having received this GSSE again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective
default value ( G S S E : I n p u t n D e f a u l t , n = 1 to 32).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
3-26 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)
If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of
the P638 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface.
It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the
current year). Using this information and the year set at the P638, the P638 calculates
the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling or enabling the

IRIG-B interface
The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.
Ready to synchronize
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P638 checks the received
signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P638. If the P638 does not
receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will not be ready any longer.
3-17 IRIG-B interface
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-27

3 Operation
(continued)
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)
The P638 includes six additional function keys that are freely configurable. Function
keys F1 to Fx will only be enabled after the password has been entered at
F_Key: Password Funct.Key x.
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure Configuration

and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or
a menu jump list.. After the password has been entered the function key will remain
active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : F c n K e y R e t u r n T i m e . Thereafter, the
function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for
function keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a function key is configured as a control key a
password request is only issued when the command "Local/Remote switching" has been
assigned to this function key.
Configuration of function
keys with a single function
Each function key may be configured with a single function by selecting a logic state
signal at F _ K E Y : F c t . A s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6), but with the exception:
H M I : T r i g . M e n u J m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). This function is triggered by pressing
the respective function key on the P638.
function keys with a group
resetting function
Respective binary signal inputs (if previously unavailable) are assigned to all default
reset functions. Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two
group resetting functions assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . A s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6)
by selecting the listing at M A I N : G r o u p R e s e t x E X T (x: 1 or 2).
By pressing the assigned function key all (up to 10) reset actions selected at
M A I N : F c t . A s s i g n . R e s e t x (x: 1 or 2) are triggered.
Configuration of function
keys with menu jump lists
Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu jump lists
assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . A s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the listing at
H M I : T r i g . M e n u J m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). The functions of the selected menu
jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the assigned function key.
Both menu jump lists are assembled at H M I : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2).

Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters, event counters and/or event logs may be
selected.
Note: LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the respective
function key configuration.
3-28 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating mode of the

function keys
For each function key the operating mode may be selected at
F _ K E Y : O p e r a t i n g m o d e F x (Fx: F1 to F6). Here it is possible to select whether
the function key operates as a key or as a switch. In the "Key" operating mode the
selected function is active while the function key is pressed. In the "Switch" operating
mode the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed.
The state of the function keys can be displayed.
Handling keys
If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when a
function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be triggered
when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for the other keys.
3-18 Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a menu jump list.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-29

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
The P638 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the system.
The functions that will be activated in the P638 by triggering these binary signal inputs
are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. In order to ensure that
during normal operation the P638 will recognize an input signal, it must persist for at
least 20 ms. With the occurrence of a general starting this time period may have to be
increased to 40 ms under unfavorable conditions.
Configuring the binary

inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same
function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated
from several control points having different signal voltages.
In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address
description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization commands

are not mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog module as these have an
increased reaction time due to internal elaboration.
binary inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (Active 'high' mode) or absence (Active 'low' mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal. The display of the state of a binary signal
input – "low" or "high" – is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the signal
input.
Filter function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient interference
peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes Active 'high', filt. or Active 'low', filt.).
With this function enabled a status change at the binary logic input is only signaled when
the input signal remains at a steady signal level during a set number of sampling steps
(sampling step size = period / 20). The number of sampling steps is set at parameter
INP: Filter.
3-30 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
INP: Fct.assignm.
Uxx
[ XXX XXX ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Meas. Function & Function enabled
INP: Mode U xxx

[ YYY XXX ]
2
3
0: active "Low"
1: active "High"
2: active "Low", filt.
3: active "High",filt.
-Uxxx
&
Input signal
&
INP: Filter &

[ 010 220 ]
&
INP: Control
& U xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
&
12Z6213 A_EN
3-19 Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-31

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8 Measured Data Input (Function Group RTDmA)
The P638 has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current is fed
to the P638 through one of the inputs. The other input is designed for connection of a
resistance thermometer.
The input current IDC is displayed as a measured operating value. The current that is
conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating
value. In addition, it is monitored by the limit value monitoring function to detect whether
it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").
The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and

monitored by the limit value monitoring function to determine whether it exceeds or falls
below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").

measured data input
function
The measured data input can be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.
3-20 Disabling or enabling the measured data input function
3-32 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8.1 Direct Current Input
External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is

directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the temperature, for
example. If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the
measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged, provided that
the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, it may be necessary for certain
applications to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range
with a higher or lower sensitivity. By setting the value pair R T D m A : I D C x and
R T D m A : I D C , l i n x , the user specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the
current that is monitored by the limit value monitoring function, i.e., IDC,lin. The resulting
points, which are called "interpolation points", are connected by straight lines in an
IDC-IDClin diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify
two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting values (see figure 3-21). Up to
20 interpolation points are available for implementing a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a monotone
rising/rising curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting differs, the
signal C H EC K: In va l i d Sc a l i n g ID C will be generated.
IDClin / IDC,nom
1.2
1.1
1
IDClin20
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
IDClin1 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 IDC/ IDC,nom
IDC1 IDC20
D5Z52KDA
19Z5266A_EN
3-21 Example of the conversion of 4-10 mA input current to 0-20 mA monitored current, IDClin
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-33

3 Operation
(continued)
IDC,lin / IDC,n
0.8
Interpolation points
I DC,lin20 0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4 0.5
0.4
IDC,lin 3 0.3
IDC,lin 2 0.2
IDC ,lin1 0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
I DC1 I DC2 I DC3 IDC 4 IDC20 IDC / IDC ,n

Enable IDC p.u.
D5Z52KEC_UK
3-22 Example of a characteristic having five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken
line)
Zero suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting R T D m A: E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the
current IDClin will be displayed as having a value of ‘0’.
Open-circuit and overload

monitoring
The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below
the set threshold R T D m A : I D C < O p e n C i r c u i t , the signal R T D m A: O p e n C i r c .
2 0 m A i n p . is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA input against overloading.
If it exceeds the set threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal R T D m A: O ve r l o a d 2 0 m A
I n p u t is issued.
3-34 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-23 Analog direct current input
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-35

3 Operation
(continued)
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and
are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-24 Scaling of the linearized measured value
3-36 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8.2 Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer
This input is designed for connection of a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The mapping
curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in DIN IEC 751. If the
PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method, then no further
calibration is required.
Open-circuit monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal R T D m A: PT 1 0 0
F a u l ty is issued.
3-25 Temperature measurement using a resistance thermometer
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-37

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays

(Function Group OUTP)
The P638 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely configured by the user.
Configuration of the output

relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be
assigned to several output relays by configuration.

output relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines whether the
output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or normally closed
arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching can be disabled
either manually using a setting parameter, or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input, at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on
the selected operating mode.
Blocking the output relays

The P638 offers the option of blocking all output relays using a setting parameter or by
way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise
blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs or if the self-
monitoring function detects a hardware fault. (The signal M AIN : Bl o c k e d /F a u l ty is
coupled to the activation of the LED labeled 'OUT OF SERVICE'.)
3-38 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
OUTP: Outp.rel.
block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP: Outp.
1 ≥1 relays blocked
[ 021 015 ]
0: No
OUTP: Block 1: Yes
outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ] ≥1
MAIN: Prot.
ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON: Hardware
fault
304 950
OUTP: Oper. mode

K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1 ≥1
2
3
4 -K xxx
≥1
5
6
≥1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset ≥1
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
5: NE updating & ≥1 OUTP: State K xxx
[ zzz zzz ]
6: NE manual reset &
&
& ≥1
OUTP: Fct.
assignm. K xxx & S1 1
[ yyy xxx ]
R1
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
≥1 & ≥1
Selected signals
&
FT_RC: Record.
in progress OUTP: Latching
[ 035 000 ] 1 reset
& [ 040 088 ]
FT_RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP: Reset
latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
0
1 1
100 ms
0: don’t execute
1: execute
OUTP: Reset
latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
50Z0141 A_EN
3-26 Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-39

3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the output relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it using a setting
parameter. Triggering persists for the duration of the set hold time.
3-27 Testing the output relays
3-40 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10 Analog Output Channel (Function Group mA_OP)
Measured values made available by the P638 can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current. Output as direct
current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog module Y. BCD-coded
output, however, is possible, regardless of whether the device is equipped with analog
module Y or not.

analog output channel
function
The measured data output function can be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.
3-28 Disabling or enabling the analog output channel
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-41

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling the analog output

channel
Measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that the
function m A _ O P : O u t p . E n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If the function
m A _ O P : O u t p . E n a b l e d E X T has not been configured to a binary signal input, then
the measured data output is always enabled.
3-29 Enabling the analog output channel
3-42 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the measured

data output function
BCD or analog output of measured values is terminated for the duration of the hold time
if one of the following conditions is met:
The measured data output is reset either using a setting parameter or an

appropriately configured binary signal input.
There is a general reset.
The LED indicators have been reset.
MEASO: Reset
output USER
[ 037 116 ]
0
1
0: don’t execute
1: execute
MEASO: Reset MEASO: Output

reset
output EXT [ 037 117 ]
[ 036 087 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER MEASO: Reset
[ 003 002 ]
meas.val.outp.
1: execute 304 601
MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
47Z13H6A_EN
3-30 Resetting the measured data output function
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-43

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.1 BCD Measured Data Output
The user can select a measured value for output in BCD form by assigning output relays.
The selected measured value is available in BCD-coded form for the duration of the set
hold time m A_ O P: H o l d T i m e O u tp u t BC D . If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a measured value.
Output of measured event

values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate output of
the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-
started. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
Scaling
The resolution for measured data output is defined by setting the scaling factor.
The scaling factor should be selected so that the value 399 is not exceeded by the
maximum measured value to be output. If this should occur or if the measured value is
outside the acceptable measuring range, then the value for "Overflow" (all relays
triggered) is transmitted.
M x ,max
k x ,scal =
scaling factor
where:
Mx,scal: scaled measured value
Mx,max maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value
3-44 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-31 BCD measured data output
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-45

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.2 Analog Measured Data Output
Analog output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measured values available in the P638 for output in the
form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be
defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring
instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value.
The selected measured value is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold
time m A_ O P: H o l d T i m e O u tp u t A- x. If the selected variable was not measured,
then there is no output of a measured value.
Output of measured event

values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate output of
the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-
started. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
Configuration of output
relays assigned to the
output channels
The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays
assigned to the output channels are configured for m A_ O P: Va l u e A- x O u tp u t,
since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see terminal
connection diagrams).
3-46 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling
The minimum and maximum values to be transmitted for the selected measured value
and one additional value for the knee point must be scaled to the range limit value of the
measured value. By setting the following parameters the user can obtain an analogue
output characteristic as shown in figure 3-32.
mA_OP: Scaled Min. Val. A-x

mA_OP: Scaled Knee Val. A-x
mA_OP: Scaled Max. Val. A-x
mA_OP: AnOut Min. Val. A-x
mA_OP: AnOut Knee Point A-x
mA_OP: AnOut Max. Val. A-x
The scaled values that need to be set can be calculated according to the following
formulas:
Formulas Example
Key to the Formulas: Let voltage VAB be selected as the
measured value to be transmitted. Let the
Mx,RL: Range limit of the selected measuring range be 0 to 1.5 Vn.
measured value
When Vn = 100 V, the range limit value in
Mx,min: minimum transmitted value the assumed example is 150 V.
for the selected measured
value Range to be transmitted:
0.02 to 1 Vn = 2 to 100 V
Mx,knee: knee point value transmitted
for the selected measured Knee point:
value 0.1 Vn = 10 V
Mx,max: maximum transmitted value

for the selected measured
value
Mx,scal,min: scaled minimum value
Mx,scal,knee: scaled knee point value
Mx,scal,max: scaled maximum value

Mx,min 2V
Mx,scal,min = M Mx,scal,min = 150V = 0.013
x,RL
Mx,knee 10V
Mx,scal,knee = M Mx,scal,knee = 150V = 0.067
x,RL
Mx,max 100V
Mx,scal,max = M Mx,scal,max = 150V = 0.67
x,RL
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-47

3 Operation
(continued)
By setting m A_ O P: An O u t M i n . Va l . A- x, the user can specify the output current

that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured
value to be transmitted. The setting at m A_ O P: An O u t M a x. Va l . A- x defines the
output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted.
By defining the knee point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with
different slopes. When making this setting the user must keep in mind that only a
monotonically rising-rising or falling-falling curve sense is allowed (no peaks or vee
shapes). If the wrong setting is entered, the signal C H EC K: In va l i d Sc a l i n g A- x
will be generated.
Ia / mA
20
Max.
output value18
Knee point
16
output value
14
12
10
6
Min.
output value 4
2
0
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0,013 0,067 0,667 1,0Mx,scal
D5Z52KFA
19Z5265A_EN
3-32 Example of a characteristic curve for analog output of measured data. In this example the range starting value is = 0; also possible is
directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data Output).
3-48 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-33 Analog measured data output
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-49

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured Data
Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 - 100%, can be written
to the following parameters of the P638 using the communications interface.
mA_OP: Output Value 1

These "external" measured values are output by the P638 either in BCD data form or as
load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured data output function or
the channels of the analog measured data output function are configured accordingly.
3-50 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
The P638 has 23 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Four of the LED
indicators are permanently assigned to functions. The other 12 LED indicators are freely
configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will emit either red or green or amber light
(amber is made up of red and green light and may not be configured independently).
Configuring the LED

indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color indications.
The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or colors),
if required.
LED indicator Label Configuration
H 1 (green) “HEALTHY” Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the device
(supply voltage is present).
H 17 (red) “EDIT MODE” Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input mode. Only when the device
is in this mode, can setting parameters be changed by pressing the “Up“
and “Down“ keys. (See Chapter 6, section 'Display and Keypad')
H 2 (amber) “OUT OF SERVICE” Permanently configured with function M AIN : Bl o c k e d /F a u l ty.

H 3 (amber) “ALARM” Permanently configured with function C H EC K: Al a r m ( L ED ) .
H 4 (red) “TRIP COMMAND” With the P638 this LED indicator is customarily configured with function
M A I N : G e n T r i p S i g n a l - but the configuration may be modified.
H 4 (green) ---- Function assignment to this green LED indicator is freely configurable.
H 5 to H 16 ---- For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may be
H 18 to H 23 configured freely and independently.
(Note: H10 – H 16 & H 18 – H 23 are not available with case 24T
devices.)
The drawing below shows the layout of the LED indicators situated on the user interface
(HMI).
H4
H3
TRIP
ALARM
F1 H18
H2 OUT OF SERVICE
H1
H17
HEALTHY
EDIT MODE
F2 H19
H5
H6
F3 H20
H7
H8 C
G
H9
H10
G F4 H21
H11
H12
G G F5
G
H13 H22
H14
H15
H16
G F6 H23
12 Z6100B_EN
P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-51

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating mode of the LED

indicators
For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be selected
separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will operate either in
energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode, whether it will be flashing and
whether it will be in latching mode. Latching is disabled either manually via setting
parameters or by an appropriately configured binary signal input (see "Main Functions of
the P638"), at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the
selected operating mode.
Therefore the operating modes turn out to be the 23=8 possible combinations of the
following components:
• flashing / continuous,
• energize-on-signal (ES) / normally-energized (NE),
• updating / latching with manual reset,
in addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes
• energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new fault (flashing / continuous) and
• energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new system disturbance (flashing /
continuous),
so that there are 12 possible operating modes in total.
3-52 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
LED: Operating
mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
-Hxx
12 (red)
1: ES updating ! G !
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist) ≥1
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
7: ES updating bl
2: ES manual reset
8: ES manual reset bl
3: ES reset (fault) LED: State H xx
& red
9: ES reset (fault) bl [ zzz zzz ]
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl &
11: NE updating bl &
12: NE manual reset bl
& S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.assig.
Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n LED: State H xx
Signal n & green
[ zzz zzz ]
&
&
Selected signals
& S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.assig.
Hxx green
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 -Hxx
Signal 3 m out of n (green)
Signal n
Selected signals &
&
FT_RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ] &
FT_RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
12Z6200 A_EN
3-34 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-53

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12 General Functions of the P638 (Function Group MAIN)
3.12.1 Conditioning of the Measured Values
The secondary phase currents and the voltage of the system transformers are fed to the
P638 and are, electrically isolated, converted to normalized electronics levels.
The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P638 to nominal
quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents and voltages of
the system transformers.
The connection arrangement of the measuring circuits on the P638 must also be set.
Figure 3-35 shows the standard connection. By this setting the phase of the digitised
currents and the voltage is rotated by 180°.
3-54 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-35 Connecting measuring circuits to the P638
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-55

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.2 Operating Data Measurement
The P638 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and
voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured values. For the
display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be exceeded. If these lower
thresholds are not exceeded, the value 'Not measured' is displayed. The following
measured variables are displayed:
Phase currents from ends a and b

Residual current
Voltage
Frequency
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if the self-
monitoring function detects a hardware fault.
3-56 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current values

The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P638 and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary
values, the primary nominal currents of ends a and b of the transformers need to be set
in the P638.
3-36 Measured operating data for the phase currents, ends a and b
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-57

3 Operation
(continued)
3-37 Measured operating data – Residual current
Measured voltage values

The voltage is displayed both as quantity referred to the nominal voltage of the P638 and
as primary quantity. To allow a display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of
the transformer needs to be set in the P638.
3-38 Measured operating data - Voltage
3-58 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Load Angle
Load angles are only determined, if the associated current and voltage exceed a
minimum threshold.
3-39 Load Angle
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-59

3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency
The P638 determines the frequency from the voltage. This voltage needs to exceed a
minimum threshold of 0.65 Vn in order for frequency to be determined.
3-40 Frequency measurement
3-60 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.3 Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions
The device can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by

configuring the available function range. By including the relevant protection functions in
the device configuration and cancelling all other protection functions, the user creates an
individual device appropriate to the application. Parameters, signals and measured
values of cancelled protection functions are not displayed on the user interface (HMI).
Functions of general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or general
functions (MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
Cancelling a protection
function
The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be cancelled:
The protection function in question must be disabled.

None of the elements of the protection function to be cancelled may be assigned to a
binary input.
None of the signals of the protection function to be cancelled may be assigned to a
binary output or to an LED indicator.
None of the functions of the protection function to be cancelled may be selected in a
list parameter.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Configuration branch of the menu
tree to access the setting relevant for the protection function to be cancelled.
For example, the "LIMIT" function group is cancelled by setting L IM IT : L i m i t
T h r e s h o l d s I < > to 'Disabled'. To re-include the LIMIT function in the device
configuration, the same setting is changed to "Enabled".
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is

defined by the function group designation (for example: “LIMIT”) In the following
description of the protection functions, it is presumed that this protection function is
included in the configuration.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-61

3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the

protection function
Protection functions that are included in the configuration may still be disabled using a
function setting or binary inputs. The protection device can only be disabled or enabled
through binary signal inputs if the M AIN : D i s a b l e Pr o te c t. EXT and
M A I N : E n a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T functions are both configured. When neither or only
one of the two functions is configured, the condition is interpreted as "Protection
externally enabled". If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible –
i.e. both are at logic level = "1" – then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
Note: If the protection device is disabled using a binary signal input, configured
M AIN : D i s a b l e Pr o te c t. EXT , there will be no
M AIN : Bl o c k e d /F a u l ty signal.
3-41 Enabling or disabling protection
3-62 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.4 Multiple Blocking
Two multiple blocking conditions may be defined via 'm out of n' settings. The functions
defined by the selection may be blocked using an appropriately configured binary signal
input.
3-42 Multiple blocking
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-63

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.5 Blocked/Faulty
If the protective functions are blocked, this condition is signaled by a steady light from
yellow LED indicator H 2 on the HMI and also by a signal from the output relay
configured for M AIN : Bl o c k e d /F a u l ty. In addition, the user can select the functions
that will produce the M AIN : Bl o c k e d /F a u l ty signal by setting a ‘m out of n’
parameter. If the "Blocked/Faulty" signal is included in the selection of the output relay
with the assignation "Trip command" a signal with high priority will be generated. The
protection will remain active in this case.
3-43 "Blocked/Faulty" signal
3-64 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.6 Fault Direction Signal
Direction decisions by the definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC1) and the
inverse-time overcurrent protection function (IDMT) will issue fault direction signals.
3-44 Fault Direction Signal
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-65

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.7 Starting Signals and Trip Logic
General Start
Starting signals from the differential and transverse differential protection, the phase and
earth fault definite-time overcurrent protection and the inverse-time overcurrent
protection are collectively issued as the "General Start" signal. The number of general
starts is counted.
DIFF: Trip MAIN: General

Signal 1 Start
[ 041 002 ] [ 036 000 ]
DIFF: Trip
Signal 2 MAIN: No.
[ 041 003 ] + General Start.
DIF_a: Trip [ 004 000 ]
Signal R
[ 041 211 ]
DIF_b: Trip
Signal
[ 041 212 ]
DTOC1: Starting
I>
[ 035 108 ]
DTOC1: Starting
I>>
[ 035 109 ]
DTOC2: Starting
I>
[ 035 138 ]
DTOC2: Starting
I>>
[ 035 139 ]
DTOCN: Starting
IN>
[ 035 195 ]
IDMT: Starting
Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
68Z6021A_UK
3-45 General Start
3-66 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Trip Command
The P638 has the following two channel trip commands available:
Main-Trip command
Re-Trip command
Back-Trip command
The functions to effect a trip can be selected by setting an 'm out of n' parameter
independently for each of the trip commands and each channel. The minimum trip
command time may be set. The trip signals are present only as long as the conditions
for the signal are satisfied.
3-46 Main-Trip command
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-67

3 Operation
(continued)
3-47 Re-Trip command
3-68 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-48 Back-Trip command
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-69

3 Operation
(continued)
Manual trip command

The manual trip command may be issued using setting parameters or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. It will be issued only if the manual trip command was
enabled. The manual trip command issued using a setting parameter is enabled only for
a set time period. The manual trip command issued from an appropriately configured
binary signal input is enabled only for as long as the associated enabling input is set.
3-70 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: En.Man.Trip
Cmd. EXT
[ 039 053 ]
MAIN: En.Man.
Trip Cmd.USER
[ 003 064 ]
MAIN: Enable
0 Man. Trip Cmd
[ 039 080 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Man.M-
Trip Cmd1 USER
[ 003 065 ]
MAIN: Man. M-Trip

0 1 100 ms Signal 1
[ 039 081 ]
1
0: Don't execute
1: Execute
MAIN: Man.M-Trip
Cmd1 EXT
[ 039 054 ]
MAIN: Man.M-
Trip Cmd2 USER
[ 003 082 ]
MAIN: Man. M-Trip

0 1 100 ms Signal 2
[ 039 084 ]
1
0: Don't execute
1: Execute
MAIN: Man.M-Trip
Cmd2 EXT
[ 039 056 ]
MAIN:Man.ReTrip
Cmd1 USER
[ 003 066 ]
MAIN: Man. Re-Trip

0 1 100 ms Signal 1
[ 039 082 ]
1
0: Don't execute
1: Execute
MAIN: Man.ReTrip
Cmd1 EXT
[ 039 055 ]
MAIN:Man.ReTrip
Cmd2 USER
[ 003 083 ]
MAIN: Man. Re-Trip

0 1 100 ms Signal 2
[ 039 085 ]
1
0: Don't execute
1: Execute
MAIN: Man.ReTrip
Cmd2 EXT
[ 039 057 ]
MAIN: Man.B-
Trip Cmd1 USER
[ 003 067 ]
MAIN: Man. B-Trip

0 1 100 ms Signal 1
[ 039 083 ]
1
0: Don't execute
1: Execute
MAIN: Man.B-Trip
Cmd1 EXT
[ 039 107 ]
MAIN: Man.B-
Trip Cmd2 USER
[ 003 087 ]
MAIN: Man. B-Trip

0 1 100 ms Signal 2
[ 039 098 ]
1
0: Don't execute
1: Execute
MAIN: Man.B-Trip
Cmd2 EXT
[ 039 108 ]
68Z6020A_UK
3-49 Manual trip command
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-71

3 Operation
(continued)
Latching of the trip

commands
For each of the trip commands, the user can specify by way of the appropriate setting
that it will operate in latching mode. If the latching mode is selected, the trip command
persists until it is reset using setting parameters or an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
3-50 Latch resetting
Blocking of the trip

commands
The trip commands may be blocked using a setting parameter or an appropriately
configured binary signal input either selectively (see figure 3-46 to 3-48) or collectively
(see figure 3-51). The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip commands
are blocked collectively, this is indicated by a continuously illuminated yellow LED
indicator H 2 on the user interface (HMI) and by a signal from an output relay configured
to 'Blocked/Faulty'.
3-51 Collective blocking of the trip commands
3-72 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Counter of trip commands

The number of trip commands are counted. These counters and the close command
counter may be reset together or by "General Reset".
MAIN: Main-Trip MAIN: No. Main-

Command 1 + Trip 1 Cmds
[ 039 011 ] [ 009 005 ]
R
MAIN: Main-Trip MAIN: No. Main-

[ 039 058 ] [ 009 027 ]
R
MAIN: Re-Trip MAIN: No. Re-

[ 039 012 ] [ 009 006 ]
R
MAIN: Re-Trip MAIN: No. Re-

[ 039 059 ] [ 009 028 ]
R
MAIN: Back-Trip MAIN: No. Back-

Command + Trip 1 Cmds
[ 039 013 ] [ 009 007 ]
R
MAIN: Ü-Trip MAIN: No. Back-

Kommando 2 + Trip 2 Cmds
[ 039 060 ] [ 009 029 ]
R
MAIN: Rst.C.Cl/
Tr.Cmd USER
[ 003 007 ]
0
1
0: Don't execute
MAIN: General 1: Execute
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Rst.Co.Cl/
Tr.Cmd EXT
[ 005 210 ]
68Z60A6A_UK
3-52 Trip command counter
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-73

3 Operation
(continued)
General trip signal

Trip signals from the Main-Trip command, the Re-Trip command and the Back-Trip
command are collectively issued as the "Gen Trip Signal" (General trip).
3-53 General trip signal
3-74 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.8 Time Tag and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the
event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date and time need
to be set at the P638.
Via an appropriately configured binary signal input, the time of different devices may be
synchronized by means of a pulse. The P638 evaluates the rising edge. This will set
the clock to the next full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals
occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is evaluated.
Note: It is not possible to use a signal input on the analog module Y as a minute
pulse input.
3-54 Date and time setting and clock synchronization
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-75

3 Operation
(continued)
Synchronization source
The P638 provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:
o Telegram with the time via the communication interface COMM1/IEC (full time)
o Telegram with the time via the communication interface COMM2/PC (full time)
o IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time only)
o Minute pulse presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see figure 3-54 and previous
paragraph
With older device versions these interfaces are of equal priority, i.e. clock
synchronization was carried out regardless of the source. No conflicts have to be taken
into account as long as the synchronization sources (communication master, IRIG-B and
minute impulse signal sources) are at the same time. But if the sources are at different
times, unwanted step changes in the internal clock can occur. On the other hand
redundant time synchronization is often used so as to sustain time synchronization via
IRIG-B interface even if and while the SCADA communication is out of service.
With the current device versions a primary and a backup source for time synchronization
may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in the above.
M A I N : Prim.Source TimeSync
M A I N : BackupSourceTimeSync
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as long as
time synchronization telegrams or minute pulses are received within a time-out period
set at M A I N : T i m e s y n c . t i m e - o u t . The backup source is required if after the set
time-out there is no synchronization through the primary source.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will expect
time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1 has become
defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out stage is
blocked.
3-76 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.9 Resetting Mechanisms
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways.
The following mechanisms are available:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the front panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only the
displays on the front panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories such as the
fault memory.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel
LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the front panel. By selecting the
required function at H M I : F c t . R e s e t K e y further memories may be assigned
which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is pressed.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting
parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
O S C I L : R e s e t R e c o r d . U S E R and set to 'Execute', see also the exact step-
by-step description in Chapter 6 "User Interface (HMI)", section 'Reset'.)
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter
O S C I L : R e s e t R e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g.
I N P : F c t . U 6 0 1 A s s i g n .)
Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point
M A I N : G r o u p R e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant
memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Reset x.
Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is assign
parameter M A I N : G r o u p R e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input,
e.g. I N P : F c t . U 6 0 1 A s s i g n . after memories to be reset have been assigned
to parameter M A I N : F c t . A s s i g n . R e s e t x .)
General resetting by setting parameters (menu point
M A I N : G e n e r a l R e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset
without any special configuration options.
General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

(M A I N : G e n e r a l R e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.)
All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration
options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then
they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-77

3 Operation
(continued)
Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access
especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them
to a function key.
Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is

assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is
simulated. (See section 'Configurable Function Keys'.)
Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two
menu jump lists (H M I : T r i g . M e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to include
the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g. O U T P : R e s e t l a t c h . U S E R )
in the definition (H M I : F c t . M e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list.
The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a
resetting action through H M I : F c t . R e a d K e y .
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
0
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
≥1 MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
12Z6115 A_EN
3-55 General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the user interface (HMI)
3-78 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
LOC: Reset key OP_RC: Reset record.

active & ≥1 EXT
310 024 [ 005 213 ]
LOC: Fct. reset

key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC: Reset record.

EXT [005 213]
MAIN: Group
reset 1 USER
[ * ]
0
1 ≥1 &
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Group
reset 1 EXT
[ * ]
MAIN: Fct.assign.
reset 1
[ * ]
m out of n
x MAIN: Group MAIN: Group MAIN: Fct.

reset 1 USER reset 1 EXT assign. reset 1
OP_RC: Reset record. 1 005 253 005 209 005 248
EXT [005 213] 2 005 254 005 252 005 249
12Z61RMB_EN
3-56 "CLEAR" key on the user interface (HMI) and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording (e.g. as an example for the
reset signal OP_RC: Reset record. EXT); further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are:
- [005 240] MT_RC: Reset Record. EXT
- [005 241] OL_RC: Reset Record. EXT
- [005 243] OSCIL: Reset Record. EXT
- [005 247] CBM_1: Reset Meas.Val. EXT
- [007 111] CBM_2: Reset Meas.Val. EXT
- [005 210] MAIN: Rst.Co.Cl/Tr.Cmd EXT
- [005 255] MAIN: General Reset EXT
- [036 087] mA_OP: Reset Output EXT
- [038 061] THERM: Reset Replica EXT
- [040 015] OUTP: Reset Latch. EXT
- [040 138] MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT
- [065 001] MAIN: Reset Indicat. EXT
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-79

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.10 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications

Channels
Depending on the design version of the communications module A there are up to two
communications channels available (see "Technical Data"). These physical
communications channels may be assigned to communications interfaces COMM1 and
COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2, then the

settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically assigned to
communications channel 1. Communication channel 2 can only be used to transmit data
to and from the P638 if its PC link has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is
used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
3-57 Assignment communication interfaces to physical communication channels
3-80 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.11 Test Mode
If tests are run on the P638, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all
incoming signals via the serial interfaces using protocols according to IEC will be marked
accordingly.
3-58 Setting the test mode
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-81

3 Operation
(continued)
3.13 Setting Group Selection (Function Group GROUP)
With the P638, four independent setting groups may be pre-set. The user may switch
between setting groups during operation without interrupting the protection function.
Selecting the setting group

The control path determining the active setting group (function setting or binary signal
input) may be selected using the function setting G R O U P: C o n tr o l vi a U SER or
the external signal G R O U P: C o n tr o l Vi a U s e r EXT . Correspondingly, the setting
group is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function setting
G R O U P: Se tti n g G r p Se l U SER or in accordance with external signals.
The setting group actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning the
logic state signals G R O U P: Ac tu a l Se tti n g G r o u p or G R O U P : G r o u p
x Ac tive.
Selecting the setting group
using binary inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for setting group selection, then the P638 first
checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for setting group
selection. If this is not the case, then the setting group selected using the function
setting will be active. The P638 also checks whether the signals present at the binary
signal inputs allow an unambiguous setting group selection. This is only true when only
one binary signal input is set to a logic level of ' 1 '. If more than one signal input is set to
a logic level of ' 1 ', then the setting group previously selected remains active. Should a
dead interval occur while switching between setting groups (this is the case if all binary
signal inputs have a logic level of ' 0 '), then the stored hold time is started. While this
timer stage is running, the previously selected setting group remains active. As soon as
a signal input has a logic level of ' 1 ', the associated setting group becomes active.
If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is still no signal input with a logic level of ' 1 ',
the setting group selected using the function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of ' 1 ' is present at any of the
binary signal inputs selected for the setting group selection, then the setting group
selected using the function parameter will become active once the stored time has
elapsed. The previous setting group remains active while the stored hold timer stage is
running.
Setting group selection may also occur during a general starting condition.
When subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of
approximately 100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four setting groups.
3-82 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-59 Activating the setting groups
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-83

3 Operation
(continued)
3.14 Self Testing and Diagnostics (Function Group CHECK)
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P638 ensure that internal faults are detected
and do not lead to maloperations.
Tests during start-up

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P638. If the P638 detects a fault in one of the tests, then start-up is
terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred.
No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P638 can only be
initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
Cyclic tests
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run
during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will
be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory – the monitoring signal memory – along
with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum
acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the
battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data
loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery
replacement.
Peripheral fault
By setting a 'm out of n' parameter a peripheral fault can issue an alarm in addition to
self-monitoring signals.
Signalling
The monitoring signals are also signalled via the output relay configured
C H EC K: Al a r m . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is detected.
3-60 Monitoring signals
3-84 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Device response
The response of the P638 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The following
responses are possible:
Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is
issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example,
when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions,
then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the
detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface.
Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system
restart – such as a fault in the hardware –, then a procedure called a warm restart is
automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer
system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no
stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure. A
warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart
sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces
will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered
by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked but
communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
Cold Restart
If a corrupted setting group is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part of
the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary
because the protection device cannot identify which parameter in the subset is
corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state.
This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart.
In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been selected so that
the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the
cold restart and the value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring
signal memory.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-85

3 Operation
(continued)

Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to
eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read also about
device behavior with problems in Chapter 10 “Troubleshooting”.) Whether or not this
measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has not already been
stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous fault. If it was already
stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on the type of fault detected, the
device will be blocked after the second warm restart.
In order to monitor this behavior better the parameter at

C H E C K : M o n . S i g . R e t e n t i o n is applied. This parameter may either be set to
‘Blocked’ or to a time duration period (in hours).
The default for this timer stage is ‘Blocked’ e.g. blocking of the protection device with two
identical faults occurs independent of the time evolved since the first fault monitoring
signal was issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device
if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because
the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or display and clearing of the monitoring
signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. To defuse this
problem it is suggested to set the function parameter to a specific time duration period so
that blocking will only occur if the same fault occurs again within this time period.
Otherwise, the device will continue to operate normally after a warm restart.

time tag
The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.
3-86 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.15 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)
For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events, a

non-volatile ring memory is provided. The operationally relevant signals, each fully
tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in chronological
order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as function
disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end of
events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as
overloads, or short circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory can be
cleared/reset.
Counter for signals

relevant to system
operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
MT_RC: Operat.
Data Record.
[ 003 024 ]
Operating Memory
MAIN: Oper.-
relev. 306
signal
024
MAIN: General MT_RC: No. Oper.

Reset USER +
[ 003 002 ] Data Sig.
[ 100 002 ]
1: Execute R
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MT_RC: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
MT_RC: Reset
Record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
1
0: Don’t execute
1: Execute
12Z61CMB_UK
3-61 Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-87

3 Operation
(continued)
3.16 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)
The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the
monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of 30 entries.
If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the
C H EC K: O ve r fl o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals
prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal
memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the
monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by setting an 'm
out of n' parameter (see 'Self-Monitoring').
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the
yellow LED indicator H 3 (labeled 'ALARM') on the local control panel. Each new entry
causes the LED to flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries
in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if the corresponding
test in a new test cycle now shows the device to be healthy. The contents of the
monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual
entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from the local
control panel.
Monitoring signal counter

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the
monitoring signal counter (MT_RC: N o . M o n i t. Si g n a l s ).
MT_RC: Mon. signal

record.
[ 003 001 ]
MAIN: Time tag

306 021
SFMON: Hardware
fault
304 950
Select monit.
signal
MT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
CT30 SFMON: Overflow
≥1 MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
0
MT_RC: No. monit.
1 ≥1 signals
[ 004 019 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z6155A_EN
3-62 Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter
3-88 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.17 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
Overload Duration
In the event of an overload, the P638 determines the overload duration. The overload
duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_ R C : R e c o r d . i n
Pr o g r e s s signal.
OL_RC: Record. OL_DA: Overload

in progress + duration
[ 035 003 ] [ 004 102 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A_EN
3-63 Overload Duration
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-89

3 Operation
(continued)
Measurement data stored

for the overload event
During the overload event, the device will store measurements relating to the circuit
thermal state – using data from the thermal overload protection function. They are
stored at the end of the overload event.
OL_RC: Record.
in progress C
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: Status OL_DA: Status

THERM replica THERM replica
[ 004 016 ] [ 004 147 ]
R
THERM: I OL_DA: Load

305 202
current THER
[ 004 058 ]
R
THERM: Object OL_DA: Object

temperature temp. THERM
[ 004 137 ] [ 004 035 ]
R
THERM: Coolant OL_DA: Coolant

temperature temp. THERM
[ 004 149 ] [ 004 036 ]
R
THERM: Pre-trip OL_DA: Pre-trip

time left t.leftTHERM
[ 004 139 ] [ 004 148 ]
R
THERM: Temp. OL_DA: Offset

offset replica THERM replica
[ 004 109 ] [ 004 154 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z6238A_EN
3-64 Measured overload data of thermal overload protection
3-90 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
Start of overload recording

An overload exists, and therefore overload recording begins, if the signal
T H E R M : S t a r t i n g k * I r e f > is issued.
Counting overload events

Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
OL_RC: Record. in
Progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: Starting
k*Iref>
[ 041 108 ] +
R OL_RC: No.
Overload
[ 004 101 ]
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
Record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: Execute
64Z70DXA_UK
3-65 Counting overload events
Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each overload event by the internal clock is stored.
The overload start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The
date and time assigned to an overload event when the event begins can be read out
from the overload memory on the local control panel or through the PC and
communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload
event) can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or communication
interfaces.
Overload logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload
memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be
overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then OL_ R C : O ve r l . M e m .
O ve r fl o w will be entered as the last signal.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-91

3 Operation
(continued)
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload recordings can be read from the user interface (HMI) or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
OL_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 1 1 ≥1 + CT200 OL_RC: Overl. mem.

overflow
Signal 2 R [ 035 007 ]
1
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 OL_RC: Overload
recording n
[ * ]
OL_RC: Overload
n
Measured value 1 recording n
Measured value 2 1 033 020

2 033 021
Measured value 3
Measured value n 3 033 022
MAIN: Time tag 4 033 023

306 021
5 033 024
FT_RC: Record. in & 6 033 025

progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 026
R
8 033 027
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
0
1 ≥1
MAIN: General
reset USER 0: don't execute
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
12Z6117 A_EN
3-66 Overload memory
3-92 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.19 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)
When there is a primary system fault, the P638 collects the following measured fault
data:
Running time
Fault duration
Fault currents (short-circuit currents)
Fault voltage (short-circuit voltage)
Differential currents of the two measuring systems
Second harmonic of the differential current
Restraining currents of the two measuring systems
Running time and fault

duration
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting
signal that is generated within the P638, and the fault duration is defined as the time
between the start and end of the O SC IL : R e c o r d . i n Pr o g r e s s signal.
MAIN: General FT_DA: Running

Start + Time
[ 036 000 ] [ 004 021 ]
R
OSCIL: Record. FT_DA: Fault

in Progress + Duration
[ 035 000 ] [ 008 010 ]
R
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED

306 020
64Z70DMA_UK
3-67 Running time and fault duration
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-93

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data acquisition time

The P638 determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time during a fault.
Depending on the protection function that recognizes a fault, the criterion for the
determination of the recording start time is selected by the P638. If, for example, the
differential protection function detects a fault then the P638 determines the measured
fault data at the time during the fault when the maximum differential current was
measured. The measured fault data are displayed at the end of the fault. If several
protection functions detect a fault then the criterion is selected on the basis of the
priorities given in the table below. The selected criterion is displayed at the P638.
Priority Function Recognizing the Fault Acquisition Time Criterion

1 Definite-time overcurrent protection, Maximum residual current
residual current system
2 Differential protection Maximum differential current
3 Transverse differential protection, Maximum current IAC end a
end a
4 Transverse differential protection, Maximum current IAC end b
end b
5 Definite-time overcurrent protection, Maximum phase current end a
end a
6 Definite-time overcurrent protection, Maximum phase current end b
end b
8 Manual trigger End of fault
The difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data acquisition time is
also displayed.
3-94 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIFF: I0 Filt a
Enab SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
C C2,4
Iam,A,a C1,3
Iam,0,a
Iam,C,a
Iam,A,a-Iam,0,a 1
Iam,C,a-Iam,0,a 3
1 … 2 Is,1,a
DIFF: I0 Filt b
Enab SGx 3 … 4 Is,2,a
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
C C2,4
Iam,A,b C1,3
Iam,0,b
Iam,C,b
Iam,A,b-Iam,0,b 1
Iam,C,b-Iam,0,b 3
1 … 2 Is,1,b
3 … 4 Is,2,b
Setting DIFF: I0 Filt a DIFF: I0 Filt b

Enab SGx Enab SGx
Group 1 072 155 071 060
Group 2 073 155 071 061
Group 3 074 155 071 062
Group 4 075 155 071 063
68Z6034A_UK
3-68 Determination of the fault data acquisition time
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-95

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the fault

currents and voltage
The P638 stores the fault current and voltage data determined at the acquisition time.
The following fault currents are stored:
The phase currents for each end of the transformer

The residual current
Fault currents and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to In and Vn.
OSCIL: Record. in
Progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA: Save C C
measured values
305 052
FT_DA: Fault
IN Current N p.u.
[ 004 107 ]
R
IA,a FT_DA: Fault

Curr.IA,a p.u.
[ 004 116 ]
R
IC,a FT_DA: Fault

Curr.IC,a p.u.
[ 004 117 ]
R
FT_DA: Fault
IA,b Curr.IA,b p.u.
[ 004 118 ]
R
FT_DA: Fault
IC,b Curr.IC,b p.u.
[ 004 119 ]
R
FT_DA: Fault
V voltage p.u.
[ 004 108 ]
R
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED

306 020
68Z6035A_UK
3-69 Acquisition of the fault currents and voltage
3-96 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the
differential and restraining
currents
The P638 stores the differential and restraining current data determined at the
acquisition time by the differential protection. Moreover, the component values for the
second harmonic of the differential current are stored.
Differential and restraining currents are stored as per-unit quantities referred to Iref.
OSCIL: Record.
in Progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA: Save C C
measured values
305 052
FT_DA: Diff
DIFF: Id,1 Current 1
303 303
[ 005 082 ]
R
FT_DA: Diff
DIFF: I(2*fn),1 Current 1 (2fn)
303 301
[ 005 084 ]
R
FT_DA: Restrain
DIFF: IR,1 Current 1
303 305 [ 005 083 ]
R
FT_DA: Diff
DIFF: Id,2 Current 2
303 304 [ 006 082 ]
R
DIFF: I(2*fn),2 FT_DA: Diff

303 302
Current 2 (2fn)
[ 006 084 ]
R
FT_DA: Restrain
DIFF: IR,2 Current 2
303 306
[ 006 083 ]
R
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED

306 020
68Z6036A_UK
3-70 Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection
Fault data reset

After pressing the Clear key on the front panel user interface (HMI), the fault data value
is displayed as 'Not Measured'. However, the values are not erased and can continue to
be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-97

3 Operation
(continued)
3.20 Fault Recording (Function Group OSCIL)
Start of fault recording

A fault exists and therefore recording begins if at least one of the following signals is
present:
OSCIL: I>, End a

OSCIL: I>, End b
OSCIL: IN>
OSCIL: Id>
OSCIL: Trigger
In addition, the user can set a logical "OR" combination of logic signals ('m out of n'
parameter) whose appearance will trigger fault recording.
Fault counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
3-98 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
OSCIL: Trigger OSCIL: Trigger

EXT
[ 036 089 ] [ 037 076 ]
OSCIL: Trigger
USER
[ 003 041 ]
0
1
0: Don't execute
1: Execute
OSCIL: Fct
Assig. Trigger
[ 003 085 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
OSCIL: Record.
in Progress
Selected signals [ 035 000 ]
OSCIL: System
Disturb. Runn
OSCIL: I>, End a [ 035 004 ]
[ 016 014 ]
OSCIL: I>
IA,a Triggered, End a
[ 035 014 ]
IC,a
OSCIL: I>, End b

[ 016 015 ]
IA,b OSCIL: I>

Triggered, End b
[ 035 015 ]
IC,b
OSCIL: IN>
[ 016 017 ]
OSCIL: IN>
IN Triggered
[ 035 017 ]
OSCIL: Id>
[ 016 018 ]
OSCIL: Id>
DIFF: Id,1 Triggered
303 303 [ 035 018 ]
DIFF: Id,2
303 304
OSCIL: No. of
MAIN: General + Faults
Reset USER [ 004 020 ]
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute ≥1 R
MAIN: General
Reset EXT OSCIL: No. System
[ 005 255 ] + Disturb.
OSCIL: Reset [ 004 010 ]
Record. USER R
[ 003 006 ]
1: Execute
OSCIL: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
68Z6031A_UK
3-71 Start of fault recording and fault counter
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-99

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s individual
start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time
assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the
front panel user interface (HMI) or through the PC and communication interfaces.
The time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can
be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Fault recordings
Protection signals during a fault, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and
post-fault windows, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault.
A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be
stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been recorded, the
oldest fault recording will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the
interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then
O SC IL : F a u l t M e m . O ve r fl o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and
date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal O S C I L : F a u l t y T i m e T a g
is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the RMS measured fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the user interface (HMI) or through the PC or
3-100 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC: Fault mem.
Signal 1 + CT200 overflow
1 [ 035 001 ]
Signal 2 1 R
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1
FT_RC: Fault
recording n
1 [ * ]
FT_RC: Pre-fault
time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC: Post-
fault time
[ 003 079 ]
n FT_RC: Fault
recording n
Fault memory n
1 003 000
2 033 001
3 033 002
Measured value n 7 033 006

MAIN: Time tag 8 033 007
306 021
MAIN: General
reset USER &
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
0
1 1: execute
0: don’t execute
1: execute
12Z6161 B_EN
3-72 Fault memories
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-101

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault value recording

The following analog signals are recorded:
The phase currents of the two ends of the transformer

The residual current
The voltage.
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The times for recording before
and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of 32 s - independent of
frequency - is available for recording. This period can be divided among a maximum of
eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the
set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then
recording will terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording
time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a
sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time of 32 s is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault
are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since
the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog waveform data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults
remain stored.
3-102 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
OSCIL: Trigger
[ 037 076 ] C
OSCIL: Record.
in Progress OSCIL: Max
[ 035 000 ] Record Time
[ 003 075 ]
OSCIL: Pre-Fault
Time
[ 003 078 ]
OSCIL: Post-
Fault Time
[ 003 079 ]
IA,a Analog channel 1

R
IC,a Analog channel 2

R
IA,b Analog channel 3

R
IC,b Analog channel 4

R
IN
Analog channel 6
R
V Analog channel 7
R
OSCIL: Reset
Record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: Execute ≥1
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OSCIL: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
68Z6030A_UK
3-73 Fault value recording system of the P638
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-103

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF)
The differential protection functionality provided by the P638 was designed to protect
transformers in a two-phase system. For such an application amplitude matching is
required. This is achieved simply by setting the reference power (generally the nominal
power of the transformer), and the primary and secondary nominal voltages of the
transformer.
Vector group matching is not generally necessary with transformers situated in railway
substations. Should this be required, however, the P638 can be configured in such a
way that the phase of one side of the transformer is rotated by 180°.
For transformers with grounded mid-point tapping, the P638 provides optional zero-
sequence current filtering for both voltage levels.
In the descriptions in the following sections, it is assumed that the current transformers
are connected to the P638 in the standard configuration (see figure "Connecting the
P638 measuring circuits" in section 'Conditioning of the Measured Variables' in
Chapter 3).
It is further assumed that the ‘a’ end refers to the high voltage side of the transformer.
3-104 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling
differential protection
You can enable or disable differential protection using setting parameters. Furthermore,
you can do this separately for each setting group. For differential protection to operate,
the matching factors must be within their permissible ranges.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIFF: General
Enable USER
[ 019 080 ]
0
1 DIFF: Enabled
& [ 041 210 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIFF: Ready
& [ 041 216 ]
DIFF: Enable
SGx DIFF: Not Ready
[ * ] [ 041 217 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GROUP: Group y Active

[ * ]
DIFF: Matching Fail.
End a
[ 041 213 ]
End b
[ 041 214 ]
DIFF: Match.Factor
Invalid
[ 041 215 ]
y GROUP: Group y Setting DIFF: Enable

Active SGx
1 036 090 Group 1 072 152
2 036 091 Group 2 073 152
3 036 092 Group 3 074 152
4 036 093 Group 4 075 152
68Z6032A_UK
3-74 Enabling or disabling differential protection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-105

3 Operation
(continued)
Amplitude matching
In order to set amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference power needs to
be defined. Normally this is the rated power of the transformer. The reference current is
then calculated by the P638 using the set reference power and the set transformer
primary and secondary nominal voltages.
Calculation of the reference current Iref:
Sref S ref
I ref ,a = I ref , b =
Vn ,a Vn , b
Sref: reference power

Iref,a ... b: reference currents of end 'a' or 'b'
Vn,a ... b: nominal voltages of end 'a' or 'b'
The P638 calculates the matching factors using the reference currents and the set
primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
Calculation of the matching factors:
I n ,a I n ,b
k am,a = k am,b =
I ref ,a I ref ,b
am: amplitude matched

In,a ... b: nominal currents of the system transformers
The P638 displays the reference currents and matching factors.
The P638 checks that the matching factors are within the permissible range of
0.5 ≤ k am, x ≤ 5 . In addition the ratios kam,a/kam,b and kam,b/kam,a must not exceed the
value of 3. Should the P638 calculate matching factors which do not satisfy the above
conditions, an alarm will be issued and differential protection will be automatically
blocked.
The measured values of the phase currents at either end of the protected object are
multiplied by the relevant matching factors. These are then available for further
processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values are always in
relation to the relevant reference currents rather than to the transformer nominal currents
or the nominal currents of the device.
3-106 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIFF: Vn prim.,
End a
[ 019 017 ]
DIFF: Vn prim.,
End b
[ 019 018 ]
DIFF: Rated Ref
Power Sref
[ 019 016 ]
DIFF: Enabled C
[ 041 210 ]
DIFF: Ref. Curr.

Iref,a=Sref/Vn,a Iref,a
[ 019 023 ]
DIFF: Ref. Curr.
Iref,b=Sref/Vn,b Iref,b
[ 019 024 ]
MAIN: In CT.
prim.,End a
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN: In CT.
prim.,End b
[ 019 021 ]
DIFF: Matching Fact.

kam,a=In,a/Iref,a kam,a
[ 004 105 ]
DIFF: Matching Fact.
kam,b=In,b/Iref,b kam,b
[ 004 106 ]
MAIN: Protection
active C
306 001

0.5 ≤ kam,a ≤ 5.0 End a
[ 041 213 ]
0.5 ≤ kam,b ≤ 5.0 End b
[ 041 214 ]
DIFF: Match.Factor
kam,a/kam,b > 3.0 Invalid
[ 041 215 ]
CHECK: Matching Fail.

kam,b/kam,a > 3.0 End a
[ 098 031 ]
CHECK: Matching Fail.
End b
[ 098 032 ]
CHECK: Match.Factor
Invalid
[ 098 033 ]
DIFF: Ready
[ 041 216 ] & C
MAIN: Protect.
Not Ready
[ 004 060 ]
kam,a * IA,a Iam,A,a
IA,a
kam,a * IC,a Iam,C,a

IC,a
kam,b * IA,b Iam,A,b

IA,b
kam,b * IC,b Iam,C,b

IC,b
68Z6033A_UK
3-75 Amplitude matching
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-107

3 Operation
(continued)
Vector group matching

Vector group matching is a procedure whereby the currents of the high voltage side are
rotated in such a way that their phasors coincide with those of the low voltage side. This
is achieved by setting M A I N : W d n g a C T O r i e n t a t ' n or M A I N : W d n g b C T
O r i e n t a t ' n (see figure 3-35).
Zero-sequence current
filtering
On transformers with grounded mid-point tapping on one winding and an asymmetrical
load, a zero-sequence current flows through this grounded mid-point tapping. This zero-
sequence current is superimposed on both phase currents and will corrupt differential
and restraining currents. In order to prevent this problem the P638 provides both
measuring circuits (end ‘a’ and end ‘b’) with zero-sequence current filtering, which may
be enabled or disabled.
The P638 calculates the zero-sequence currents using the following formula:
1
I am ,0 ,y = ⋅ ( I am ,A ,y − I am ,C ,y )
2
y: measuring system 1 or 2
The determined zero-sequence current is subtracted from the phase currents. These
corrected phase currents are then used to determine the differential and restraining
currents.
3-108 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIFF: I0 Filt a
Enab SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
C C2,4
Iam,A,a C1,3
Iam,0,a
Iam,C,a
Iam,A,a-Iam,0,a 1
Iam,C,a-Iam,0,a 3
1 … 2 Is,1,a
DIFF: I0 Filt b
Enab SGx 3 … 4 Is,2,a
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
C C2,4
Iam,A,b C1,3
Iam,0,b
Iam,C,b
Iam,A,b-Iam,0,b 1
Iam,C,b-Iam,0,b 3
1 … 2 Is,1,b
3 … 4 Is,2,b
Setting DIFF: I0 Filt a DIFF: I0 Filt b

Enab SGx Enab SGx
Group 1 072 155 071 060
Group 2 073 155 071 061
Group 3 074 155 071 062
Group 4 075 155 071 063
68Z6034A_UK
3-76 Zero-sequence current filtering
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-109

3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping Characteristic
The differential and restraining current values for each measurement system are derived
from the amplitude matched and zero-sequence compensated currents. The following
equations are valid only for uniformly orientated current phasors relative to the protected
object. That means, the current phasors in each end, must point either towards the
protected object or away from it.
Calculation of the differential and restraining currents:
I d , y = I s , y ,a + I s, y, b
I R , y = 0.5 ⋅ I s, y,a − I s, y,b
s: vector group matched, zero-sequence current filtered

y: measuring system 1 or 2
The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data,
provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
The P638 tripping characteristic has two knee-points. The first knee-point is dependent
on the setting D I F F : I d i f f > S G x and is determined by the intersection with the
tripping characteristic for single-side feed. The second knee of the tripping characteristic
is defined by the setting D I F F : I R , m 2 S G x .
The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below. Figure 3-77
shows the tripping characteristics.
Characteristic equation for the range 0 ≤ I R ≤ 0.5 ⋅ I diff > :
Id I diff >
=
I ref I ref
Characteristic equation for the range 0.5 ⋅ I diff >
= m1 ⋅ R + ⋅ ( 1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1 )
I ref I ref I ref
Characteristic equation for the range I R ,m 2 
= m2 ⋅ R + ⋅ ( 1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1 ) + I R ,m 2 ⋅ ( m1 − m2 )
I ref I ref I ref
where:
Iref: Reference current
m1: gradient of characteristic for the range 0.5 ⋅ I diff > < I R ≤ I R ,m 2 (configurable)
m2: gradient of characteristic for the range I R ,m 2 > S G x , the
P638 will trip without taking the inrush stabilization into account. Furthermore, if the
differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold D I F F : I d i f f > > > S G x , the
restraining current and the saturation discriminator are also no longer taken into account.
25
Id/Iref
Tripping area
m1=m2=1.
20
Fault current characteristic for
single-side feed
15
10
m2=0.4
Idiff>=2. m1=0.2
Blocking area
Idiff>=0. 0
0 5 10 15
IR/Iref
IRm2 = 1. IRm2 = 10 Q9Z5005A
3-77 Tripping characteristic of differential protection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-111

3 Operation
(continued)
3-78 Measuring system of the P638
3-112 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Inrush Stabilization
(Harmonic Restraint)
When an unloaded transformer is energized, the inrush current could reach values that
exceed the transformer nominal current several times over. It takes some time for the
current to assume its steady state value. Since the high inrush current flows on the
connected side only, the tripping characteristic of the P638 may give rise to a trip unless
stabilizing action is taken. The inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics of
twice the system frequency. This provides a mechanism to provide stabilization against
tripping due to the inrush current.
The P638 filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I(f0) and second
harmonic components I(2*f0) of the differential current are thus determined. Tripping is
blocked if the ratio I(2*f0) / I(f0) exceeds a specific adjustable value in at least one
measuring system. There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set
threshold D I F F : I d i f f > > S G x .
Inrush stabilization is disabled when D I F F : I n r u s h 2 n d H a r m o n S G x is set to

'Blocked' .
3-79 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-113

3 Operation
(continued)
Saturation discriminator
Up to a certain limit, stability in the event of external faults is ensured by means of the
restraining action. Due to the double-knee-point (triple-slope) tripping characteristic, the
stabilization is particularly pronounced for high currents. However, as an additional
safeguard for through-currents with transformer saturation, the P638 is provided with a
saturation discriminator.
The saturation discriminator monitors the occurrence of the differential current after each
zero-crossing of the restraining current. For internal faults, the differential current
appears after a zero crossing together with the restraining current. In the case of
through-currents with transformer saturation, however, a differential current will not
appear until the transformer starts to saturate. Accordingly, a blocking signal is
generated by monitoring the level of the differential current and comparing it with the
restraining current, thus the desired stabilization is achieved. Blocking is restricted to the
measuring system where an external fault was detected. There will be no blocking if the
differential current exceeds the set threshold D I F F : I d i f f > > S G x .
3-80 Saturation discriminator
3-114 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22 Transverse Differential Protection (Function Groups DIF_A and DIF_B)
As an additional protection feature against winding and ground faults the P638 provides
transverse differential protection for transformer ends a and b.
All transverse differential protection threshold values are based on nominal currents of
the protection device.
transverse differential
protection
Transverse differential protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
3-81 Enabling or disabling transverse differential protection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-115

3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping Characteristic
Transverse and restraining currents are calculated by the transverse differential
protection by using the two-phase current values.
I trans, z = I A , z − I C, z
I R ,z = 0.5 ⋅ ( I A ,z + I C,z )
z: End a or b
The ripping characteristic has two slopes. The first knee is dependent on the setting
D I F _ z : I t r a n s > S G x and is on the intersection with the line m1 ⋅ I R ,z . The
characteristic equations for the different ranges are given below. Figure 3-82 shows the
tripping characteristic.
I trans >
Characteristic equation for the range 0 

=
I nom I nom
I trans >
Characteristic equation for the range /m1=5
Itrans>/m1=0,066 m1=0.2
Blocking
0
0 5 10 15
IR/Inom
Q9Z5010A
3-82 Tripping characteristics of transverse differential protection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-117

3 Operation
(continued)
3-83 Measuring system of transverse differential protection
3-118 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.23 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups DTOC1 and DTOC2)
Two two-stage definite-time overcurrent protection functions (DTOC protection) are

implemented in the P638. The definite-time overcurrent protection function group
DTOC1 may be operated with or without the short-circuit direction determination
function.
DTOC protection
DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter. Enabling can
be done separately for each setting group.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DTOC1: General
Enable USER
[ 031 135 ]
0
1 DTOC1: Enabled
& [ 035 102 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC1: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC2: General
Enable USER
[ 031 136 ]
0
1 DTOC2: Enabled
& [ 035 132 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC2: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes

[ * ]
y GROUP: Group y Setting DTOC1: Enable DTOC2: Enable

Active SGx SGx
1 036 090 Group 1 076 050 076 070
2 036 091 Group 2 077 050 077 070
3 036 092 Group 3 078 050 078 070
4 036 093 Group 4 079 050 079 070
68Z6010A_UK
3-84 Enabling or disabling DTOC protection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-119

3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the measured

variables
The measured variables to be monitored by the respective DTOC function are selected
by way of setting parameters.
3-85 Selecting the measured variables
120 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Inrush restraint
Triggering of the overcurrent protection functions can optionally be blocked, together
with the differential protection function, during inrush occurrences. In this case the signal
from the inrush stabilization function of the differential protection is used as a blocking
criterion. Therefore when the differential protection of the P638 is disabled, then the
overcurrent stages will always operate without inrush stabilization. Blocking of the inrush
stabilization is released when at least one phase current exceeds the set threshold
DTOC1: I>lift Rush Rest.SGx.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DTOC1: Inrush
Stab ="on"SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC1: I>lift
Rush Rest.SGx
[ * ]
DTOC1: IA DTOC1: Harm.Block.

& 1 Trigg.
310 039
402 410
DTOC1: IC
402 411 DTOC1: Harm.Block.
& 2 Trigg.
310 031
DTOC1: Inrush
DIFF: Harm.Block. 1 Stabil.Trigg.
Trigg. [ 035 127 ]
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF: Harm.Block. 2
Trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DTOC2: Inrush
Stab ="on"SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC2: Inrush
Stabil.Trigg.
[ 035 157 ]
DTOC2: I>lift
Rush Rest.SGx
[ * ]
DTOC2: IA DTOC2: Harm.Block.

& 1 Trigg.
310 032
402 420
DTOC2: IC
402 421 DTOC2: Harm.Block.
& 2 Trigg.
310 033
Setting DTOC1: Inrush DTOC1: I>lift DTOC2: Inrush DTOC2: I>lift

Stab ="on"SGx Rush Rest.SGx Stab ="on"SGx Rush Rest.SGx
Group 1 076 063 076 064 076 083 076 084
Group 2 077 063 077 064 077 083 077 084
Group 3 078 063 078 064 078 083 078 084
Group 4 079 063 079 064 079 083 079 084
68Z6011A_UK
3-86 Inrush restraint of the definitive-time overcurrent protection functions DTOC1 and DTOC2
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-121

3 Operation
(continued)
Definite-time overcurrent
protection 1
(incl. short-circuit direction
determination)
Depending on the setting the phase currents on the high and low voltage sides are
monitored by the definite-time overcurrent protection function to detect when they
exceed the set thresholds. The timer stages connected in series to the triggers can be
blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Short-circuit direction determination is enabled with

D T O C 1 : D i r e c t i o n M e a s u r e m . All settings relevant for the short-circuit direction
determination can be separately set for the stages I> and I>>.
When the current thresholds I> or I>> are triggered and if the measured voltage level is
within the limits set by Vmin and V< then the fault angle ϕ is calculated and the short-
circuit (fault) direction is determined. The short-circuit characteristic is defined by the
angles β and γ. The program decides that the fault direction is 'Forward' when the
calculated angle ϕ lies within the range given by γ = ϕ = β.
The starting direction may be freely set.
By setting the parameters D T O C 1 : T i m e r S t a r t t I > S G x and

D T O C 1 : T i m e r S t a r t t I > > S G x the user can select, separately for each stage,
whether the stage timer is started with the triggering of thresholds I> or I>> or,
additionally, with direction signalling. The starting signal for each stage depends on the
starting conditions selected for the timer stages.
The direction determination of the respective measuring system is enabled if the

measures voltage value exceeds a settable enabling threshold Vmin. It can be
determined by setting that a short-circuit voltage below Vmin will either lead to the DTOC
protection operating non-directionally or to it becoming blocked.
Another setting is used to determine whether a failure of the voltage measuring circuit
will either lead to the overcurrent protection operating non-directionally or to it becoming
blocked.
The direction determination and the starting of the respective stage are only enabled if
the measured voltage value is below a settable undervoltage threshold V<. Setting the
undervoltage threshold V< to 'Blocked' will disable this voltage scan and direction
determination and starting are permanently enabled.
122 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DTOC1: Timer
Start tI> SGx
[ * ]
1
2
1: With Starting
2: With Direction
DTOC1: Blocking
tI> EXT
[ 035 120 ]
DTOC1: I>
DTOC1: Enabled SGx
[ 035 102 ] & [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active C1,2
306 001
DTOC1: Harm.Block.
1 Trigg. C1 DTOC1: tI>
310 039 C SGx
[ * ]
DTOC1: Harm.Block.
2 Trigg. C2
310 031
DTOC1: tI> Elapsed
& [ 035 098 ]
DTOC1: IA
402 410
DTOC1: Starting
DTOC1: IC & I>
[ 035 108 ]
402 411
DTOC1: Forwards trip

I>
402 412
DTOC1: Reverse trip DTOC1: I> Triggered

I> 310 034
402 413
DTOC1: Non-direct. DTOC1: Trip Signal

trip I> & tI>
402 414 [ 035 114 ]
DTOC1: Direction
Measurem.
[ 031 131 ]
0: Disabled
DTOC1: Timer &
Start tI>> SGx
[ * ]
1
2
1: With Starting
2: With Direction
DTOC1: Blocking tI>>
EXT
[ 035 121 ] DTOC1: Phase A
Triggered
[ 035 104 ]
DTOC1: I>>
SGx DTOC1: Phase C
[ * ] Triggered
[ 035 105 ]
C1,2
C1 DTOC1: tI>>
C SGx
[ * ]
C2
DTOC1: tI>> Elapsed
& [ 035 099 ]
DTOC1: Starting
& I>>
[ 035 109 ]
DTOC1: Forwards trip

I>>
402 415
DTOC1: Reverse trip DTOC1: I>>

I>> Triggered
402 416 310 035
DTOC1: Non-direct. DTOC1: Trip Signal

trip I>> & tI>>
402 417 [ 035 115 ]
&
Setting DTOC1: Timer DTOC1: I> DTOC1: tI> DTOC1: Timer DTOC1: I>> DTOC1: tI>>
Start tI> SGx SGx SGx Start tI>> SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 071 146 076 051 076 057 072 245 076 052 076 058
Group 2 071 147 077 051 077 057 073 044 077 052 077 058
Group 3 071 148 078 051 078 057 074 044 078 052 078 058
Group 4 071 149 079 051 079 057 075 044 079 052 079 058
68Z6012A_UK
3-87 Definite-time overcurrent protection 1 (incl. short-circuit direction determination)
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-123

3 Operation
(continued)
Load flow direction

Determining the load flow direction is activated when the short-circuit direction
determination has been enabled.
When a permanent current enable value is exceeded and if the measured voltage level
is greater or equal to the enable voltage threshold value Vmin then the load angle ϕ is
calculated and the load flow direction is determined according to the selected short-
circuit characteristic.
The load flow direction is displayed as long as no short circuit condition is present, which
is identified by triggering of DTOC stages and the undervoltage enable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DTOC1: Direction
Measurem.
[ 031 131 ] &
1: Enabled
MAIN: M.c.b. Trip V
EXT
[ 004 061 ]
DTOC1: V ≥ Vmin (I>) DTOC1: Beta
(I>) SGx
402 418 [ * ]
DTOC1: Gamma
(I>) SGx
[ * ]
≥ 0.05 In
C
DTOC1: IA DTOC1: Power

C
& Flow I> Forw.
402 410 [ 035 223 ]
DTOC1: Power
Flow I> Rev.
[ 035 224 ]
&
V
DTOC1: Fault I>
30 ms 0 & Forward
Forward direction [ 035 137 ]
30 ms 0 DTOC1: Fault I>

Reverse direction Reverse
& [ 035 140 ]
DTOC1: I>
Triggered
310 034 &
DTOC1: V < U< (I>)
403 410
DTOC1: Beta
(I>>) SGx
[ * ]
& DTOC1: Gamma
(I>>) SGx
[ * ]
C
DTOC1: V ≥ Vmin (I>>)
DTOC1: Power
402 419 Flow I>> Forw.
&
C
[ 035 227 ]
DTOC1: Power
Flow I>> Rev.
[ 035 228 ]
&
DTOC1: Fault I>>

30 ms 0 & Forward
Forward direction [ 035 147 ]
30 ms 0 DTOC1: Fault
Reverse direction I>> Reverse
& [ 035 148 ]
DTOC1: I>>
Triggered
310 035 &
DTOC1: V < U< (I>>)
403 411
Setting DTOC1: Beta DTOC1: Gamma DTOC1: Beta DTOC1: Gamma

(I>) SGx (I>) SGx (I>>) SGx (I>>) SGx
Group 1 076 068 076 073 076 069 076 074
Group 2 077 068 077 073 077 069 077 074
Group 3 078 068 078 073 078 069 078 074
Group 4 079 068 079 073 079 069 079 074
68Z6013A_UK
3-88 Determining load flow and fault directions
124 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-89 Example of a fault direction determination characteristic
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-125

3 Operation
(continued)
3-90 Determining the starting direction for the stage I>
126 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-91 Determining the starting direction for the stage I>>
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-127

3 Operation
(continued)
Definite-time overcurrent
protection 2
Depending on the setting the phase currents on the high and low voltage sides are
monitored by the definite-time overcurrent protection function to detect when they
exceed the set thresholds. Their starting can optionally be blocked together with the
inrush stabilization function of the differential protection. In this case the signal from the
inrush stabilization function of the differential protection is used as a blocking criterion.
Therefore when the differential protection of the P638 is disabled, then the overcurrent
stages will always operate without inrush stabilization. Blocking of the inrush
stabilization is released when at least one phase current exceeds the set threshold
D T O C 2 : I > l i f t R u s h R e s t . S G x . The timer stages connected in series to the
triggers can be blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DTOC2: Blocking
tI> EXT
[ 035 150 ]
DTOC2: I>
SGx
[ * ]
C1,2
DTOC2: Harm.Block.
1 Trigg. C1
310 032
DTOC2: Harm.Block. DTOC2: tI>

2 Trigg. C2 C SGx
310 033 [ * ]
DTOC2: IA DTOC2: Trip Signal

tI>
402 420 [ 035 144 ]
DTOC1: IC
DTOC2: Starting
402 421 I>
[ 035 138 ]
DTOC2: Enabled DTOC2: ¨Phase A

Triggered
[ 035 132 ] & [ 035 134 ]
MAIN: Protection DTOC2: Phase C
active Triggered
306 001
[ 035 135 ]
DTOC2: Blocking tI>>

EXT
[ 035 151 ]
DTOC2: I>>
SGx
[ * ]
C1,2
C1
DTOC2: tI>>
C2 C SGx
[ * ]
DTOC2: Trip Signal

tI>>
[ 035 145 ]
DTOC2: Starting
I>>
[ 035 139 ]
Setting DTOC2: I> DTOC2: I>> DTOC2: tI> DTOC2: tI>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 076 071 076 072 076 077 076 078
Group 2 077 071 077 072 077 077 077 078
Group 3 078 071 078 072 078 077 078 078
Group 4 079 071 079 072 079 077 079 078
68Z6014A_UK
3-92 Definite-time overcurrent protection 2
128 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.24 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Residual Current System

(Function Group DTOCN)
The P638 provides a definite-time overcurrent protection function to monitor residual

currents.

definite-time overcurrent
protection function for
residual current
Definite-time overcurrent protection may be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters. Enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DTOCN: General
Enable USER
[ 031 138 ]
0
1 DTOCN: Enabled
& [ 035 192 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOCN: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes

[ * ]
y GROUP: Group y Setting DTOCN: Enable

Active SGx
1 036 090 Group 1 076 110
2 036 091 Group 2 077 110
3 036 092 Group 3 078 110
4 036 093 Group 4 079 110
68Z6025A_UK
3-93 Disabling or enabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function for residual current
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-129

3 Operation
(continued)
The residual current is monitored to detect when the set thresholds are exceeded. The
arithmetical mean and the instantaneous value of the residual current are monitored in
parallel to the high-current stage . Depending on the time of fault occurrence and
current value, the monitoring reaction time to the arithmetical mean value has the
duration of 0.5 to 1 cycles. The reaction time to the instantaneous value is less than the
duration of 0.1 cycles.
In addition to the high-current stage the residual current is monitored by two stages
whether it exceeds the set threshold values.
After the set time delays have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. The elapsing of the time-
delays may be blocked using an appropriately configured binary signal input.
DTOCN: Blocking DTOCN: tIN>H

tIN>H EXT C SGx
[ 035 201 ] [ * ]
DTOCN: Enabled
[ 035 192 ] & t 0 DTOCN: Trip
Signal tIN>H
MAIN: Protection DTOCN: IN>H [ 035 198 ]
active C SGx
306 001 [ * ]
DTOCN: Starting
Instantaneous value IN>H
IN [ 035 195 ]
AR_MV (Average)
Setting DTOCN: IN>H DTOCN: tIN>H

SGx SGx
Group 1 076 111 076 114
Group 2 077 111 077 114
Group 3 078 111 078 114
Group 4 079 111 079 114
68Z6026A_UK
3-94 Monitoring of residual current
3-130 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.25 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT)
The P638 provides a single-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection function.

This IDMT function can be activated concurrently with the other protection functions.
Inverse time overcurrent protection may optionally be operated with short-circuit direction
determination.
Disabling or enabling
IDMT protection
IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter. Enabling can be
done separately for each setting group.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IDMT: General
Enable USER
[ 017 096 ]
0
1 IDMT: Enabled
& [ 040 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GROUP: Group y
Active
[ * ]
y GROUP: Group y Setting IDMT: Enable

Active SGx
1 036 090 Group 1 072 000
2 036 091 Group 2 073 000
3 036 092 Group 3 074 000
4 036 093 Group 4 075 000
68Z6015A_UK
3-95 Disabling or enabling IDMT protection
Time-dependent
characteristics
The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table below).
The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in figures 3-96 to 3-99.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-131

3 Operation
(continued)
No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Reset Characteristic
Characteristic
Characteristic settable a b c R
factor:
k = 0.05 to 10.00
0 Definite Time t=k
Per IEC 255-3 a
t =k⋅ b
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎝ I ref ⎠
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112 ⎛ ⎞ k ⋅R
⎜ ⎟ tr = 2
⎜ ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅⎜
a
+ c⎟ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎜⎛ I ⎞ b
⎟ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1 ⎟
⎜ I ⎟
⎝ ⎝ ref ⎠ ⎠
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85

6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
Per ANSI ⎛ ⎞ k ⋅R
⎜ ⎟ tr = 2
⎜ ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅⎜
a
+ c ⎟ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎜ ⎛ I ⎞b ⎟ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1 ⎟
⎜ I ⎟
⎝ ⎝ ref ⎠ ⎠
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00

9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t =k⋅
0.236
0.339 −
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse ⎛ I
t = k ⋅ ⎜⎜ 5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln
⎝ I ref
3-132 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10 k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1
k=1
k=0,1
0,1 k=0,05 0,1
k=0,1
k=0,05
0,01 0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/IB I/IB
S8Z50K1B S8Z50K2B
Characteristic No. 1 Characteristic No. 2
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse IEC 255-3, Long Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s k=10
t/s
1 1
k=0,1
k=0,05
k=1
0,1 0,1
k=0,1
0,01 k=0,05 0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/IB I/IB
S8Z50K3B S8Z50K4B
3-96 Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-133

3 Operation
(continued)
IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0,1 k=0,1 0,1

k=0,05 k=0,1
k=0,05
0,01 0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/IB I/IB
S8Z50K5C S8Z50K6C
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0,1
k=0,1
0,01 k=0,05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/IB
S8Z50K7C
Characteristic No. 7
3-97 Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
3-134 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Normally Inverse ANSI, Short Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s k=10
t/s
1 1
k=10
k=1
0,1 0,1
k=1
k=0,1 k=0,1
0,01 k=0,05 0,01
k=0,05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/IB I/IB
S8Z50K8C S8Z50K9C
ANSI, Long Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=0,1
1
k=1
0,1 k=0,05
0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/IB
S8Z50KAC
Characteristic No. 10
3-98 Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-135

3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s

k=1
1 1
k=0,1
k=0,05 k=0,1
0,1 0,1
k=0,05
0,01 0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/IB I/IB
S8Z50KBB S8Z50KCB
3-99 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
3-136 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)

variables
The selection whether the currents in end a or end b of the transformer are to be
monitored is made by setting a parameter.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-137

3 Operation
(continued)
Inrush restraint
Triggering of the inverse-time overcurrent protection functions can optionally be blocked,
together with the differential protection function, during inrush occurrences. In this case
the signal from the inrush stabilization function of the differential protection is used as a
blocking criterion. Therefore when the differential protection of the P638 is disabled,
then the overcurrent stages will always operate without inrush stabilization. Blocking of
inrush stabilization is released when at least one phase current exceeds the set
threshold ID M T : I > l i f t R u s h R e s t . S G x .
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IDMT: Inrush IDMT: Inrush IDMT: I>lift

Stab ="on"SGx Setting Stab ="on"SGx Rush Rest.SGx
[ * ]
Group 1 072 129 072 101
0 Group 2 073 129 073 101
Group 3 074 129 074 101
1
Group 4 075 129 075 101
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT: I>lift
Rush Rest.SGx
[ * ]
IDMT:
IDMT: IA Harm.Block. 1
& Trigg.
307 101 310 036
IDMT: IC
307 103
IDMT:
Harm.Block. 2
& Trigg.
310 037
IDMT: Inrush
DIFF: Harm.Block. 1 Stabil.Trigg.
Trigg. [ 040 118 ]
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF: Harm.Block. 2
Trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
68Z6016A_UK
3-101 Inrush restraint of definite-time overcurrent protection
3-138 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Determining the trip time

The phase currents are monitored by the P638 to detect when they exceed the set
threshold. The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if 1.05 times the set
reference current is exceeded in one phase. The P638 determines the highest of the
phase currents for further processing. As a function of this current and of the set
characteristic, the P638 will determine the tripping time. Moreover the tripping time will
under no circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold, irrespective of the
current flow magnitude.
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary

signal input.
Direction determination
Short-circuit direction determination is enabled with IDMT : D i r e c t i o n M e a s u r e m .
When the inverse-time overcurrent protection is triggered and if the measured voltage
level is within the limits set by Vmin and V< then the fault angle ϕ is calculated and the
short-circuit (e.g. fault) direction is determined. The short-circuit characteristic is defined
by the angles β and γ. The program decides that the fault direction is 'Forward' when the
calculated angle ϕ lies within the range given by γ = ϕ = β.
The starting direction may be freely set.
By setting the parameter IDMT : T i m e r S t . t I r e f > S G x the user can select

whether processing of the selected characteristic is started when the inverse-time
overcurrent protection is triggered or, additionally, with direction signalling. The starting
signal depends on the starting conditions selected for the timer stages.
Direction determination of the respective measuring system is enabled if the measured

voltage value exceeds a settable enabling threshold Vmin. It can be determined by
setting that a short-circuit voltage below Vmin will either lead to the IDMT protection
function operating non-directionally or to it becoming blocked. Another setting is used to
determine whether a failure of the voltage measuring circuit will either lead to the
overcurrent protection function operating non-directionally or to it becoming blocked.
Direction determination and starting of the respective stage are only enabled if the
measured voltage value is below a settable undervoltage threshold V<. Setting the
undervoltage threshold V< to 'Blocked' will disable this voltage scan, and direction
determination and starting are permanently enabled.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-139

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IDMT: Iref IDMT: Timer St.

Rating SGx tIref> SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
1.05 * Iref
2
1: With Starting
2: With Direction
IDMT: Enabled
[ 040 100 ] &
MAIN: Protection
active C1,2
306 001
IDMT: Harm.Block.
1 Trigg. C1
310 036
IDMT: Harm.Block.
2 Trigg. C2
310 037 IDMT: Starting
Iref>
& [ 040 080 ]
IDMT: IA
307 101
&
IDMT: IC
307 103
IDMT: Forward
trip
307 104
IDMT: Reverse IDMT: Iref>

trip Triggered
307 105 310 038
IDMT: Non- IDMT: Phase A

directional trip Triggered
307 106 [ 038 117 ]
IDMT: Direction IDMT: Phase C
Measurem. Triggered
[ 017 109 ] [ 038 118 ]
0: Disabled
IDMT: Block.
tIref> EXT
[ 040 101 ] IDMT: Charac-
teristic SGx
[ * ]
Setting IDMT: kt Time
IDMT: Characteristic SGx Dial/TMS SGx
[ * ]
0: Definite Time IDMT: Min. Trip
1: IEC Standard Inverse Time SGx
2: IEC Very Inverse [ * ]
3: IEC Extr. Inverse IDMT: Hold Time
4: IEC Long Time Inv. SGx
5: IEEE Moderately Inv. [ * ]
6: IEEE Very Inverse IDMT: Release
7: IEEE Extremely Inv. C SGx
8: ANSI Normally Inv. [ * ]
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
10: ANSI Long Time Inv. C
11: RI-Type Inverse
12: RXIDG Inverse
IDMT: Memory
Clear
IP, max / Iref,P [ 040 110 ]
Setting IDMT: Hold Time
IDMT: Release SGx Running
[ 040 053 ]
1: Instantaneous IDMT: tIref>
2: Delayed as per Char. Elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
IDMT: Trip
& Signal tIref>
[ 040 084 ]
&
Setting IDMT: Timer St. IDMT: Iref

tIref> SGx Rating SGx
Group 1 006 061 072 050
Group 2 006 062 073 050
Group 3 006 063 074 050
Group 4 006 064 075 050
Setting IDMT: Charac- IDMT: kt Time IDMT: Min. Trip IDMT: Hold Time IDMT: Release
teristic SGx Dial/TMS SGx Time SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 056 072 053 072 077 072 071 072 059
Group 2 073 056 073 052 073 077 073 071 073 059
Group 3 074 056 074 052 074 077 074 071 074 059
Group 4 075 056 075 052 075 077 075 071 075 059
68Z6017A_UK
3-102 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection
3-140 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Load flow direction

Determining the load flow direction is activated when short-circuit direction determination
has been enabled.
When a permanent current enable value is exceeded and if the measured voltage level
is greater or equal to the enable voltage threshold value Vmin then the load angle ϕ is
calculated and the load flow direction is determined according to the selected short-
circuit characteristic.
The load flow direction is displayed as long as no short circuit condition is present, which
is identified by triggering of IDMT stages and the undervoltage enable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IDMT: Direction
Measurem.
[ 017 109 ] & Setting IDMT: Beta IDMT: Gamma
1: Enabled SGx SGx
MAIN: M.c.b. Trip Group 1 072 046 072 047
V EXT
[ 004 061 ] Group 2 073 046 073 047
IDMT: Beta
IDMT: V ≥ Vmin SGx
Group 3 074 046 074 047
307 107 [ * ] Group 4 075 046 075 047
IDMT: Gamma
SGx
[ * ]
≥ 0.05 In
C
IDMT: IA IDMT: Power Flow

C
Forward
307 101 & [ 041 017 ]
IDMT: Power Flow

& Reverse
[ 041 018 ]
V
IDMT: Fault Forward
Forward direction 30 ms 0 & [ 041 008 ]
Reverse direction 30 ms 0 IDMT: Fault Reverse

& [ 041 009 ]
IDMT: Iref>
Triggered
310 038 &
IDMT: V < U<

307 108
68Z6018A_UK
3-103 Fault direction determination
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-141

3 Operation
(continued)
3-104 Example of a fault direction determination characteristic
3-142 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-105 Determining starting direction
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-143

3 Operation
(continued)
Holding time
Depending on the current flow magnitude the P638 determines the tripping time and a
timer stage is started. The setting for the holding time defines the period for the elapsed
IDMT starting time to be stored after the starting has dropped out. If the starting returns
while the hold time elapses, the new starting time is added to the stored time. If the sum
of the starting times reaches the tripping time determined by the P638 then the
appropriate signal is issued. Should starting not recur during the hold time period then,
depending on the setting, the memory storing the accumulated starting times value will
either be cleared without delay or according to the set characteristic. In figure 3-106 the
effect of the holding time is shown by the example of a phase current stage.
3-144 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-106 The effect of the holding time illustrated for the phase current stage as an example
Case A: The determined tripping time is not reached.
Case B: The determined tripping time is reached.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-145

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)
This function makes it possible to provide thermal overload protection.
thermal overload protection
Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group.
3-107 Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection
3-146 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)

variables
The selection whether the currents in end a or end b of the transformer are to be
monitored is made by setting a parameter.
Operating modes
Two operating modes can be selected for thermal overload protection.
Relative Replica
Absolute Replica
Either operating mode can be enabled or disabled individually. Only one of the
operating modes at a time may be enabled for thermal overload protection. However, if
both operating modes are enabled at the same time, an error message is generated by
the P638 and thermal overload protection is blocked.
Relative replica
The rated operating current of the protected object and its overload tolerance for
maximum coolant (ambient) temperature are the basis of the relative thermal replica.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-147

3 Operation
(continued)
In the 'Relative replica' operating mode, the following settings have to be made for
thermal overload protection:
The rated operating current of the protected object T H E R M : I r e f R a t i n g S G x .

The tripping threshold ∆ϑtrip is set at T H E R M : T > T r i p R e s e t , % SGx.
If coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition is used, the following parameters must be

set:
The maximum temperature of the protected object is set at

THERM: Max Perm Obj Tmp.SGx.
The maximum temperature of the coolant (maximum ambient) is set at
THERM: Max Perm Cool TmpSGx.
Absolute replica
The thermal limit current of the protected object is the reference current of the absolute
thermal replica. For this limit current, an over-temperature results at the maximum
coolant temperature.
In the 'Absolute replica' operating mode, the following parameters have to be set for
thermal overload protection:
The thermal limit current of the protected object T H ER M : Ir e f R a ti n g SG x

The limit temperature for tripping is set as T H ER M : M a x Pe r m O b j T m p .SG x.
The overtemperature as a result of a persistent limit current is set at
THERM:O/T f.Iref Pers. SGx.
Tripping characteristics
Current I is used to track a first-order thermal replica as specified in IEC 255-8.
The following parameters will govern the tripping time: In addition to the operating mode
specific settings the tripping time is governed by the following parameters:
The set thermal time constant (τ ) of the protected object

THERM: Tim.Const 1(Heat)SGx
The updated measured ambient temperature of the protected object Θ a
The updated measured ambient temperature of the protected object Θa
3-148 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
The tripping threshold in the two operating modes is calculated as follows:
2
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − Θ P
t = τ ⋅ ln ⎝ KWx ⋅ I B
f ⎠
2
⎛ I ⎞ ⎛ Θ a − Θ a,max ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − ∆ϑ Aus ⋅ ⎜1 − ⎟
⎜ Θ ⎟
⎝ fKWx ⋅ I B ⎠ ⎝ max − Θ a,max ⎠
The tripping threshold ∆ϑtrip is set to a fixed value of 100 % ( = 1 ) if the operating mode
is 'Absolute replica'.
θtrip / %
10000
200
1000
110
τ/min
50
100
200
110
10 1000
50
t/min 200
1
110
50 30
0.1
0.01 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0.00
I/Iref
D5Z50BE
3-109 Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to Θ P = 0 % and identical settings for the maximum
permissible coolant and object temperatures)
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-149

3 Operation
(continued)
Influence of coolant
temperature
To permit ambient temperature correction, the analog I/O module Y must be fitted.
There are two possible means available to measure coolant temperatures:
Direct measurement by PT 100 sensor fitted on the external device

The measured temperature value is used directly to determine the tripping time.
20 mA measurements with external measuring transducers
The characteristics for transducers applied must be set in function group RTDmA.
Calculated temperature values are used to determine the tripping time.
Open measuring circuits, due to a broken wire or an overload on the 20 mA analog
measuring input, are determined by the measured value input (function group RTDmA).
This will result in the issuance of the following signals:
RTDmA: O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A I n p u t
RTDmA: O p e n C i r c . 2 0 m A i n p .
RTDmA: P T 1 0 0 O p e n C i r c u i t
The thermal model uses these signals as a criterion to determine a fault in the coolant
temperature measurement. A fault at the selected measuring point will lead to the
issuance of the signal T H ER M : C T A Er r o r .
3-150 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
The setting of T H E R M : F u n c t . f . C T A F a i l . S G x determines how the thermal

overload protection is to continue functioning when the coolant temperature
measurement has failed. One of the following functions may be selected:
Default temperature value

The coolant temperature set at T H ER M : D e fa u l t C T Am b SG x is applied.
The thermal overload protection is not blocked.
Last measured temperature
As a rule there is an erratic change of the measured value when a fault has occurred
in the coolant temperature measurement. The temperature measured before such an
erratic change is stored and applied. The thermal overload protection is not blocked.
Blocking
All signals issued by the thermal overload protection are reset. The thermal modeling
will then be continued on the basis of the measured current alone.
All relevant parameters for coolant temperature acquisition are hidden if the analog
module Y has not been fitted to the P638. The tripping time is calculated by including
the setting for T H E R M : D e f a u l t C T A m b S G x .
Minimum coolant
temperature
A setting for a minimum coolant temperature is provided for catenary sections where
coolant temperatures may differ strongly from measured values. For instance in winter
months the temperature measured in a tunnel will be higher than the ambient
temperature measured at the feeder point. In such cases the measured coolant
temperature is limited to a low value set at T H ER M : M i n i m u m T e m p e r a t.SG x.
Thermal overload
protection operation
without coolant
temperature acquisition
In order to guarantee thermal overload protection, without considering an offset because
of a variable coolant temperature, it is recommended to set the parameter
T H ER M : D e fa u l t C T Am b SG x to the maximum permitted coolant temperature.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-151

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
THERM: Select
CT AmbientSGx
[ * ]
0
1 ≥1 THERM: with CTA
303 201
2
0: Default Temp.
Value
1: From PT 100
2: From 20 mA
input
THERM: Enabled ≥1
[ 040 068 ] & ≥1 THERM: CTA Error
[ 039 111 ]
RTDmA: Enabled
[ 035 008 ] CHECK: CTA Error
& [ 098 034 ]
RTDmA: PT100 Faulty
[ 041 190 ]
&
RTDmA: Overload 20mA Input ≥1
[ 041 191 ]
RTDmA: Open Circ. 20mA
inp.
[ 041 192 ]
THERM: CTA Error EXT
[ 038 062 ]
THERM: Funct.
f.CTA fail.SGx
[ * ]
0
THERM: Block.by
1 & CTA Fail305 200
2
0: Default Temp.
Value
1: Last Meas.
Temperat
2: From 20 mA
input
Setting THERM: Select THERM: Funct.

CT AmbientSGx f.CTA fail.SGx
Group 1 072 177 076 177
Group 2 073 177 077 177
Group 3 074 177 078 177
Group 4 075 177 079 177
48Z5333B_UK
3-110 Monitoring the coolant temperature
3-152 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Alarm
Depending on the selected operating mode, a warning signal can be set at one of the
following parameters:
Relative replica: THERM: T> Alarm Reset,% SGx

Absolute replica: THERM: Alarm Temp. SGx
Additionally, a pre-trip time limit can be set; when the time left until tripping falls below
this pre-trip limit, a warning will be issued.
Trip
The trip threshold is set according to the selected operating mode with the following
parameters:
Relative replica: THERM: T> Trip Reset,% SGx

Absolute replica: THERM: Max Perm Obj Tmp.SGx
If a trip command is issued, the trip signal is maintained until the status of the thermal
replica has decreased by the value T H E R M : T r i p H y s t e r e s i s S G x , at least for
a fixed time of 5s.
Cooling
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the
set time constant T H E R M : T i m . C o n s t 2 ( C o o l ) S G x . This element in the
thermal model takes account of the cooling characteristics of the equipment.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-153

3 Operation
(continued)
C
THERM: Starting
THERM: I AR_MV k*Iref>
305 202 (Average) [ 041 108 ]
THERM: Iref
SGx <0.1 Iref
[ * ] C
THERM: Start THERM: Tim.Const
Fact.OL_RC SGx C 1(Heat)SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
THERM: Tim.Const
kP*Iref 2(Cool)SGx
C [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active & THERM: Default
306 001 C CT Amb SGx
THERM: Enabled [ * ]
[ 040 068 ] THERM: O/T
& C f.Iref
[
Pers. SGx
* ]
THERM: Not THERM: Alarm
Ready Temp. SGx
[ 040 035 ] C [ * ]
THERM: Max Perm
C Obj Tmp.SGx
THERM: Absolute [ * ] THERM: Within
Replica Pre-trip Time
[ 022 065 ] THERM: Max Perm [ 041 109 ]
C Cool
[
TmpSGx
* ] CHECK: Setting
0 THERM: T> Alarm Error THERM
C Reset,% SGx [ 098 035 ]
[ * ]
1 THERM: Setting
THERM: T> Trip Error,Block.
0: No C Reset,% SGx [ 039 110 ]
[ * ]
1: Yes THERM: Alarm
THERM: Minimum [ 039 025 ]
C Temperat.SGx
[ * ] THERM: Trip
THERM: Relative THERM: Trip Signal
Replica Hysteresis SGx [ 039 020 ]
[ 022 064 ] [ * ]
THERM: Reclosure
THERM: Pre-Trip Blocked
0 Alarm SGx [ 039 024 ]
[ * ]
1 THERM: Memory
Clear
0: No [ 039 112 ]
C
1: Yes
I/Iref THERM: Status

Therm.Replica
[ 004 016 ]
R THERM: Object
THERM: With CTA C Temperature
305 201 [ 004 137 ]
THERM: Coolant
Coolant temperature Temperature
[ 004 149 ]
THERM: Reset
Replica THERM: Pre-Trip
[ 039 061 ] Time left
[ 004 139 ]
THERM: Temp. Offset
Replica
[ 004 109 ]
THERM: Coolant
Temp. p.u.
Setting THERM: Iref THERM: Start [ 004 178 ]
SGx Fact.OL_RC SGx
THERM: Object
Group 1 072 179 072 180 Temp. p.u.
Group 2 073 179 073 180 [ 004 179 ]
Group 3 074 179 074 180 THERM: Therm.
Replica p.u.
Group 4 075 179 075 180 [ 004 017 ]
Setting THERM: Tim.Const THERM: Tim.Const THERM: O/T THERM: Alarm THERM: Max Perm THERM: Max Perm
1(Heat)SGx 2(Cool)SGx f.Iref Pers. SGx Temp. SGx Obj Tmp.SGx Cool TmpSGx
Group 1 072 187 072 188 072 167 072 153 072 182 072 185
Group 2 073 187 073 188 073 167 073 153 073 182 073 185
Group 3 074 187 074 188 074 167 074 153 074 182 074 185
Group 4 075 187 075 188 075 167 075 153 075 182 075 185
Setting THERM: T> Alarm THERM: T> Trip THERM: Default THERM: Minimum THERM: Trip THERM: Pre-Trip
Reset,% SGx Reset,% SGx CT Amb SGx Temperat.SGx Hysteresis SGx Alarm SGx
Group 1 072 184 072 181 072 186 076 178 072 183 072 191
Group 2 073 184 073 181 073 186 077 178 073 183 073 191
Group 3 074 184 074 181 074 186 078 178 074 183 074 191
Group 4 075 184 075 181 075 186 079 178 075 183 075 191
68Z6051A_UK
3-111 Thermal overload protection
3-154 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Reset
The thermal replica may be reset either using a setting parameter or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when thermal overload
protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be blocked using an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-112 Resetting the thermal replica
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-155

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27 Under and overvoltage protection (Function group V<>)
The P638 provides a two-stage time-voltage protection function for over- and
undervoltage monitoring.
V<> protection
V<> protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter. Enabling can be
carried out separately for each setting group.
V<> protection readiness

V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltage-
measuring circuit.
3-113 Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection
3-156 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage monitoring
The P638 checks the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set
thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked using
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then
it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would
always be present when the system voltage were disconnected, and thus it would not be
possible to reclose the circuit breaker.
Furthermore, the undervoltage protection function provides a window function.

The windows are defined by the settings V< > : Vm i n SG x and by the set thresholds
V< or V< < , respectively. The setting V< > : Vm i n SG x defines the lower threshold
for both windows. With an appropriate setting of the successive timer stages, this
provision can be used to bridge short periods of voltage failure as encountered in
switching operations.
3-114 Overvoltage monitoring
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-157

3 Operation
(continued)
3-115 Undervoltage monitoring
3-158 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.28 Frequency Protection (Function Group f<>)
The P638 checks the voltage selected to detect whether the frequency exceeds or falls
below set thresholds. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between
the zero crossings of the voltage. The over-/ underfrequency protection function has
four stages. The first stage will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of over-/
underfrequency protection.
Enabling or disabling over-/

underfrequency protection
Frequency protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Enabling
can be done separately for each setting group.
3-116 Enabling, disabling and readiness of the f<> protection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-159

3 Operation
(continued)
Conditioning of the
Measured Values
The over-/underfrequency protection function filters the fundamental with the nominal
frequency from the voltage.
3-117 Conditioning of the Measured Values
3-160 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage blocking and

evaluation time
Over-/ underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of adequate magnitude.
Over-/ underfrequency protection will be blocked immediately if the measured voltage
falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stages operating as a consequence of brief frequency

fluctuations or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate
conditions need to be satisfied for the duration of the set evaluation time for a signal to
be issued.
3-118 Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-161

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes of
frequency protection
For each stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the user can select
between the following operating modes:
Frequency monitoring
Frequency monitoring combined with instantaneous rate of change (dt/dt) monitoring
Frequency monitoring combined with average rate of change (∆f/∆t) monitoring
Depending on the setting, the P638 checks the frequency to detect whether it exceeds or
falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set nominal frequency
is set, the P638 checks whether the frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an
operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set, the P638 checks whether the
frequency falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold,
a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
combined with
instantaneous rate of
change (dt/dt) monitoring
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the frequency is
additionally monitored for attaining the set frequency gradient (as well as for exceeding
or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with
monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with
monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer
stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured
binary signal input.
3-162 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
combined with average
rate of change (∆f/∆t)
monitoring
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and
may vary in time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean value
of the frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems.
In this operating mode, frequency monitoring must be set to “underfrequency

monitoring”.
Monitoring of the mean value of the frequency gradient starts concurrently with
underfrequency pick-up. If the frequency decreases by the set value ∆f within the set
time ∆t then the ∆t/∆f monitoring function operates without delay and generates a trip
signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring
function then the ∆t/∆f monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency
monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
3-119 Operation of frequency monitoring combined with rate of change (∆f/∆t) monitoring
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-163

3 Operation
(continued)
3-120 First stage of the frequency protection function
3-164 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1 and CBF_2)
The P638 provides two main-trip circuits. Each of these main-trip circuits is provided
with its own circuit breaker protection function.
circuit breaker failure
protection
Circuit breaker failure protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
CBF_y: General
Enable USER
[ * ]
0
1 CBF_y: Enabled
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
CBF_y: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
y: System 1 y: System 2
CBF_y: General 022 100 022 101

Enable USER
CBF_y: Enabled 040 055 040 048
y: System 1
Setting CBF_1: Enable
SGx
Group 1 072 110
Group 2 073 110
Group 3 074 110
Group 4 075 110
y: System 2
Setting CBF_2: Enable
SGx
Group 1 072 120
Group 2 073 120
Group 3 074 120
Group 4 075 120
Q9Z5014 C_UK
3-121 Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-165

3 Operation
(continued)
Circuit breaker protection is started by the main-trip command. This command then
starts timer stages. Once they have elapsed, and unless the current monitored by the
circuit breaker failure protection function has fallen below the set threshold, re-trips will
result or a superior level protection unit is triggered. Only the fundamental of the current
is monitored. Current values to be monitored (end a or end b) may be set.
Additionally, the circuit breaker auxiliary contact can be monitored. This is only possible
if a binary signal input has been set to C B F _ y : C B C l o s e d S i g . E X T . The
pickup of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact starts a timer stage. If, after this timer
stage has elapsed, the current value monitored exceeds the set threshold, then the
signal C B F _ y : C B S u p e r v . S i g n a l is issued. Auxiliary contact supervision is only
active for the set operative time.
3-166 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
CBF_y: Imin<
Triggered
402 455
CBF_y: Enabled C
[ * ]
MAIN: Protection CBF_y: tBF1 Init M- CBF_y: Re-Trip

active Trip SGx Signal
306 001
[ * ] [ * ]
CBF_y: Failure
Main-Trip
[ * ]
MAIN: Main-Trip
Command 1 CBF_y: Timer
[ * ] tBF1 Running
MAIN: Parallel [ * ]
Trip y EXT
[ * ]
CBF_y: tBF2 Init CBF_y: Back-

ReTrip SGx Trip Signal
[ * ] [ * ]
CBF_y: Failure
Re-Trip
[ * ]
CBF_y: Timer
tBF2 Running
[ * ]
MAIN: CB Failure
[ 036 017 ]
CBF_y: tImin<
SGx
[ * ] CBF_y: CB
Superv. Signal
[ * ]
CBF_y: CB Closed
Sig. EXT
[ * ]
CBF_y: tOp
SGx
[ * ]
y: System 1 y: System 2
CBF_y: Re-Trip 039 022 040 089

Signal
CBF_y: Failure
Main-Trip 039 021 036 059
CBF_y: Timer
y: System 1 y: System 2 tBF1 Running 036 066 036 111
CBF_y: Enabled 040 055 040 048 CBF_y: Back-Trip 039 023 040 104
Signal
MAIN: Main-Trip 039 011 039 058 CBF_y: Failure 036 056 036 106
Command y Re-Trip
MAIN: Parallel 037 019 037 022 CBF_y: Timer 036 110 036 112
Trip y EXT tBF2 Running
CBF_y: CB Closed 036 107 036 108 CBF_y: CB 039 000 039 039
Sig. EXT Superv. Signal
y: System 1
Setting CBF_1: tBF1 Init CBF_1: tBF2 Init CBF_1: tImin< CBF_1: tOp
M-Trip SGx ReTrip SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 115 072 116 072 113 072 114
Group 2 073 115 073 116 073 113 073 114
Group 3 074 115 074 116 074 113 074 114
Group 4 075 115 075 116 075 113 075 114
y: System 2
Setting CBF_2: tBF1 Init CBF_2: tBF2 Init CBF_2: tImin< CBF_2: tOp
M-Trip SGx ReTrip SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 125 072 126 072 123 072 124
Group 2 073 125 073 126 073 123 073 124
Group 3 074 125 074 126 074 123 074 124
Group 4 075 125 075 126 075 123 075 124
68Z60ANA_UK
3-122 Circuit breaker failure protection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-167

3 Operation
(continued)
3-123 Current monitored by the circuit breaker failure protection
3-168 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Groups CBM_1 and CBM_2)
The P638 provides two independent trip circuits. Each of these trip circuits is equipped
with its own circuit breaker monitoring function. This function supports state-controlled
maintenance of circuit breakers.
Enable/disable circuit
breaker monitoring
Circuit breaker monitoring functions may be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM_1: General
Enable USER
[ 022 010 ]
0
1 CBM_1: Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
0: No
1: Yes
CBM_2: General
Enable USER
[ 007 170 ]
0
1 CBM_2: Enabled
[ 007 113 ]
0: No
1: Yes
68Z6040A_UK
3-124 Enable/disable circuit breaker monitoring functions
Variants
The wear condition of a circuit breaker may be determined by a variety of methods:
Monitoring the number of mechanical switching operations

Accumulating the ruptured current values
Accumulating the squares of the ruptured current values
Calculating the current-time integral of ruptured and accumulation current values
Calculating the remaining number of switching operations with reference to the CB
wear characteristic
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-169

3 Operation
(continued)
CB wear characteristic
Circuit breaker manufacturers usually provide wear characteristics showing the
maximum number of permissible CB operations as a function of the ruptured current.
Figure 3-125 displays the wear characteristics for a circuit breaker with a nominal current
of 2000 A and a rated ruptured current of 63 kA. The mean ruptured current is 48 kA.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
100000
Number of remaining CB operations
10000
1000
100
10
0,1
0.1 1 10 100
Ruptured current in kA
68Z6041A_UK
3-125 Circuit breaker wear characteristic
3-170 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
The knee points shown in figure 3-125 are needed to set the circuit breaker wear
characteristic :
The nominal current values C B M _ 1 : I n , C B or C B M _ 2 : I n , C B for the circuit

breaker and the number of permitted number of remaining CB operations at nominal
current C B M _ 1 : P e r m . C B O p . I n , C B o r
CBM_2: Perm. CB Op. Inom,CB
The mean ruptured current C B M _ 1 : M e d . C u r r . I t r i p , C B or
C B M _ 2 : M e d . C u r r . I t r i p , C B for the circuit breaker and the number of
permitted number of remaining CB operations at mean ruptured current
C B M _ 1 : P e r m . C B O p . I m e d , C B or
CBM_2: Perm. CB Op. Imed,CB
The rupturedrated ruptured current C B M _ 1 : M a x . C u r r . I t r i p , C B or
C B M _ 2 : M a x . C u r r . I t r i p , C B for the circuit breaker and the number of
permitted number of remaining CB operations at the rated ruptured current
C B M _ 1 : P e r m . C B O p . I m a x , C B or
CBM_2: Perm. CB Op. Imax,CB
The mean ruptured current is not specified for all circuit breakers. In such cases, the
parameters for these co-ordinates are set to 'blocked'. A co-ordinate point is not taken
account in the characteristic when at least one of its parameters is set to 'Blocked'.
The knee-points must be specified in a logically correct sequence (continuously

descending) to ensure correct circuit breaker monitoring . When settings for current and
CB activity are set to values that are implausible and do not correspond to the
characteristic, the P638 will issue the error message: C B M : S e t t i n g e r r o r C B M
and will then block circuit breaker monitoring.
Calculating the circuit

breakers wear state
The present wear state of the circuit breakers is given as the number of remaining CB
operations at nominal current conditions. The P638 calculates and displays the number
of remaining CB operations nrem(Inom,CB) phase selectively. The calculation is made
according to the following equation:
n (I nom,CB )
nrem (Inom,CB ) = nrem,0 (Inom,CB ) −
n (Id ,CB )
Where:
Inom,CB: Nominal current of the CB

n(Inom,CB): Max number of remaining CB operations at Inom,CB
Id,CB: Ruptured current
n(Id,CB): Number of remaining Number of permitted CB operations at Id,CB
according to wear characteristics
nrem,0(Inom,CB): Number of remaining CB operations at Inom,CB before
disconnection
nrem,(Inom,CB): Number of remaining CB operations at Inom,CB after
disconnection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-171

3 Operation
(continued)

variables
The measured variables to be evaluated by the circuit breaker monitoring functions are
selected by a setting parameter.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM_1: Select
Meas. Input
[ 022 178 ]
1
2
1: End a C1,3
2: End b
C2,4
IA,a 1
IC,a 3
IA,b 2
IC,b 4
1 ... 2 CBM_1: IA
310 040
3 ... 4 CBM_1: IC
310 041
CBM_2: Select
Meas. Input
[ 007 216 ]
1
2
1: End a C1,3
2: End b
C2,4
1 ... 2 CBM_2: IA
310 042
3 ... 4 CBM_2: IC
310 043
68Z6042A_UK
3-126 Selecting the measured variables for the circuit breaker monitoring functions
3-172 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes
You select the condition for which the function will be triggered by setting the
parameters: C B M _ 1 : O p e r a t i n g m o d e or C B M _ 2 : O p e r a t i n g m o d e .
With Trip Cmd. Only:

The function is triggered only by the respective trip command
W i t h C B S i g . E X T Only:
The function is triggered only by the CB open signal generated by an auxiliary
contact.
CB Sig. EXT or Trip:
The function is triggered by the respective trip command or the CB open signal
generated by an auxiliary contact
The following correction values can be set to determine the exact trip time:
C B M _ 1 : C o r r . A c q u . t . T r i p or C B M _ 2 : C o r r . A c q u . t . T r i p
A positive correction time value can be set for the delay period between the trip
command and the opening of the CB contacts.
C B M _ 1 : C o r r . A c q u . t . C B S i g . or C B M _ 2 : C o r r . A c q u . t . C B S i g .
A positive or negative correction time value can be set for leading or lagging auxiliary
contacts.
Cycle for circuit breaker

monitoring
The cycle for circuit breaker monitoring is defined pole-selectively. During an active
cycle the signals C B M _ 1 : C y c l e R u n n i n g x or C B M _ 2 : C y c l e R u n n i n g x
are issued (x = A or C).
The cycle is started by a trigger criterion. The end of a cycle is defined when the
remaining time of a power cycle has elapsed after the last detected current zero
crossing. The signals C B M _ 1 : C u r r . F l o w E n d e d x or
C B M _ 2 : C u r r . F l o w E n d e d x are generated (x = A or C).
The maximum cycle time duration is defined at 220 milliseconds. The start of the cycle
time is corrected by the configurable correction times. A fault on a CB pole is assumed if
further current zero crossings are detected after the maximum cycle time has elapsed.
Measured values from the respective CB tripping are cancelled and the signal
C B M _ 1 : t m a x > x or C B M _ 2 : t m a x > x is issued (x = A or C).
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-173

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM_1: Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
CBM_1: Enabled C
[ 044 130 ] &
MAIN: CBM_1: Operating
Protection Mode
active [ 022 007 ]
306 001
1
2
3
1: With Trip Cmd. Only
2: With CB Sig.EXT Only
3: CB Sig. EXT or Trip
C1,2
CBM_1: Corr.
C1 Acqu.t. Trip
[ 022 153 ]
CBM_1: Corr.
C2 Acqu.t.CB Sig.
[ 022 018 ]
MAIN: Main-Trip
Signal 1
[ 039 101 ] 1
MAIN: Re-Trip
Signal 1
[ 039 103 ]
MAIN: CB1 Trip EXT 2
[ 044 131 ] C
CBM_1: tmax> x
[ * ]
220 ms 0 CBM_1: Cycle
1 … 2 Running x
& [ * ]
< 0.05 In
CBM_1: Ix
CBM_1: Curr. Flow
A: 310 040 Ended x
C: 310 041 [ * ]
Phase x CBM_1: Cycle CBM_1: Curr.

/ Current Running x CBM_1: tmax> x Flow Ended x
Ix
A / IA 044 205 044 177 044 201
C / IC 044 207 044 179 044 203
68Z6043A_UK
3-127 Pole-selective measuring cycle for circuit breaker monitoring

(The evaluation of the circuit breaker monitoring function for system 1 is shown in the figure. The evaluation for system 2 is similar, for
parameters see Chapters 7 and 8.)
3-174 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Pole-selective measured
values and counter values
Depending on the set operating mode, the P638 evaluates the conductor currents
separately and establishes a wear state for each circuit breaker or CB pole.
The following measured values are presented pole-selectively, and per-unit values refer
to the CB nominal current:
Primary ruptured currentThis value is used to evaluate wear with reference to the CB
wear characteristic.
Per-unit ruptured current
Square of the per-unit ruptured current
Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents
Sum of the squares of the per-unit ruptured currents
Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents
The ruptured current is derived from the r.m.s. current value during the function cycle.
The integral of the current-time area is calculated during the function cycle. An example
of a current-time integral calculation is shown in figure 3-128.
The following counter values are presented pole selectively:
The number of mechanical switching operations

The number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current
This value is derived by evaluating wear with reference to the CB wear characteristic.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-175

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Current-time integral
1 cycle
MAIN: Main-Trip
Command x
CBM: Corr. Acqu.t.

Trip
CBM: Cycle Running x
CBM: Operative time

running x
CBM: Curr. Flow

Ended x
68Z6044A_UK
3-128 Calculation of the pole-selective current-time integrals when CBM is triggered by the respective main-trip command
Resetting measured values

Measured values from the last CB trip may be reset via the device interfaces.
Accumulated measured values are not affected by such a reset operation.
Setting measured values

You need to set the measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function if the
respective CB has already been in service or has been replaced. You can set the
measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function via the device interfaces.
Note: You may only set new measurement and counter values if the default values
are not set to 'Blocked'.
The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to 'Blocked'.
Execution of the set command initializes all default values in the P638 to
'Blocked'.
3-176 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM_1: Cycle Running x C

[ * ]
CBM_1: In,CB
[ 022 012 ]
MAIN: In CT.
prim.,End a
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN: In CT.
prim.,End b
[ 019 021 ]
CBM_1: Perm. CB
Op. In,CB
[ 022 013 ]
fnom
CBM_1: Ix CBM_1: Med.
Curr. Itrip,CB
A: 310 040 [ 022 014 ]
C: 310 041
CBM_1: Perm. CB
C Op. Imed,CB
[ 022 015 ]
CBM_1: Set No. CB CBM_1: Max.

Oper. x Curr. Itrip,CB
[ * ] [ 022 016 ]
CBM_1: Set CBM_1: Perm. CB

Remain. CB Op. x Op. Imax,CB
[ * ] [ 022 017 ]
CBM_1: Set
–Itrip x CBM_1: Itrip x
[ * ] R [ * ]
CBM_1: Vorg. CBM_1: I*t x

ΣItrip**2 x R [ * ]
[ * ]
CBM_1: Itrip,prim x
CBM_1: Vorg. R [ * ]
ΣI*t x
[ * ] CBM_1: Itrip**2 x
R [ * ]
CBM_1: ΣItrip x
S [ * ]
CBM_1: ΣItrip**2 x
S [ * ]
CBM_1: ΣI*t x
S [ * ]
CBM_1: No. of CB
Oper. x
S [ * ]
CBM_1: Remain. No.
CB op. x
S [ * ]
CBM_1: Initialize Values

[ 003 011 ]
CBM_1: Reset Meas.Val.
USER
[ 003 013 ]
Phase x CBM_1: Cycle CBM_1: Set No. CBM_1: Set CBM_1: Set CBM_1: Vorg. CBM_1: Vorg.
/ Current Running x CB Oper. x Remain. CB Op. x –Itrip x ΣItrip**2 x ΣI*t x
Ix
A / IA 044 205 022 131 022 134 022 137 022 140 022 143
C / IC 044 207 022 133 022 136 022 139 022 142 022 145
Phase x CBM_1: CBM_1: Itrip**2 CBM_1:

/ Current CBM_1: Iaus Lx CBM_1: I*t x Itrip,prim x x CBM_1: ΣIaus Lx ΣItrip**2 x
Ix
A / IA 009 047 009 061 009 212 009 051 009 071 009 077
C / IC 009 049 009 063 009 214 009 053 009 073 009 079
Phase x CBM_1: No. of CB CBM_1: Remain.

/ Current CBM_1: ΣI*t x Oper. x No. CB op. x
Ix
A / IA 009 087 008 011 008 014
C / IC 009 089 008 013 008 016
68Z6045A_UK
3-129 Calculation by the circuit breaker monitoring function (pole-selective representation)

(The evaluation of the circuit breaker monitoring function for system 1 is shown in the figure. The evaluation for system 2 is similar. For
parameters see Chapters 7 and 8.)
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-177

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting measured values

Measured values from the respective last CB trip may be reset using the interfaces of
the device. Accumulated measured values are not affected by such a reset operation.
Setting measured values

Setting measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function is necessary when the
respective CB has already been exposed to operating conditions or has been replaced.
The available interfaces on the device may be used to set measured values in the circuit
breaker monitoring function.
Note: You may only set new measurement and counter values if the default values
are not set to 'Blocked'.
The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to "blocked".
Execution of the set command initializes all default values in the P638 to
'Blocked'.
3-178 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the number of

CB operations
Depending on the selected operating mode, the P638 will calculate the current wear
state of the circuit breaker after each disconnection, whereby the number of remaining
CB operations at CB nominal current are calculated and displayed. A threshold value
can be set with the parameters C B M _ 1 : R e m a i n N o . C B O p . < or
C B M _ 2 : R e m a i n N o . C B O p . < . An alarm is issued if the number of remaining
CB operations drops below this threshold.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM_1: Remain
No. CB Op. <
[ 022 020 ]
CBM_1: Sig. Rem. No.CB
CBM_1: Remain. op.<
No. CB op. A [ 044 136 ]
[ 008 014 ]
CBM_1: Remain.
No. CB op. C
[ 008 016 ]
CBM_2: Remain
No. CB Op. <
[ 007 180 ]
CBM_2: Sig. Rem.
CBM_2: Remain. No.CB op.<
No. CB op. A [ 007 118 ]
[ 007 144 ]
CBM_2: Remain.
No. CB op. C
[ 007 145 ]
68Z6046A_UK
3-130 Monitoring the number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current
Each switching operation will increment the CB Activity counter. The number of CB
operations made for each CB contact is displayed. A threshold value can be set with the
parameters C B M _ 1 : N o . C B O p e r a t i o n s > or
C B M _ 2 : N o . C B O p e r a t i o n s > . An alarm is issued if the number of CB
operations exceeds this threshold.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM_1: No. CB
Operations >
[ 022 019 ]
CBM_1: Sig. No. CB Op.
CBM_1: No. of [ 044 135 ]
CB Oper. A
[ 008 011 ]
CBM_1: No. of
CB Oper. C
[ 008 013 ]
CBM_2: No. CB
Operations >
[ 007 179 ]
CBM_2: Sig. No. CB Op.
CBM_2: No. of CB [ 007 117 ]
Oper. A
[ 007 142 ]
CBM_2: No. of CB
Oper. C
[ 007 143 ]
68Z6047A_UK
3-131 Monitoring the number of CB operations made
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-179

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring ruptured
currents
In addition to the evaluation of the CB wear state and activity, the P638 provides the
possibility of accumulating and displaying ruptured current values and the square of
these values.
Threshold values can be set with the parameters C B M _ 1 : Σ I t r i p > or

C B M _ 2 : Σ I t r i p > , C B M _ 1 : Σ I t r i p * * 2 > or C B M _ 2 : Σ I t r i p * * 2 > and
C B M _ 1 : Σ I * t > or C B M _ 2 : Σ I * t > . An alarm is issued if the accumulated current
values exceed any of these thresholds.
Blocking circuit breaker
monitoring
When protection testing is carried out, the circuit breaker monitoring functions should be
blocked, so that testing does not corrupt monitoring results. CBM protection functions
are blocked if one of the following conditions is met:
Circuit breaker monitoring functions are blocked by parameters.

Circuit breaker monitoring functions are blocked by an appropriately configured
binary signal input.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM_1: Enabled CBM_1: Blocked

[ 044 130 ] [ 044 199 ]
&
CBM_1: Blocking
EXT
[ 044 128 ]
CBM_1: Blocking
USER
[ 022 150 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
CBM_2: Enabled CBM_2: Blocked

[ 007 113 ] [ 007 116 ]
&
CBM_2: Blocking
EXT
[ 007 112 ]
CBM_2: Blocking
USER
[ 007 171 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
68Z6048A_UK
3-132 Blocking circuit breaker monitoring functions
3-180 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)
Limit value monitoring consists of the following sections:
Monitoring of measured variables subject to data acquisition in the analog measured

data input.
Monitoring of the maximum currents in transformer ends a and b.
Monitoring the residual current.
Voltage monitoring.
3.31.1 Monitoring of Measured Variables in the Measured Data Input
Disabling or enabling limit

value monitoring
The limit value monitoring of measured variables, subject to data acquisition in the
analog measured data input, can be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.
Monitoring the linearized

measured DC values
Direct current, linearized by analog measured data input, is monitored by two stages to
determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the
thresholds a signal is issued once a set time period has elapsed.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-181

3 Operation
(continued)
LIMIT: General
Enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
0
1 LIMIT: Enabled
& [ 040 074 ]
0: No
1: Yes
LIMIT: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
LIMIT: Starting
1 IDC,lin>
[ 040 180 ]
0: No
1: Yes
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IDC,lin> tIDC,lin>
MAIN: [ 014 110 ] [ 014 112 ]
Protection
active
306 001 LIMIT:
MESSE: Curr. tIDC,lin>
IDC,lin. p.u. Elapsed
[ 004 136 ] [ 040 182 ]
LIMIT: Starting
IDC,lin>>
Setting LIMIT: Enable [ 040 181 ]
SGx
Group 1 072 240
LIMIT: IDC,lin>> LIMIT:
Group 2 073 240 tIDC,lin>>
Group 3 074 240 [ 014 111 ] [ 014 113 ]
Group 4 075 240
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>>
Elapsed
[ 040 183 ]
LIMIT: Starting
IDC,lin<
[ 040 184 ]
LIMIT: IDC,lin< LIMIT: tIDC,lin<

[ 014 114 ] [ 014 116 ]
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<
Elapsed
[ 040 186 ]
LIMIT: Starting
IDC,lin<<
[ 040 185 ]
LIMIT: IDC,lin<< LIMIT:

tIDC,lin<<
[ 014 115 ] [ 014 117 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<<
Elapsed
[ 040 187 ]
68Z6054A_UK
3-133 Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
3-182 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the measured

temperature value
The temperature that is measured by the P638 using a resistance thermometer is
monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If it
exceeds or falls below the thresholds, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed.
3-134 Monitoring the measured temperature value
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-183

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31.2 Limit Value Monitoring of Transformer Ends a and b Currents
The device features limit value monitoring functions to monitor current flow in
transformer ends a and b.
Current monitoring
The maximum current is monitored with two stages to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. If the thresholds are exceeded, a signal is issued after a set time period has
elapsed.
LIMIT: Enabled
[ 040 074 ] LIMIT: Iz> LIMIT: tIz>
C SGx SGx
MAIN: Protection [ * ] [ * ]
active
306 001
IA,z
t 0 LIMIT: tIz>
Imax Elapsed
[ * ]
IC,z
LIMIT: Iz>> LIMIT: tIz>>

C SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 LIMIT: tIz>>
Elapsed
[ * ]
z: End a z: End b
LIMIT: tIz> 040 147 040 122

Elapsed
LIMIT: tIz>> 040 148 040 151

Elapsed
Setting LIMIT: Ia> LIMIT: Ia>> LIMIT: tIa> LIMIT: tIa>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 221 072 233 072 224 072 225
Group 2 073 221 073 233 073 224 073 225
Group 3 074 221 074 233 074 224 074 225
Group 4 075 221 075 233 075 224 075 225
Setting LIMIT: Iref> LIMIT: Iref>> LIMIT: tIref> LIMIT: tIref>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 229 072 230 072 231 072 232
Group 2 073 229 073 230 073 231 073 232
Group 3 074 229 074 230 074 231 074 232
Group 4 075 229 075 230 075 231 075 232
68Z6055A_UK
3-135 Current monitoring of transformer ends a and b
3-184 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31.3 Limit Value Monitoring, Residual Current System
Current monitoring
The residual current is monitored with two stages to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. If any of the thresholds are exceeded a signal is issued after a set time
period has elapsed.
LIMIT: IN> LIMIT: tIN>

LIMIT: Enabled C SGx SGx
[ 040 074 ] [ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
t 0 LIMIT: tIN>
IN Elapsed
[ 040 153 ]
LIMIT: IN>> LIMIT: tIN>>

C SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 LIMIT: tIN>>
Elapsed
[ 040 154 ]
Setting LIMIT: IN> LIMIT: IN>> LIMIT: tIN> LIMIT: tIN>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 234 072 236 072 235 072 237
Group 2 073 234 073 236 073 235 073 237
Group 3 074 234 074 236 074 235 074 237
Group 4 075 234 075 236 075 235 075 237
68Z6056A_UK
3-136 Limit value monitoring of residual current
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-185

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31.4 Limit Value Monitoring, Voltage
The device checks the voltage to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds.
In addition the device features a frequency monitoring function.
Voltage magnitude
monitoring
The voltage is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls below
set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds a signal is issued once a set
time period has elapsed.
LIMIT: V> LIMIT: tV>

[ 040 074 ] [ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
t 0 LIMIT: tV>
V Elapsed
[ 040 140 ]
LIMIT: tV> & tV<

Elapsed
LIMIT: V< LIMIT: tV< [ 040 144 ]
C SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 LIMIT: tV<
Elapsed
[ 040 142 ]
LIMIT: V>> LIMIT: tV>>

C SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 LIMIT: tV>>
Elapsed
[ 040 141 ]
LIMIT: tV>>&tV<<
Elapsed
LIMIT: V<< LIMIT: tV<< [ 040 145 ]
C SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 LIMIT: tV<<
Elapsed
[ 040 143 ]
Setting LIMIT: V> LIMIT: V< LIMIT: V>> LIMIT: V<<

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 247 072 251 072 248 072 252
Group 2 073 247 073 251 073 248 073 252
Group 3 074 247 074 251 074 248 074 252
Group 4 075 247 075 251 075 248 075 252
Setting LIMIT: tV> LIMIT: tV< LIMIT: tV>> LIMIT: tV<<

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 249 072 253 072 250 072 254
Group 2 073 249 073 253 073 250 073 254
Group 3 074 249 074 253 074 250 074 254
Group 4 075 249 075 253 075 250 075 254
68Z6057A_UK
3-137 Limit value monitoring of the voltage magnitude
3-186 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
The voltage frequency is monitored with two stages to detect whether it exceeds or falls
below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds a signal is issued once a
set time period has elapsed.
LIMIT: f> LIMIT: tf>

[ 040 074 ] [ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
t 0 LIMIT: tf>
MAIN: Frequency f Elapsed
[ 004 040 ] [ 040 196 ]
LIMIT: f>> LIMIT: tf>>

C SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 LIMIT: tf>>
Elapsed
[ 040 197 ]
LIMIT: f< LIMIT: tf<

C SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 LIMIT: tf<
Elapsed
[ 040 198 ]
LIMIT: f<< LIMIT: tf<<

C SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 LIMIT: tf<<
Elapsed
[ 040 199 ]
Setting LIMIT: f> LIMIT: f>> LIMIT: f< LIMIT: f<<

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 211 072 212 072 215 072 216
Group 2 073 211 073 212 073 215 073 216
Group 3 074 211 074 212 074 215 074 216
Group 4 075 211 075 212 075 215 075 216
Setting LIMIT: tf> LIMIT: tf>> LIMIT: tf< LIMIT: tf<<

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 213 072 214 072 217 072 218
Group 2 073 213 073 214 073 217 073 218
Group 3 074 213 074 214 074 217 074 218
Group 4 075 213 075 214 075 217 075 218
68Z6058A_UK
3-138 Frequency monitoring
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-187

3 Operation
(continued)
3.32 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC)
Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within
a framework of Boolean equations.
Binary signals in the P638 may be linked by logical 'OR' or 'AND' operations or by
additional NOT operations by setting L O G IC : F c t. As s i g n m . O u tp . n , where n = 1
to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets.
The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to

the signals generated by the P638, initial conditions for governing the equations can be
set using setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or through the serial
interfaces.
Logical operations can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals L O G IC : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 16) have an updating
function, whereas the input signals L O G IC : Se t n EXT (n = 1 to 8) are latched.
The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured for
L O G IC : Se t n EXT if the corresponding reset input L O G IC : R e s e t n EXT ) has
been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions is
configured, then this is interpreted as ‘Logic externally set’. If the input signals of the two
binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of ‘1’),
then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional type test to
conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control application. In particular,
it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by
setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and
when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
3-188 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-140 Control of logic operations using setting parameters or stored input signals
The L O G I C : T r i g g e r n signal is a ‘triggering function’ that causes a 100 ms pulse to

be issued.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-189

3 Operation
(continued)
3-141 Setting options for programmable logic (output 1 shown)
3-190 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
The output signal of one equation can be processed as the input signal for another
higher-order equation, and this makes it possible to have a sequence of interlinked
Boolean equations. The equations are processed according to their order sequence.
It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is provided by the
highest-order equation.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer
elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a
freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In
the Minimum Dwell operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect.
Figures 3-142 to 3-146 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage
operating modes.
Note: If the device is switched to "offline" the equations are not processed and all
outputs are set to the '0' logic level.
3-142 Operating mode 1: Pickup & reset delay
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-191

3 Operation
(continued)
3-143 Operating mode 2: Pulse delayed pickup
3-144 Operating mode 3: Pickup & reset delay, re-triggerable
3-192 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

3 Operation
(continued)
3-145 Operating mode 4: Delayed pulse, re-triggerable
3-146 Operating mode 5: Minimum dwell
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input

signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the
same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were
triggered.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 3-193

3 Operation
(continued)
3-147 Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations
3-194 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

4 Design
4 Design
The P638 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations of
modules.
The P638 – like all other devices in the Easergy MiCOM 30 family – is equipped with the
standard user interface (HMI). The user interface is covered with a tough film so that the
specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the essential control
and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a total of 17 LED indicators is also
incorporated. The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in plain text on a
label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged cover at
the bottom of the user interface.
4.1 Designs (Case Types)
The P638 is available in either a surface-mounted or a flush-mounted case in

84TE width.
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The threaded
terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the front of the device
after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see Figure 4-1, c) and removing
the user interface (HMI). The user interface (HMI) can then be secured by inserting the
tabs in the slots in the left side wall (see Figure 4-1, d). The flush-mounted case is
connected at the back of the case.
The user interface (HMI) is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting

cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the user interface by inserting it in the
slots provided on the left.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
In units for pin terminal connection, the threaded terminal block for current transformer
connection is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit current transformers
before loosening the threaded terminals.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 4-1

4 Design
(continued)
4-1 Surface-mounted case, removal of user interface (HMI), illustrated here for a device with graphic display in a 84TE case
4-2 P638/EN M/Da2 // AFSV.12.10183 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

4 Design
(continued)
4.2 Dimensional Drawings
4.2.1 Surface-Mounted Case
Aus-Kommando Mi COM P6 3 8
Warnung
Block./ Stör ung Pa ra me te r
Betr ieb
Änderungsmod
.
147,5
177,5
184,5
434,8 257,1
464,0
481,6
4-2 Dimensional drawing for the surface-mounted 84TE case
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 4-3

4 Design
(continued)
4.2.2 Flush-Mounted Case
Aus- Kommando
War nung
Mi COM P6 3 8
Block /S
. törung Pa r ame te r
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod.
177,5
434,8 227,9
253,6
284,9
259,0
25,9
159,0
168,0
5,0
5,0
410,0
4-3 Flush-mounted 84TE case with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets)
Note: The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown in next
drawing) is used for the flush-mounted case.
4-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

4 Design
(continued)
Aus- Kommando
War nung
Mi COM P6 3 8
Block./ Störung Pa r ame te r
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod
.
101,6
177,5
434,8 227,9
253,6
464,0
481,6
6,4
101,6
186,5
445,9
464,0
4-4 Flush-mounted 84TE case with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Note: The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown in this
drawing) is used for the flush-mounted case.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 4-5

4 Design
(continued)
4.3 Modules
The P638 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table gives an
overview of the modules relevant for the P638
(*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, {: optional, z: standard
equipment, : depending on order).
Type Index Description Width

{
A 0336 426 J ff Communication module 1 (wire connection) 4T
A 9650 107 A ff Communication module 1 (glass fiber, ST connector) 4T {
A 0336 428 G ff Communication module 1 (plastic fiber) 4T {
{
A 9650 356 A ff Communication module 2 (wire connection) 4T
A 9650 354 A ff Communication module 2 (glass fiber, ST connector) 4T {
A 9650 355 A ff Communication module 2 (plastic fiber) 4T {
A 9650 353 A ff Communication module (IRIG-B only) 4T {
A 9651 427 E ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, 4T {
SC connector and RJ45 wire)
A 9651 471 E ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, 4T {
ST connector and RJ45 wire)
B 0336 188 C ff * Bus module (digital) z
B 0336 421 B ff * Bus module (analog) z
L 9651 473 B ff * Local control module (Europ.) z
P 9651 472 B ff Processor module 4T z
T 9650 333 C ff Transformer module 5 x I, 1 x V (pin connection) 8T
T 9650 334 B ff Transformer module 5 x I, 1 x V (ring connection) 8T
V 0337 437 E ff Power supply module 24 V DC 4T
V 9651 300 A ff Power supply module 24 V DC, 4T

Switching threshold 73 V



V 0337 191 M ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 4T

100 to 230 V AC
V 9651 301 A ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 4T

100 to 230 V AC,

100 to 230 V AC,

100 to 230 V AC,
1 Required for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

2 Required for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, or DNP 3.0 protocols
4-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
4 Design
(continued)
Type Index Description Width

100 to 230 V AC,
X 0336 971 D ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays), 4T {
Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V)
X 9651 306 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays), 4T {
X 0336 973 D ff Binary I/O module (6 output relays) 4T {
X 9650 341 B ff Binary I/O module (6 output relays, 4 of these with 4T {

Triac)
X 9651 493 B ff Binary module (4 high-power contacts) 4T {
Y 0337 406 A ff Analog I/O module, 4T {

Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V)
Y 9651 307 A ff Analog I/O module, Switching threshold 73 V 4T {
The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal blocks in
the P638 are shown in the location figures and terminal connection diagrams at the end
of Chapter 5.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 4-7

4-8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
5 Installation and Connection
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
The instructions given in the "Protective and Operational Grounding" section should be
noted. In particular, check that the protective ground connection is secured with a tooth
lock washer, as per the diagram "Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal".
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the protective
grounding should be checked again.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the
same time. (The selection for I E C : E t h e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.)
5.1 Unpacking and Packing
All P638 units are packaged separately in their own cartons and shipped inside outer
packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking units, and do not use
force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting documents and the type
identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton.
The design revision level of each module included in the unit when shipped can be
determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list should be carefully
saved.
After unpacking each unit, inspect it visually to make sure it is in proper mechanical
condition.
If the P638 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the
original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to
DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m.
5-1 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
5.2 Checking the Nominal Data and the Design Version
The nominal data and design type of the P638 can be determined by checking the type
identification label (see Figure 5-1). One rating label is located under the hinged cover
at the top of the user interface (HMI). Another copy of the type identification label is
affixed to the outside of the P638 packaging.
P638 P638-XXXXXXX-30x-40x-61x Diagram P638.40x mm.yy

2
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V Inom = 1 / 5 A Iin,nom = 1/ 5 A fnom = 16 /3-60 Hz
VA,nom = Vin,nom = 24 ... 250 V CE

DC
Specification F 6.xxxxxx.y
EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6
5-1 type identification label
The P638 design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the
order number is given in Chapter 14 of this manual.
5-2 P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
5.3 Location Requirements
The P638 is designed to conform to DIN 57 435 Part 303. Therefore it is important when
choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the operating conditions
as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several important conditions are
listed below.
Climatic conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]
Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P638.
Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt content.
Mechanical conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Earthquake resistance: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 5 m/s2,

3 x 1 cycle
Electrical conditions for

auxiliary voltage for the
power supply
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Electromagnetic conditions
Appropriate measures taken in substations must correspond to the best of modern
practices.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 5-3

(continued)
5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in
Chapter 4. When the P638 is surface-mounted on a panel, the leads to the P638 are
normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be at the rear
an opening can be provided above and below the surface-mounted case, as shown in
Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2 shows only the lower opening. The same considerations also
apply to the upper opening.
5-2 Opening for running the wiring to the 84TE surface-mounted case (dimensions in mm)
5-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Flush-mounted cases are designed to be flush-mounted in control panels.

The dimensions and mounting dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P638 is
mounted in a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the
degree of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51).
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5 3, Protective and

Operational Grounding3.
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:

The P638 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or –
for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is
used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity class of the
shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of the shock
resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
Dimensions of the panel cut-outs:

Dimensional drawings of the panel cut-outs for the P638 can be found in section
“Dimensional Drawings“ in chapter 4.
If the units are to be installed in accordance with flush-mount method 1 (without the
angle brackets and frame), follow the steps described below.
Before the P638 can be installed in the control panel, the user interface (HMI) must be
removed. The procedure is as follows:
Remove the hinged covers at the top and bottom of the user interface. (Open the
hinged covers by flipping them up or down 180°. Hold them in the middle and bend
them slightly. The side mountings of the covers can then be disengaged.)
Remove the M3 screws (see Figure 5-3).
Remove the user interface.

cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Then remove the lower M4 screws and loosen the upper M4 screws (see Figure 5-3).
Insert the P638 into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper M4 screws fit into
the corresponding slots. Then tighten all the M4 screws. After this, replace the user
interface (HMI).
Note: If the front panel thickness is ≥ 2 mm, longer M3 and M4 bolts must be used.
Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 5-5

(continued)
For panels with a

thickness > 2 mm,
Merely loosen the replace the M3 and
upper screws and M4 bolts with the
hook device on side enclosed longer
plates to mount. bolts
3 mm
M4
M3
Remove the lower

screws completely
prior to mounting.
12Y6182 B_EN
5-3 Mounting the 84TE case in a control panel, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame)
The P638 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or – for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount
method 2 (with angle brackets and frame see figure 5-5) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5
5-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
When installing units into a panel in accordance with flush-mount method 2, proceed as
follows:
Remove the screws as shown in Figure 5-4, c and mount the enclosed angle
brackets using these same screws.
Slide the unit into the panel opening from the front.
Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws (see
Figure 5-5).
Assemble the cover frame and snap it onto the mounting bolts.
5-4 Mounting the angle brackets
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 5-7

(continued)
Angle brackets
M6
B6
6.4
M6 x 15
Height: 204 mm
Frame for the
80 mm
W idt h: 2 n ted cas e
s h-m o u
40T E flu
12Y6183 B_EN
5-5 Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
Example for a device in a 40TE case.
The frame width for a 84TE case is 486 mm
The device has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is
used for the flush-mounted cases.
5-8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
The 84TE flush-mounted cases – with angle brackets mounted – are also suitable for
installation in enclosures or cubicles equipped with a 19" mounting rack.
5-6 Installing the P638 in a cabinet with a 19" mounting rack
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 5-9

(continued)
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding
The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding

requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the appropriate bolt and nut
as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the
rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-sectional area of this ground
conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum conductor
cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-sectional area of this ground
conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section
of 1.5 mm2 is required.
The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, i.e., as short as

possible.
19Y5220A_EN
5-7 Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal
The protective ground conductor must always be connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the
safeguard provided by the design.
The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol:
5-10 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
5.6 Connection
The P638 must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram
indicated on the type identification label. The terminal connection diagram is included in
the supporting documents supplied with the device. Connection diagrams relevant for
the P638 can be found at the end of this chapter.
Copper leads having a 2.5 mm2 cross-section are generally suitable as the connecting
leads between the current transformers and the P638. To reduce CT knee-point voltage
requirements, it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a greater
cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on the
P638. Copper leads having a 1.5 mm2 cross section are adequate for connecting the
binary signal inputs, the signaling and triggering circuits, and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and
output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to a
common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the
common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Power supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P638 power supply, it must be ensured
that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the nominal value
of the auxiliary system voltage.
Current-measuring inputs
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the secondary
nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.
Connecting the measuring

circuits
The system transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard schematic
diagram shown in Figure 5-8.
It is essential that the CT grounding configuration shown in the diagram be followed. If

the CT or VT connection is reversed, this can be taken into account when making
settings (see Chapter 7).
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 5-11

(continued)
A
C
IA
IC
IN
Operation busbar
Return busbar
68Z50APA _UK
5-8 Standard schematic connection diagram for the P638
5-12 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Connecting a resistance
thermometer
If the analogue I/O module Y is fitted, a resistance thermometer can be connected.
This analogue I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance
thermometer. The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see
Figure 5-9). No supply conductor compensation is required in this case.
P638
5-9 Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method
Connecting binary inputs

and output relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable.
The terminal connection diagrams give a polarity for connection of the binary signal
inputs. However, this is only a recommendation. Connection to binary inputs can be
made as desired.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 5-13

(continued)
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B interface.
An IRIG-B-interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature. It is

connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance of
50 Ω must be used as the connecting cable.
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces
PC interface
The PC interface is provided in order to operate the unit from a personal computer (PC).
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently, the female

connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is
required per VDE 0106 Part 101.
Communication interfaces
Communication interfaces are provided for permanent connection of the unit to a control
system for substations or to a central substation unit. Depending on the type,
communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic
connector or a RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. Connection to channel 2
is always by way of an RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires
special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage
for the unit is shut off.
5-14 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
A communication link consisting of a communication master and several slaves can be

established using the RS 485 interface. The communication master can be a control
station, for example. The devices connected to the communication master, such as the
P638, are the communication slaves.
The RS 485 interface available on the P638 was designed so that data transfer in a full
duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between devices.
However, communication through the RS 485 interface is always in the half-duplex mode
of operation. To connect the RS 485 communication interface the following must be
observed:
Always use twisted-pair shielded cables only, the kind used for telecommunications
systems.
At least one symmetrically twisted core pair will be required.
Strip cable cores and cable shield right at the connection point and connect properly
in accordance with specifications.
Ground all shields at both ends (large-area grounding).
Ground free (unshielded) cores at one end only.
As another option, a 2-wire or 4-wire connection is also possible. For the 4-wire
connection, a cable with two symmetrically twisted core pairs is required. A 2-wire data
link is shown in Figure 5-10, and a 4-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-11 as an
example for channel 2 on the communication module. If channel 1 of the communication
module is designed as an RS 485 interface, then the same arrangement would apply.
2-wire connection:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in all units that have a full-duplex interface as
part of their electrical system – like the P638, for example. In the two units that form the
physical ends of the line, the pair of leads must be terminated by a 200-to-220 Ω resistor.
With the P638, as with most Schneider Electric units, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into
the RS 485 interface and can be connected by a wire jumper. An external resistor is
therefore not necessary.
4-wire connection:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the unit that forms one physical end of the
line. The receivers of the slaves that have a full-duplex interface as part of their
electrical system (like the P638, for example) are connected to the transmitter of the
communication master, and the transmitters of the slaves are connected to the receiver
of the master. Units that only have a half-duplex interface are connected to the
transmitter of the communication master. In the last physical participant (master or
slave) of the communication link, the transmitter and receiver must each be terminated
by a 200-to-220 Ω resistor. With the P638, as with most Schneider Electric units, a
220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface and can be connected by a wire
jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary. The second resistor must be
connected externally to the device (resistor order number see Chapter 13).
P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 5-15

(continued)
P139
P139
5-10 2-wire connection
5-16 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
P139
P139
5-11 4-wire connection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 5-17

(continued)
5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A T Y X X X X X V
CH1 5I 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 4I
CH2 1U 8O 8O 8O 8O 6O 8O
alt. alt.
A X
ETH
CH2 4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5-12 P638 in a 84TE case with pin-terminal connection (P638-403)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A T Y X X X X X V
CH1 5I 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 4I
CH2 1U 8O 8O 8O 8O 6O 8O
alt. alt.
A X
ETH
CH2 4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5-13 P638 in a 84TE case with ring-terminal connection (P638-404)
5-18 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Transformer Type T Power supply Type V Binary Type X Analog Type Y

module 5J / 1V module 4I / 8O module 6I / 8O module 4I
Ring Pin Voltage measuring Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin
X041 X041 inputs X_ 1 X_ 1 Output relays X_1 X_ 1 Output relays X_ 1 X_1 Measuring outputs
1 1 1 1 1 1
13 1 V T5 2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01
16 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 valid
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 4 4 U
Current measuring 6 6 K_02 6 6 K_02 5 5
inputs 7 7 7 7
#
X042 6 6
8 8 8 8 0 ..20 mA U_08
1 1 1IA T11 9 9 K_03 9 9 K_03 7 7
2 2 8 8 K_02
3 3 1IC T13 X_ 2 X_ 2 9 9 valid
4 4 10 1 10 1
11 2 K_04 11 2 K_04 X_ 2
5 5 IN T4 12 3 K_05 12 3 K_05 10 1
U
6 6 13 4 K_06 13 4 K_06 11 2
14 5 K_07 14 5 K_07 #
12 3
15 6 15 6 0 ..20 mA U_09
X052 16 7 K_08 16 7 K_08
17 8 17 8
9 1 2IA T21 Signal and
10 2 Signal inputs Signal inputs measuring inputs
11 3 2IC T23 18 9 Vin 18 9
V in 13 4
Vin U_01
12 4 U_01 U_01 14 5
X_ 3 X_ 3 15 6
Vin U_02
19 1 19 1 16 7
20 2 20 2 17 8
Vin V in Vin U_03
21 3 U_02 21 3 U_02
22 4 22 4 18 9
Vin V in Vin U_04
U_03 U_03
23 5 23 5 X_ 3
Vin V in
24 6 U_04 24 6 U_04 19 1
25 7 20 2
U
V in U_05
Power supply U_05 21 3 0..20 mA
#
25 7 + Vaux 26 8
V in
22 4 U
26 8 - U100 27 9 U_06 23 5 PT100
U_06
27 9 PE 24 6 #
Communication Type A Communication Type A Binary Type X Binary Type X

module CH1 / CH2 module ETH / CH2 module module 4H
6O
Per order Per order
Ring Pin Ring Pin
Channel 1 IEC 61850 X_1 X_1 High-break
X_ 1 X_ 1 Output relays
optical fiber link optical fiber link ST 1 1 1 1 contacts
X7 X7 2 2
2 2 K_01
1 RX X/Y U17 3 3
X//Y U17 3 3
4 4
X8
4 4 K_01
X8 5 5 5 5 +
1 TX X/Y U18 6 6
X//Y U18 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 K_02 8 8
or wire link or 9 9
9 9
X9 optical fiber link SC
X// Y X13
1
2 D2[ R] RX
U26 X_ 2 X_2
3 10 1 1) 10 1
U19 TX X/Y
4 11 2
11 2 K_02
5 D1[ T] 12 3 12 3 +
13 4 1) 13 4
RS 485 14 5 K_03 14 5
15 6
and wire link 15 6
16 7 16 7
Channel 2 X12
17 8 17 8
1
wire link only X//Y U25 18 9 18 9
X10 RJ45
X// Y
1 X_ 3 X_3
2 D2[ R] 19 1 1) 19 1 K_03
COMM2
3
U20 20 2 K_04 20 2 +
4
wire link 21 3
21 3
5 D1[ T] 22 4 1) 22 4
X10
X//Y 23 5 K_05 23 5
1
RS 485 24 6 24 6
2 D2[ R]
25 7 25 7
3
IRIG-B U20 26 8 K_06 26 8 K_04
4
time synchronization D1[ T] 27 9 27 9 +
5
X11
1 # U21 RS 485
#
5-14 P638 connection diagrams

Notes: ‘_’ is a placeholder for the slot. See also section 5.5 for the Protective and Operational Grounding.
1)
The binary (I/O) module X (6xO) is optionally available with 4 static outputs, parallel to the make contacts K_02.2, K_03.1,
K_04, K_05.
Also please observe section 'Protective grounding conductor terminal / Case grounding / 'Protective ground'!
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 5-19

5-20 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
6 User Interface (HMI)

All data required for operation of the protection device is entered from the front panel
user interface (HMI), and the data important for system management is read out there as
well. The following tasks can be handled from the HMI:
Readout and modification of settings

Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals
Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the
power system
Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and
commissioning
Control through the PC interface is also possible. This requires a suitable PC and
operating program (MiCOM S1).
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-1

(continued)
6.1 Display and Keypad
Control and display

elements
The front panel user interface (HMI) consists of an LCD display containing 4 x 20
alphanumeric characters.
Then there are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the LCD
and there are six additional freely configurable function keys on the right side of the LCD.
Furthermore the HMI is provided with 17 LED indicators, aligned vertically, and situated
on the left side of the LCD and there are six additional LED indicators situated on the
right side of the six freely configurable function keys.
6-1 View of the front panel user interface (HMI) and layout of the LED indicators
6-2 P638/DE M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 DE /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Display levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels.
At the 'Panel level', data such as measured operating values are displayed in panels that
provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the
panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals, measured
variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event
recording from either the panel level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the
READ key .
6-2 Display Panels and menu tree
Display Panels
The P638 can display 'Measured Value Panels' which are selected automatically by the
device according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The system
condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the Operation Panel and
the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always available.
P638/DE M/Ca2 // AFSV.12.10182 DE /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-3

(continued)
Menu tree and data points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a
menu tree. As the user navigates through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LCD
display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user.
The data points are accessed at the lowest level of a menu tree branch. They are
displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically coded form, as selected
by the user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit
of measurement are displayed in the line below.
List data points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points
generally have more than one value element associated with them. This category
includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list
data point is selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD, indicating
that there is another level below the displayed level. The individual value elements of a
list data point are found at the lower level. In the case of a list setting, the individual
value elements are linked by operators such as ‘OR’.
Keys
‘Up’ and ‘Down’ Keys
G
/
Panel Level:
The ‘up’/‘down’ keys switch between the Measured Value Panels.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a
vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys in this mode to change
the setting value.
(‘Up’ key: the next higher value is selected.
‘Down’ key: the next lower value is selected.)
With list settings, press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ key to change the logic operator of the
value element.
‘Left’ and ‘Right’ Keys /

Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal
direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys are pressed, the cursor
positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one digit to the
right or left.
(‘Left’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
‘Right’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.)
In the case of a list setting, press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the list
of items available for selection.
6-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
ENTER Key
G
Panel Level:
Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the ENTER key a second time
to accept the changes as entered and exit the input mode. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.
CLEAR Key C
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data.
The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode:
Press the CLEAR key to reject the changes entered and exit the input mode.
READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level
or from any other point in the menu tree.
Function Keys F1 to F6
By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered. More details on
assigning functions to function keys can be found in section "Configurable Function
Keys (Function Group F_KEY)" in Chapter 3. More details on handling function keys
can be found in this Chapter, in section 6.4 "Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx
(general)".
The following tables, which show the individual control steps, specify the displays that
can be changed by pressing specific keys. A small black square to the right of the
ENTER key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on. The examples
shown here do not necessarily apply to the device type described in this manual; they
merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-5

(continued)
6.2 Changing Between Display Levels
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.
Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
0 From the menu tree level, the user can go to

Going from the menu tree
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
level to the Panel level Protection Enabled
the Panel level from any position within the No (=off)
menu tree.
1 First press the ‘up’ key and hold it down C

G
+ Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
while pressing the CLEAR key. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Note:
It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and
release it last in order to avoid unintentional
resetting of stored data.
0 Example of a Measured Value Panel.

Going from the Panel level to Voltage A-B prim.
the menu tree level 20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel

G
XYYY
level to the menu tree level.
After the set "hold" time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: 'Set/Conf/HMI'), the display
will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has been
configured.
6-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
6.3 Illumination of the Display
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set
"hold" time has elapsed (‘Backlight time’ setting in the menu tree at ‘Set/Conf/HMI’). The
backlight is turned on again by pressing one of the control keys. In this case, the control
action that is normally triggered by the key will not be executed. Reactivation of the
backlight is also possible using a binary input.
If continuous illumination is desired, the user can set the ‘Backlight time’ function to
‘blocked’.
6.4 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)
If they have not been configured as control keys, function keys F1 to Fx are enabled only
after the password for function keys has been entered.
It is assumed for the remainder of this section that the function key F1 is enabled only
after the password (as assigned at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d F u n c t . K e y 1 ) has been
entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the
time period set at F _ K E Y : F c n K e y R e t u r n T i m e . Thereafter, the function key
is disabled until the password is entered again.
For this example it is further assumed that the password for the function keys is the
factory-set password. If the user has changed the password (see the chapter entitled
"Changing the Password"), the following description will apply accordingly.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-7

(continued)

Action
0 Example of a display. Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
1 Function key F1 is pressed. Eight asterisks F1
(*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to

enter the password. ********
2a Press the following keys in sequence:

G
'Left'
G
*
'Down' G
G
*
'Right' GG
'Up’ G
The display will change as shown in the

G
column on the right.

*
Now press the ENTER key. Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
If the correct password has been entered, the Voltage B-C prim.
active display will re-appear. 20.6 kV
Function keys F1 to Fx are active only during
the set return time for function keys.
If an invalid password has been entered, the
display shown above in Step 1 will appear.
2b This control step can be cancelled at any C Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
time by pressing the CLEAR key before the Voltage B-C prim.
ENTER key is pressed. 20.6 kV
3 Press F1 again. The function configured to F1 Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
this function key is carried out. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
4 When function keys are pressed during the Fx M+T/C+Test/HMI

Setting Change enabl
return time period, then the configured function Yes
is carried out directly, e.g. without again
checking for the password.
6-8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
6.5 Control at the Panel Level
The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be
selected in the menu tree under Set/Conf/HMI. The user can select different sets of
measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel,
and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The menu for the Operation Panel is always present. The remarks in "Setting a List
Setting" apply to this selection. If the M A I N : D i s a b l e d setting has been selected for
a given panel, then that panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding
Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation
exists. Should the device detect a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains
active until the measured fault values are reset, by pressing the CLEAR key, for
example.

Action
0 Up to six selected measured values can be Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
displayed simultaneously on the Panel. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
1 If more than two measured values have

G
Voltage C-A prim.
or 20.8 kV
been selected, they can be viewed one page at Current A prim.
a time by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys. The 415 A
device will also show the next page of the
Measured Value Panel after the set Panel
Hold-Time (setting in menu tree:
"Set/Conf/HMI") has elapsed.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-9

(continued)
6.6 Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.6.1 Navigation of the Menu Tree
Folders and function

groups
All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control requirements.
The menu tree begins with the device type at the top, then branches out below into the
three main folders entitled ‘Settings’, ‘Measurements + Tests’ and ‘Fault + Event
Records’, which form the first folder level. Up to two further folder levels follow so that
the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three
folder levels.
At the bottom of each branch of folders, below the folder levels, are the various function
groups in which the individual data points (settings) are combined.
PX yyy
Unit
type
PX yyy PX yyy PX yyy

Folder Settings Measurements & Tests Fault & Event Records
level 1
Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
level 2
Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
level 3
Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
points 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
6-3 Basic menu tree structure
6-10 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
6.6.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the user interface (HMI) can be switched between address mode and
plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals, and measured
values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the settings,
signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions.
In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is
displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in
plain text mode only.

Action
0 In this example, the user switches from text Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

Protection enabled
mode to address mode. No (=off)
1 To switch from address mode to plain text C

+
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key and or 0
either the ‘left’ key or the ‘right’ key
simultaneously. This may be done at any point C
+
in the menu tree.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-11

(continued)
6.6.3 Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated
value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This
safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.

Global change-enabling
function
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the ‘Setting Change Enabl’
parameter to ‘Yes’ (menu tree: ‘M&T/CtrlTest/HMI’).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all
further changes – with the exception of specially protected control actions (see
section entitled ‘Password-Protected Control Actions’) – are enabled without entering
the password.
Selective change-enabling
function
Password input prior to any setting change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The following example is based on the
factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see section
entitled 'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply analogously.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘M&T/C&Test/HMI’, select M+T/C+Test/HMI

the ‘Setting Change Enabl’ parameter. No
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*)

G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
appear in the fourth line of the display. No
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence:

G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
‘left’
G
No
*
‘right’ G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
G
No
*
‘up’ G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
G
No
*
‘down’ G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
The display will change as shown in the Setting Change enabl
G
column on the right. No

*
6-12 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)

Action
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator
G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Setting Change enabl
indicates that the setting can now be changed No
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.
If an invalid password has been entered, the

display shown in Step 1 appears.
3 Change the setting to ‘Yes’.

G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
G
Yes
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED
G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for Yes
further setting changes.
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling
function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change
only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is
preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been
activated.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-13

(continued)
Automatic return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining
activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu
tree ‘Set/Conf/HMI’) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically
deactivated, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the
current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is
pressed.
Forced return
The return described above can be forced from the user interface (HMI) by first pressing
the ‘up’ key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
Note: It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed.
For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu tree:
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN, 'Protection Enabled'). Such settings include the configuration
settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
6-14 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
6.6.4 Changing Settings
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can
be entered.

Action
0 Example of a display. M+T/C+Test/HMI

In this example, the change-enabling function Yes
is activated and the protective function is
disabled, if necessary.
1 Select the desired setting by pressing the

G
Set/Conf/HMI
Auto Return Time
keys.
G
50000 s
2 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator
G
Set/Conf/HMI
Auto Return Time
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit 50000 s
of the value is highlighted by a cursor
(underlined).
3 Press the ‘left’ or ’right’ keys to move the

G
Set/Conf/HMI
Auto Return Time
cursor to the left or right.
G
50000 s
4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor

G
Set/Conf/HMI
Auto Return Time
by pressing the ‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In the
G
50010 s
meantime the device will continue to operate
with the old value.

G
Set/Conf/HMI
Auto Return Time
labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device 50010 s
will now operate with the new value. Press the
keys to select another setting for a value
change.
6 If you wish to reject the new setting while C Set/Conf/HMI

Auto Return Time
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled 50000 s
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator will go out and the device will
continue to operate with the old value. A
further setting can be selected for a value
change by pressing the keys.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-15

(continued)
6.6.5 Setting a List Setting
Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to
perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements that will be
displayed on Measured Value Panels. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an
‘OR’ operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available
in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals
and binary input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user
requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a
setting instead of assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used
here as an illustration.

Action
0 Select a list setting (in this example, the Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

Main-Trip 'OR' gate
parameter 'Main-Trip 'OR' gate' at
‘Set/Func/Glob/ MAIN’ in the menu tree). The
down arrow (È) indicates that a list setting has
been selected.
1 Press the ‘down’ key.

G
The first function and Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

Main-Trip 'OR' gate
the first selected signal will appear in the third
G
#01 DIST
and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol Trip signal Z1/t1
‘#01’ in the display indicates the first item of the
selection. If 'MAIN: Disabled’ appears for the
first item, then this means that no function
assignment has been made yet.
2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions

G
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
by pressing the ‘right’ and ’left’ keys. Main-Trip 'OR' gate
G
OR #02 DIST
Trip signal Z2/t2L
Once the end of the list is reached, the display Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

shown on the right will appear. Main-Trip 'OR' gate
#05 MAIN
?????
3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the

G
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
Main-Trip 'OR' gate
list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE #02 DIST
will light up. Trip signal Z2/t2L
4 Scroll through the assignable functions by

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
pressing the ‘right’ and ‘left’ keys in the input
G
#02 DIST
mode. Trip zone 4
5 Select the operator or the class using the

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In this particular case,
G
OR #02 DIST
only the ‘OR’ operator can be selected. There Trip zone 4
is no limitation on the selection of classes.
6-16 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)

Action
G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
will go out. The assignment has been made. OR #02 DIST
The unit will now operate with the new settings. Trip zone 4
If no operator has been selected, the ‘OR’

operator is always assigned automatically
when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no
automatic assignment of classes.
7 Press the ‘up’ key to exit the list at any point

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
in the list.
G
8 If you wish to reject the new setting while C Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled OR #02 DIST
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The Trip zone 2
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
Deleting a list setting

If ‘M AIN : D i s a b l e d ’ is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are
deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-17

(continued)
6.6.6 Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does not
necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the protective
functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible.
The following memories are available:
In the menu tree ‘M+T/Rec/OP_RC’: Operating data memory

In the menu tree ‘M+T/Rec/MT_RC’: Monitoring signal memory
Event memories
In the menu tree ‘Flt+Ev/Oscil/OSCIL’: Fault memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree ‘Flt+Ev/Oscil/OL_RC’: Overload memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree ‘Flt+Ev/Oscil/GF_RC’: Ground fault memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
6-18 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Readout of the operating

data memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of
100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the operating data Oper/Rec/OP_RC

Operat. data record.
memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the operating

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
data memory. The latest entry is displayed.
G
Enabled USER
No
2 Press the ‘left’ key repeatedly to display the

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 10:01 PSIG
entries one after the other in chronological
G
Enabled USER
order. Once the end of the operating data Yes
memory has been reached, pressing the ‘left’
key again will have no effect.
3 Press the ‘right’ key to display the previous

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
entry.
G
Enabled USER
No
4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
operating data memory to return to the entry
G
point.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-19

(continued)
Readout of the monitoring

signal memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it
detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an
entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible.
After that an ‘overflow’ signal is issued.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the monitoring Oper/Rec/MT_RC

Mon. signal record.
signal memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the monitoring

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
G
Checksum error param
2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to display

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 10:01 SFMON
the entries one after the other in chronological G Exception oper. syst.
order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have
been entered since the last reset, the ‘overflow’
signal is displayed as the last entry.
3 Press the ‘left’ key to display the previous

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
entry.
G
Checksum error param
4 If the ‘down’ key is held down while a Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
monitoring signal is being displayed, the Checksum error param
following additional information will be
displayed:
First: Time when the signal first occurred G
First: 13:33:59.744
Currently: The fault is still being detected Active: Yes
G
(Yes) or is no longer detected (No) Reset: No

by the self-monitoring function. Number: 5
Reset: The fault was no longer detected
by the self-monitoring function and
has been reset (Yes).
Number: The signal occurred x times.

G
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
monitoring signal memory to return to the entry
G
point.
6-20 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Readout of the event

memories (records)
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in
event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the first fault Events/Rec/FT_RC

Fault recording 1
memory, for example. If the memory contains 01.01.99 10:00:33
entries, the third line of the display will show
the date and time the fault began. If the third
line is blank, then there are no entries in the
fault memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the fault

G
Fault recording 1
FT_RC
memory. First, the fault number is shown.
G
Event
In this example it is the 22nd fault since the last 22
reset.
2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to see first

G
Fault recording 1
200 ms FT_DA
the measured fault data and then the binary G
Running time
signals in chronological order. The time shown 0.17 s
in the second line is the time, measured from
the onset of the fault, at which the value was
measured or the binary signal started or G
Fault recording 1
ended. 0 ms FT_RC
G
Record. in progress
Once the end of the fault has been reached Start
(after the ‘right’ key has been pressed
repeatedly), pressing the ‘right’ key again will
have no effect.
G
Fault recording 1
241 ms FT_RC
G
Record. in progress
End
3 Press the ‘left’ key to see the previous

G
Fault recording 1
0 ms FT_RC
measured value or the previous signal.
G
Record. in progress
Start

G
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
fault memory to return to the entry point.
G
01.01.99 10:00:33
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-21

(continued)
6.6.7 Resetting
All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring signal
memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED
indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault – provided
that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that they always indicate the
latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is
always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator
test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that
inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably
prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive
events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in
principle.
If the event memories need to be cleared, however, as would be the case after functional
testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate setting. An overview of all
resetting actions can be found in section "Resetting Actions" in Chapter 3.
The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an example.
In this example the global change-enabling function has already been activated.

Action
0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
display shows the number of faults since the 10
last reset, 10 in this example.
1 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. 10
Don't execute
2 Press the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys to change the

G
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
setting to ‘Execute’.
G
10
Execute
3 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in 0
line 3 is reset to ‘0’.
6-22 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)

Action
4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault C Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
recordings after leaving the standard control 10
mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED
indicator will go out, and the fault recordings
remain stored in the device unchanged. Any
setting can be selected again for a value
change by pressing the keys.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-23

(continued)
6.6.8 Password-Protected Control Actions
Certain actions from the local HMI, such as a manual trip command for testing purposes,
can only be carried out by entering a password (see section "Change-Enabling
Function").
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a pre-defined
sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If the password has
been changed by the user (see section entitled 'Changing the Password'), the following
description will apply accordingly.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘M+T/C&Test/MAIN’, select Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
the parameter ‘Man. Trip Cmd. USER’. Don't execute
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*)

G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
appear in the fourth line of the display. Don't execute
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence:

G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
‘left’
G
Don't execute
*
‘right’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G
Don't execute
*
‘up’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G
Don't execute
*
‘down’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
The display will change as shown in the Man. trip cmd USER
G
column on the right. Don't execute

*
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator

G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Man. trip cmd. USER
indicates that the setting can now be changed Don't execute
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.
6-24 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)

Action
3 Change the setting to ‘Execute’.

G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G
Execute
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED
G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The Don't execute
unit will execute the command.
5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT C Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
MODE is on, the control action can be Don't execute
terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
6.6.9 Changing the Password
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within
a specific time interval. The ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys may be used to define the
password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
3
G
1 2
G
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-25

(continued)
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is
described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Set/Conf/HMI’, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
‘Password’ setting. ********
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
appear in the fourth line of the display. ********
********
2 Press the ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ’down’ keys

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
to enter the valid password. The display will
G
********
change as shown in the column on the right. *
G
Par/Conf/LOC
G Password
********
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
********
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
********
*
3 Now press the ENTER key. The LED

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The _
third line shows an underscore character ( _ )
as the prompt for entering a new password.
6-26 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)

Action
4 Enter the new password, which in this

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
example is done by pressing the UP key
G
*
followed by the DOWN key.
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
**
5 Press the ENTER key again. Asterisks
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
appear in the third line, and a cursor **
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user _
to enter the new password again.
6 Re-enter the password.

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
**
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
**
**
7a Press the ENTER key again. If the

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
password has been re-entered correctly, the ********
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out
and the display appears as shown on the right.
The new password is now valid.
7b If the password has been re-entered

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT **
MODE remains on and the display shown on _
the right appears. The password needs to be
re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change in password by pressing the CLEAR
key (see Step 8).
8 The change in password can be cancelled C Par/Conf/LOC

Password
at any time before Step 7 by pressing the ********
CLEAR key. If this is done, the original
password continues to be valid.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 6-27

(continued)
Operation from the user interface (HMI) without password protection is also possible.
To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6
without entering anything else. This will configure the HMI without password protection,
and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-
enabling function has been activated (see section entitled ‘Change-Enabling Function’).
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as
described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again.

Action
0 Turn off the device.
1 Turn the device on again. At the very

G
beginning of device startup, press the four
G
TEST
directional keys (‘left’, ‘right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’) at
the same time and hold them down.
2 When this condition is detected during

G
Password
startup, the password is displayed.
G
1234
3 After the four keys are released, startup will

continue. TEST
6-28 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
7 Settings
7.1 Parameters
The P638 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate
settings. This section gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located in
the folder entitled ‘Settings’ in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are
listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The units are supplied with a factory-set configuration. After a cold restart the P638 will
be blocked so that all settings must be re-entered.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-1

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.1 Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and the
design version of the P638. They have no effect on the device functions. These settings
should only be changed if the design version of the P638 is modified.
Device DVICE: Device Type 000 000
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: Software Version 002 120
Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW Date 002 122
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW Version Communic. 002 103
Software version for the device's communication software. This display

cannot be altered.
DVICE: DM IEC 61850 Version 002 059
Software version of the communication software based on the device's

protocol per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: Language Version 002 123
Setting for the change level of the data model text. This display cannot be
altered.
DVICE: Text Vers Data Model 002 121
Using the ‘text replacement tool’ provided by the operating program, the
user can change the setting descriptors (plain text designations) and load
them into the device. These user-specific data models obtain a setting
which is defined by the setting of the data model created by the user and
displayed at this location. Standard data models have the identifier ‘0’
(factory-set default).
DVICE: Serial Number 002 124
The Serial Number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot
be altered.
DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000
DVICE: PCS Order No. 001 200
Order numbers for the device. This number cannot be altered by the user.
DVICE: Order Ext. No. 1 000 003
7-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
Order extension numbers for the device.

DVICE: Module Var. Slot 1 086 050
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot. The display
always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
DVICE: Module Vers. Slot 1 086 193
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-3

7 Settings
(continued)
Index letter specifying the version of the module inserted in the respective
slot.
DVICE: Variant of Module A 086 047
Item number of module A in this design version.

DVICE: Version of Module A 086 190
Index letter specifying the version of module A.

DVICE: MAC Address Module A 104 061
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This
address is introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
DVICE: Variant of Module L 086 048
Item number of module L in this design version.

DVICE: Version of Module L 086 191
Index letter specifying the version of module L.

DVICE: Variant of Module B 086 049
Item number of digital bus module B in this design version.

DVICE: Version of Module B 086 192
Index letter specifying the version of digital bus module B.

DVICE: Variant Module B (a) 086 046
Item number of analog bus module B.

DVICE: Version Module B (a) 086 189
Index letter specifying the version of analog bus module B.

DVICE: Customer ID Data 1 000 040
Set your numerically-coded user data here for your records.

DVICE: Location 001 201
Reference input for the device’s location as selected by user.

DVICE: Device ID 000 035
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes.

See description of the respective operating program for more detailed
setting instructions.
DVICE: Substation ID 000 036

DVICE: Feeder ID 000 037

7-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Password Level 1 000 048
DVICE: Password Level 2 000 049

DVICE: SW Version DHMI 002 131
DVICE: SW Version DHMI DM 002 132
Internal software version numbers.
User interface HMI: Local HMI Exists 221 099
When set to 'Yes' it is apparent that the device is fitted with the user
interface (HMI).
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-5

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.2 Configuration settings
User interface HMI: Language 003 020
Language in which texts will be displayed on the user interface (HMI).

HMI: Decimal Separator 003 021
Character to be used as decimal separator on the user interface (HMI).

HMI: Password 003 035
The password to be used for changing settings from the user interface
(HMI) can be defined here. Further information on changing the password
is given in Chapter 6.
HMI: Fct. Reset Key 005 251 Fig. 3-56
Selection of specified counters or event logs that are reset by pressing the
RESET key on the user interface.
HMI: Fct. Read Key 080 110
Selection of the event log that will be displayed when the READ key is
pressed.
HMI: Fct. Menu Jmp List 1 030 238
HMI: Fct. Menu Jmp List 2 030 239
Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by

repeated reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2).
HMI: Operation Panel Fct 053 007 Fig. 3-2
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also

referred to as the Operation Panel.
HMI: Overload Panel Fct 053 005 Fig. 3-4
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.

HMI: Fault Panel Fct 053 003 Fig. 3-3
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.

HMI: Panel Hold-Time 031 075 Fig. 3-2
Setting for the time period for which a panel is displayed before the unit
switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are
selected than can be shown on the LC-Display.
HMI: Auto Return Time 003 014 Fig. 3-2
If the user does not press a key on the user interface (HMI) during this set
time period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
HMI: Backlight Time 003 023
If the user does not press a key on the user interface during this set time
period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off, and any
switchgear selection that might have been made is cancelled.
7-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
PC link PC: Manufacturer 003 183 Fig. 3-5
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.

PC: Bay Address 003 068 Fig. 3-5
PC: Relay Address 003 069 Fig. 3-5
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in

communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
PC: Baud Rate 003 081 Fig. 3-5
Baud rate of the PC interface.

PC: Parity Bit 003 181 Fig. 3-5
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the
P638.
PC: Spontan. Sig. Enable 003 187 Fig. 3-5
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.

PC: Select. Spontan.Sig. 003 189 Fig. 3-5
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.

PC: Transm Enab Cycl Dat 003 084 Fig. 3-5
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC: Cycl. Data ILS Tel. 003 185 Fig. 3-5
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined

telegram via the PC interface.
PC: Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel 003 155 Fig. 3-5
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta

quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta t 003 058 Fig. 3-5
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this
time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
PC: Time-Out 003 188 Fig. 3-5
Setting for the time that will elapse after the last telegram traffic via the PC
interface before the second communication channel of communication
module A is activated.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-7

7 Settings
(continued)
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Remote Comms Port1 056 026
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
COMM1: General Enable USER 003 170 Fig. 3-7, 3-8,
3-9, 3-10,
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1. 3-11
COMM1: IEC870-5 Enabled 003 215 Fig. 3-6
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.

COMM1: Addit. -101 Enable 003 216 Fig. 3-6
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
COMM1: Addit. ILS Enable 003 217 Fig. 3-6
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
COMM1: MODBUS Enable 003 220 Fig. 3-6
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.

COMM1: DNP3 Enable 003 231 Fig. 3-6
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.

COMM1: COURIER Enable 103 040 Fig. 3-6
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Communicat Protocol 003 167 Fig. 3-6
Selecting the communication protocol that shall be used for the

communication interface.
COMM1: MODBUS Variant 003 214 Fig. 3-10
The user may select between two variants of the

MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Line Idle State 003 165 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11, 3-12
Setting for the line idle state indication.
COMM1: Baud Rate 003 071 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
Baud rate of the communication interface.
COMM1: Parity Bit 003 171 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
Setting the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P638.
7-8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Mon.33-bit Dead Time 003 176 Fig. 3-7,

3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
The P638 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive
pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM1: Mon. Time Polling 003 202 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM1: Octet Comm. Address 003 072 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11, 3-12
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
Note:
The former designation for 'C O M M 1 : O c t e t c o m m . a d d r e s s '
was 'ILSA: Bay Address
'ASDU': Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: Octet 2 Com.Add DNP3 003 240 Fig. 3-11
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices. The
address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at C O M M 1 : O c t e t c o m m . a d d r e s s is the lower-order octet of the
DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Test Monitor On 003 166 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
COMM1: Manufacturer 003 161 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-9

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Octet Address ASDU 003 073 Fig. 3-7,

3-8,3-9
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
The former designation for 'C O M M 1 : O c t e t a d d r e s s A S D U '
was 'I L S A : R e l a y A d d r e s s '.
COMM1: Spontan. Sig. Enable 003 177 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Select. Spontan.Sig. 003 179 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication
interface 1.
COMM1: Transm Enab Cycl Dat 003 074 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9
Enabling cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
COMM1: Cycl. Data ILS Tel. 003 175 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9
telegram via the communication interface.
COMM1: Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel 003 150 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9
COMM1: Delta t 003 053 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
7-10 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Contin. General Scan 003 077 Fig. 3-7,

3-8,3-9
A continuous or background general scan means that the P638 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication
interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures
that there will be data consistency with a connected control system.
The time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two
telegrams.
COMM1: Comm. Address Length 003 201 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the communication address length.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Octet 2 Comm. Addr. 003 200 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.

enabled.
COMM1: Cause Transm. Length 003 192 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.

enabled.
COMM1: Address Length ASDU 003 193 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet 2 Addr. ASDU 003 194 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification
of telegram structures.
Note:
COMM1: Addr. Length Inf.Obj 003 196 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.

enabled.
COMM1: Oct.3 Addr. Inf.Obj. 003 197 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
enabled.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Inf.No.<->Funct.Type 003 195 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be

reversed in the object address.
enabled.
COMM1: Time Tag Length 003 198 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the time tag length.

enabled.
COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 Conv. 003 190 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as

a single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: ASDU2 Conversion 003 191 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a

single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: Initializ Signal 003 199 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.

enabled.
COMM1: Balanced Operation 003 226 Fig. 3-8
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced

basis (full duplex operation).
enabled.
COMM1: Direction Bit 003 227 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
enabled.
COMM1: Mon.Time to Acknowl. 003 228 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
enabled.
7-12 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Reg.Asg. Selec. Cmds 003 210 Fig. 3-10
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the

selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first command is given the register no. 00301, the second
the register no. 00302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.Asg. Selec. Sig. 003 211 Fig. 3-10

selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means
that the first signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register
no. 10302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.Asg. Sel. M.val. 003 212 Fig. 3-10

selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection.
Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
measured value is given to the register no. 30301, the second to the
register no. 30302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.Asg. Sel. Param. 003 213 Fig. 3-10

selected settings. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first setting is given the register no. 40301, the second the
register no. 40302, etc.
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS) 003 152 Fig. 3-10
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication

interface after this time has elapsed.
COMM1: Autom Event Confirm. 003 249 Fig. 3-10
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master in

order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay 003 241 Fig. 3-11
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the
start of sending the 'response'.
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout 003 242 Fig. 3-11
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-13

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode 003 243 Fig. 3-11
Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.

COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244 Fig. 3-11
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
COMM1: Link Max. Retries 003 245 Fig. 3-11
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
COMM1: Appl Confirm.Timeout 003 246 Fig. 3-11
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
COMM1: Appl Need Time Del. 003 247 Fig. 3-11
Time interval within which the slave requests time synchronization cyclically
from the master.
COMM1: Ind./Cl. Bin. Inputs 003 232 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
COMM1: Ind./Cl. Bin.Outputs 003 233 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
COMM1: Ind./Cl. Bin. Count. 003 234 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 – binary counters.
7-14 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Ind./Cl. Analog Inp. 003 235 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
COMM1: Ind./Cl. Analog Outp 003 236 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
COMM1: Ph-Ph Meas V.(DNP3) 003 250 Fig. 3-11
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values

in object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master
for each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting
dead band'.
COMM1: Phase-Phase t (DNP3) 003 248 Fig. 3-11
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).

COMM1: Command Selection 103 042 Fig. 3-12
Selection of commands that can be enabled via the COURIER protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Signal Selection 103 043 Fig. 3-12
Selection of commands that can be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Meas. Val. Selection 103 044 Fig. 3-12
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.

COMM1: Parameter Selection 103 045 Fig. 3-12
Selection of commands that can be changed via the COURIER protocol.

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-15

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta t (COURIER) 103 046 Fig. 3-12
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are
again transmitted.
Communication interface 2 COMM2: Remote Comms Port2 056 057
Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the

COMM2: General Enable USER 103 170 Fig. 3-14
Disabling or enabling communication interface 2.

COMM2: Line Idle State 103 165 Fig. 3-14
Setting for the line idle state indication.

COMM2: Baud Rate 103 071 Fig. 3-14
Baud rate of the communication interface.

COMM2: Parity Bit 103 171 Fig. 3-14
Setting the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P638.
COMM2: Dead Time Monitoring 103 176 Fig. 3-14
The P638 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive

pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM2: Mon. Time Polling 103 202 Fig. 3-14
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM2: Positive Ackn. Fault 103 203
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively

after transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
COMM2: Octet Comm. Address 103 072 Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Manufacturer 103 161 Fig. 3-14

COMM2: Octet Address ASDU 103 073 Fig. 3-14
7-16 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Spontan. Sig. Enable 103 177 Fig. 3-14
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication

interface.
COMM2: Select. Spontan.Sig. 103 179 Fig. 3-14
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication

interface 2.
COMM2: Transm Enab Cycl Dat 103 074 Fig. 3-14
Enabling cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication

interface.
COMM2: Cycl. Data ILS Tel. 103 175 Fig. 3-14

telegram via the communication interface.
COMM2: Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel 103 150 Fig. 3-14

COMM2: Delta t 103 053 Fig. 3-14
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
IEC 61850 Communication IEC: IEC 61850 Communic. 056 059 Page: 3-22
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the

settings and signals are hidden.
IEC: General Enable USER 104 000 Page: 3-22
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.

IEC: Enable Configuration 104 058 Page: 3-22:
3-24
This setting can only be sent individually. In order to maintain consistency
of all settings in function groups IEC, GSSE and GOOSE, they are only
enabled mutually by this setting. After this command is sent to the device,
the actual state of the previously changed setting parameter of the three
function groups is enabled in the communication data model of the
connected device. This function is carried out automatically with the off-
line/on-line switching of the device.
IEC: Ethernet Media 104 056 Page: 3-22
Selecting the physical communication channel on the Ethernet module from

either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering
option) connection.
IEC: IED Name 104 057
Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as
device identification in the IEC 61850 system, it is included in the Logical
Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous.
All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names.
IEC: TCP Keep-Alive Timer 104 062
This defines a "heart-beat" time interval used to actively monitor a

communication link to a logged-on client.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-17

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: IP Address 104 001
IEC: IP Address 1 104 002
IP address for the device (IED has server function).

Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
I E C : I P a d d r e s s . The device’s front panel display only displays the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: Subnet Mask 104 005
IEC: Subnet Mask 1 104 006
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note:
I E C : S u b n e t m a s k . The device’s front panel display only displays the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: Gateway Address 104 011
IEC: Gateway Address 1 104 012
This setting defines the IPv4 address of the network gateway of a

communication link to a client outside of the local network.
Note:
I E C : G a t e w a y a d d r e s s . The device’s front panel display only displays
the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: SNTP Operating Mode 104 200
Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to

Broadcast synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server
transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server each
device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization
signal after its own cycle time.
IEC: SNTP Poll Cycle Time 104 201
Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode
is set to Request from Server.
IEC: SNTP Server 1 IP 104 202
IEC: SNTP Server 1 IP 1 104 203
IP address of the synchronizing clock server.

Note:
IEC : SN T P s e r ve r 1 IP. The device’s front panel display only displays
7-18 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: SNTP Server 2 IP 104 210
IP address of the synchronizing clock server.

Note:
IEC : SN T P s e r ve r 2 IP. The device’s front panel display only displays
IEC: Diff. Local Time 104 206
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation
(IED).
IEC: Diff. Dayl.Sav. Time 104 207
Time difference when changing to daylight saving time.

IEC: Switch.Dayl.Sav.Time 104 219
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time

is wanted.
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time Start 104 220
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time St. d 104 221
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time St. m 104 222
These three settings define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
I E C : D a y l . S a v . T i m e S t a r t are the values 'first', 'second', 'third',
'fourth', and 'last'. For I E C : D a y l . S a v . T i m e s t . d the seven
weekdays are available so that for example a setting like "on the last
Sunday in March" may be used.
IEC: Dayl.Sav.t.St.0:00 + 104 223
This defines the time difference and the time of day (on the specific
changeover day) when the clock is to be switched to daylight saving time.
The time is given in the number of minutes after midnight, e.g. when the
clock changeover to 3:00 AM always occurs at 2:00 AM, then the value to
be entered at I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + is 120 [minutes] and at
I E C : D i f f . d a y l . s a v . t i m e it is 60 [minutes].
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time End 104 225
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time End d 104 226
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time End m 104 227
IEC: Dayl.Sav.t.End 0:00+ 104 228
This setting defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover from
daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for the
clock changeover to daylight saving time.
IEC: Update Measurements 104 229
Time period between two transmissions of all measured value Report

Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy.
IEC: Dead Band IP 104 230
Setting to calculate the filter value for all IP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IP measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for
each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d B a n d I P
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-19

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Dead Band IN 104 231
Setting to calculate the filter value for all IN Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IN measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d B a n d I N
IEC: Dead Band VPP 104 232
Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPP measured values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter
value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d B a n d V P P
IEC: Dead Band VPG 104 233
Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPG Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPG measured values, which is
step size measured value • s e tti n g IEC : Dead Band VPG
IEC: Dead Band f 104 234
Setting to calculate the filter value for all f Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the f measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d B a n d f
IEC: Dead Band P 104 235
Setting to calculate the filter value for all P Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the P measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d B a n d P
IEC: Dead Band Phi 104 236
Setting to calculate the filter value for all f Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the φ measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d B a n d P h i
IEC: Dead Band Z 104 237
Setting to calculate the filter value for all Z Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the Z measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • s e tti n g IEC : Dead Band Z
IEC: Dead Band Min/Max 104 238
Setting to calculate the filter value for all min/max Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the min/max measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • s e tti n g IEC : Dead Band Min/Max
7-20 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Dead Band ASC 104 239
Setting to calculate the filter value for all ASC Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the ASC measured values, which is
step size measured value • s e tti n g IEC : Dead Band ASC
IEC: Dead Band Temp. 104 240
Setting to calculate the filter value for all temperature Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the temperature measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • s e tti n g IEC : Dead Band Temp.
IEC: Dead Band 20ma 104 241
Setting to calculate the filter value for all 20mA Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the 20mA measured values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter
step size measured value • s e tti n g IEC : Dead Band 20ma
IEC: Update Cycle Energy 104 060
Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB). No RCB
transmission with setting to blocked!
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Gen.ObjOr.SubstEvent 056 068 Page: 3-23

Substation Event
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. The
settings of this function group are only active if function group IEC has been
configured and is activated, and if the settings of this function group have
been activated through the setting I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by
switching the device off-line/on-line.
GOOSE: General Enable USER 106 001 Page: 3-24
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.

GOOSE: Multic. MAC Address 106 003
Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving

clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard
according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE
may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the
number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED).
GOOSE: Application ID 106 004 Fig. 3-16
Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE: Goose ID 106 002 Fig. 3-16
Goose ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with
32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the
maximum of 10 monitored external devices
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-21

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: VLAN Identifier 106 006 Fig. 3-16
VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN
identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages,
if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC
addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the
network if they do not include a VLAN identifier.
GOOSE: VLAN Priority 106 007 Fig. 3-16
VLAN priority of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE: DataSet Reference 106 008 Fig. 3-16
DataSet Reference of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE: DataSet Cfg.Revision 106 009 Fig. 3-16
Display of the 'DataSet Configuration Revision' value of GOOSE, which is

sent from this device (IED).
GOOSE: Output 1 Fct.Assig. 106 011 Fig. 3-16
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE

outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured
Dataset of GOOSE.
7-22 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 Applic. ID 107 000
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for

the virtual binary GOOSE input.
GOOSE: Input 1 Goose ID 107 001
Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual binary GOOSE input.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-23

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 DataSet Ref 107 002
'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device

(IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of
a chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the
device (IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical
node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20
characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered.
GOOSE: Input 1 DataObj Ind 107 003
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index
indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
7-24 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 DatAttr Ind 107 004
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index
indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.
GOOSE: Input 1 Default 107 005 Page: 3-25
GOOSE: Input 2 Default 107 015
Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the
opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-25

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 Fct.Assig. 107 006 Page: 3-25
GOOSE: Input 2 Fct.Assig. 107 016
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical

state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will
receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was
received with the Dataset of GOOSE
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Gen.Subst.Stat.Event 056 060 Page: 3-25

Status Events
Cancelling function group GSSC or including it in the configuration. If the
The settings of this function group are only active if function group IEC has
been configured and is activated, and if the settings of this function group
have been activated through the setting I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n
or by switching the device off-line/on-line.
GSSE: General Enable USER 104 049 Page: 3-25
Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.

GSSE: Min. Cycle 104 052 Page: 3-25
Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition
cycle time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with
this formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms]
The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state
change of a GSSE bit pair.
GSSE: Max. Cycle 104 053 Page: 3-25
Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to
calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. Should the calculated
value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set max.
value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value
time.
GSSE: Increment 104 054
Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the
repetition cycle time see Min. cycle.
7-26 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Operating Mode 104 055
In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC

address (network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed.
In the operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices
have logged-on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have
logged-on successfully, are read and processed.
GSSE: Output 1 Bit Pair 104 101 Page: 3-25
GSSE: Output 2 Bit Pair 104 104
Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual
GSSE outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted
consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are
used by this device (IED) during a send operation.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-27

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Output 1 Fct.Assig. 104 102 Page: 3-25
GSSE: Output 2 Fct.Assig. 104 105
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GSSE

outputs. The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as
configured above.
7-28 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 Bit Pair 105 001 Page: 3-25
GSSE: Input 2 Bit Pair 105 006
Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input.
A GSSE is always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of
which a maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-29

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 IED name 105 002 Page: 3-26

GSSE: Input 2 IED name 105 007
IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
7-30 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 Default 105 003 Page: 3-26
GSSE: Input 2 Default 105 008
Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GSSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite
side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-31

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 Fct.Assig. 105 004 Page: 3-26
GSSE: Input 2 Fct.Assig. 105 009
Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state

signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive
the state of the bit pair, as configured above, and which was received with
GSSE
IRIG-B IRIGB: IRIG-B Time Synch 056 072
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the

IRIGB: General Enable USER 023 200 Fig. 3-17
Enabling/disabling the IRIG-B interface.
7-32 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
Function keys F_KEY: Password Funct.Key 1 003 036 Page: 3-28
F_KEY: Password Funct.Key 2 030 242
These passwords enable the corresponding function key. Further

information on assigning passwords is given in Chapter 6.
F_KEY: Fct. Assignm. F1 080 112 Fig. 3-18
F_KEY: Fct. Assignm. F2 080 113
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a

menu jump list may be selected. Both menu jump lists are assembled at
H M I : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t x (x: 1 or 2).
F_KEY: Operating Mode F1 080 132 Fig. 3-18
F_KEY: Operating Mode F2 080 133
Setting operating mode of the function key to push-button or to switch.

F_KEY: Fcn Key Return Time 003 037 Page: 3-28
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for
no longer than this time period. When this time period has elapsed the
password must again be entered.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-33

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary input
The P638 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the system.
The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams.
The P638 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this
slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are
automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function can be
assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several
control points having different signal voltages.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals
must persist for at least 30 ms.
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence (active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal.
7-34 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Filter 010 220 Fig. 3-19
Input filter which is activated when either the mode "Active ‘High’, Filt." or
Active ‘Low’, Filt." has been selected for I N P : O p e r . M o d e U x x x .
In order to suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it
is suggested to adjust this setting to 6 [steps]. For further information see
Chapter 3.
INP: Fct. U 601 Assign 152 091 Fig. 3-19,
3-29, 3-41
INP: Fct. U 602 Assign 152 094
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-35

7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Oper. Mode U 601 152 092 Fig. 3-19

INP: Oper. Mode U 602 152 095
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
7-36 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
Measured data input RTDmA: RTD,Curr. Loop mA IN 056 030
Cancelling function group RTDmA or including it in the configuration. If the

RTDmA: General Enable USER 011 100 Fig. 3-20
Enabling/disabling analog measured data input.

RTDmA: Enable IDC p.u. 037 190 Fig. 3-23
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P638 to
display a measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
RTDmA: IDC< Open Circuit 037 191 Fig. 3-23
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P638 will issue an ‘open
circuit’ signal.
RTDmA: IDC 1 037 150 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 2 037 152 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 3 037 154 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 4 037 156 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 5 037 158 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 6 037 160 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 7 037 162 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 8 037 164 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 9 037 166 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 10 037 168 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 11 037 170 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 12 037 172 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 13 037 174 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 14 037 176 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 15 037 178 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 16 037 180 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 17 037 182 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 18 037 184 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 19 037 186 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: IDC 20 037 188 Fig. 3-23
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that
has been set accordingly.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-37

7 Settings
(continued)
RTDmA: IDC,lin 1 037 151 Fig. 3-23
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
RTDmA: Scaled Val. IDC,lin1 037 192 Fig. 3-24
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.

RTDmA: Scaled Val.IDC,lin20 037 193 Fig. 3-24
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
7-38 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary output
The P638 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection
schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams.
The P638 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot,
then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden
in the menu tree.
The contact data of the relay used permit the use as command relay and as signal relay.
For multiply contacts, a signal can be assigned to several output relays simultaneously.
An operating mode can be defined for every output relay. Depending on the set
operating mode, the output relay is in closed circuit operation or in open circuit operation,
latching or not. The setting of the operating mode defines when the latch will be
cancelled for latched output relays.
OUTP: Fct. Assignm. K 601 150 121
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-39

7 Settings
(continued)
Assignment of functions to output relays.

OUTP: Oper. Mode K 601 150 122
7-40 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-41

7 Settings
(continued)
Measured data output mA_OP: Current Loop mA Outp 056 020
Cancelling function group RTDmA or including it in the configuration. If the

settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the
exception of this setting.
mA_OP: General Enable USER 031 074 Fig. 3-28
Enabling/disabling the measured data output function.

mA_OP: Fct. Assignm. BCD 053 002 Fig. 3-31
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.

mA_OP: Hold Time Output BCD 010 010 Fig. 3-31
Setting for the time period for transmission of the selected measured value
in BCD form.
mA_OP: Scale BCD 016 082 Fig. 3-31
Scaling factor setting for the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
The scaling factor is calculated according to the following formula:
Mx,max
scaling factor = M
x,scal
where:
Mx,scal: scaled measured value
Mx,max maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value
mA_OP: Fct. Assignm. A-1 053 000 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: Fct. Assignm. A-2 053 001
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.

mA_OP: Hold Time Output A-1 010 114 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: Hold Time Output A-2 010 115
Setting for the time period for output of the selected measured value.
mA_OP: Scaled Min. val. A-1 037 104 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: Scaled Min. val. A-2 037 110
Setting for the minimum scaled measured value to be output. The value to
be set is calculated according to the following formula:
Mx,min
Mx,scal,min = M
x,RL
where:
Mx,min: minimum transmitted value
for the selected measured value
Mx,RL: range limit of the selected measured value
7-42 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
mA_OP: Scaled Knee val. A-1 037 105 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: Scaled Knee val. A-2 037 111
Setting for the scaled measured value for output that defines the knee point
of the characteristic. The value to be set is calculated according to the
following formula:
Mx,knee
Mx,scal,knee = M
x,RL
where:
Mx,knee: knee point value to be transmitted for selected measured value
Mx,RL: range limit of the selected measured value
mA_OP: Scaled Max. val. A-1 037 106 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: Scaled Max. val. A-2 037 112
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax

(x=1, 2) is to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range
"measured values to be issued" is defined. In this range the characteristic
has two linear sections, which are separated by a knee point.
Measured values Range

Measured values for the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measured values 0 ... 1
Measured values to be issued Range

Measured values to be issued Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measured values to be issued Mx,scal,min. ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values "Scaled min. val. Ax" ...
in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Knee point for characteristic Designation

Value for knee point Mx,knee
Scaled knee point value Mx,scal,knee
Designation of this set value "Scaled knee val. Ax" ...
in the data model
with:
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
mA_OP: AnOut Min. val. A-1 037 107 Fig. 3-33

mA_OP: AnOut Min. val. A-2 037 113
Setting for the output current that is output for measured values smaller
than or equal to the minimum measured value setting.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-43

7 Settings
(continued)
mA_OP: AnOut Knee Point A-1 037 108 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: AnOut Knee Point A-2 037 114
Setting for the output current that is output if the measured value is on the
knee point of the characteristic.
mA_OP: AnOut Max. val. A-1 037 109 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: AnOut Max. val. A-2 037 115
Output values Designation in the data model

Output current range "An-Out min. val. Ax" ...
for measured values in the range ... "An-Out max. val. Ax"
"measured values to be issued"
Output current to be set "An-Out min. val. Ax"
for measured values = Mx,min.
Output current to be set "An-Out max. val. Ax" ...
for measured values = Mx,max.
Output current to be set "AnOut knee point Ax"
for measured values = Mx,knee
with:
Mx,min. ... Mx,max. : measured values to be issued
mA_OP: Output Value 1 037 120 Fig. 3-33
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%,

can be issued.
7-44 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
LED indicator
The P638 has a total of 17 LED indicators. LED H1 is not configurable. It indicates the
working readiness of the device (supply voltage exists). LEDs H 2 and H 3 are also not
configurable. They indicate "Blocked/faulty" (H 2) and "Alarm" (H 3). LED H 17 indicates
that the user is in the "EDIT MODE".
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator is in closed or in open circuit operation, latching or
not. The setting of the operation mode also defines for latched LED indicators when the
latch will be cancelled.
LED: Fct.Assig. H 1 Green 085 184 Fig. 3-34
Display of the operational readiness of the protection device.

The function M A I N : H e a l t h y is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.Assig. H 2 Amber 085 001
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.

The function M AIN : Bl o c k e d /F a u l ty is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.Assig. H 3 Amber 085 004

The function C H E C K : A l a r m ( L E D ) is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.Assig. H17 Red 085 185

The function H M I : E d i t M o d e i s permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.Assig. H 4 Red 085 007 Fig. 3-34
LED: Fct.Assig. H 4 Green 085 057
LED: Fct.Assig. H 5 Red 085 010
LED: Fct.Assig. H10 Green 085 075
LED: Fct.Assig. H12 Rot 085 031
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-45

7 Settings
(continued)
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.

LED: Operating Mode H 1 085 182 Fig. 3-34
LED: Operating Mode H 2 085 002
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
7-46 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
Main function MAIN: Chann Assign.Comm1/2 003 169 Fig. 3-57
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication

channels.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync 103 210
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync 103 211
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
The backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by
the primary source after M AIN : T i m e s yn c . ti m e - o u t has elapsed.
MAIN: Time Sync. Time-Out 103 212
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary

source.
Fault recording OSCIL: Dist Rec Analog Ch1 035 160
OSCIL: Dist Rec Analog Ch2 035 161
The user specifies the channel for which disturbance waveforms are
recorded. The figure shown illustrates an overview of the assignment.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-47

7 Settings
(continued)
Cancelling protection
functions
By means of a configuration procedure, the user can adapt the device functions flexibly
to the scope of protection functions required in each particular h.v. system.
The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be cancelled:
The protection function in question must be disabled.

None of the elements of the protection function being cancelled may be assigned to a
binary input.
None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or
an LED indicator.
No function of the protection function being cancelled may be selected in a list
setting.
None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals.
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is

defined by the function group designation (for example: “LIMIT”)
Differential protection DIFF: Differential PR (87) 056 027
Cancelling function group DIFF or including it in the configuration. If the

Transverse differential DIF_a: Transverse Diff 87a 056 035
protection, end a Cancelling function group DIF_a or including it in the configuration. If the
Transverse differential DIF_b: Transverse Diff 87b 056 036
protection, end b Cancelling function group DIF_b or including it in the configuration. If the
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC1: I> Overcurrent 1 056 031
protection 1 Cancelling function group DTOC1 or including it in the configuration. If the

Definite-time overcurrent DTOC2: I> Overcurrent 2 056 032
protection 2 Cancelling function group DTOC2 or including it in the configuration. If the

7-48 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
Definite-time overcurrent DTOCN: 50/51N, Def.Time IN> 056 034
protection Cancelling function group DTOCN or including it in the configuration. If the

Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT: I> Inverse Time O/C 056 009
protection Cancelling function group IDMTx or including it in the configuration. If the

Thermal overload protection THERM: Thermal Overload 49 056 023
Cancelling function group THERM or including it in the configuration. If the

Time-voltage protection V<>: Under Over Volts V<> 056 010
Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the

Over-/ Underfrequency f<>: Frequency Prot. (81) 056 033
Protection Cancelling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the

Circuit breaker failure CBF_1: Circuit Brkr. Fail 1 056 040
protection, channel 1 Cancelling function group CBF_1 or including it in the configuration. If the
Circuit breaker failure CBF_2: Circuit Brkr. Fail 2 056 041
protection, channel 2 Cancelling function group CBF_2 or including it in the configuration. If the
Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_1: Circ. Brkr. Monit. 1 056 062
Channel 1 Cancelling function group CBM_1 or including it in the configuration. If the

Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_2: Circ. Brkr. Monit. 2 056 070
Channel 2 Cancelling function group CBM_2 or including it in the configuration. If the

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-49

7 Settings
(continued)
Limit value monitoring LIMIT: Limit Thresholds I<> 056 025
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the

Logic LOGIC: Programmable LOGIC 056 017
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration. If the

7-50 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3 Function Settings
7.1.3.1 Global
PC link PC: Command Blocking 003 182 Fig. 3-5
This prevents any settings or commands from being sent to the relay from
the PC interface.
PC: Sig/Meas. Val.Block 003 086 Fig. 3-5
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Communication interface 1 COMM1: USER Command Block 003 172 Fig. 3-6
the COMM1 interface.
COMM1: USER Sig/Meas Block 003 076 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
Communication interface 2 COMM2: USER Command Block 103 172 Fig. 3-14
the COMM2 interface.
COMM2: USER Sig/Meas Block 103 076 Fig. 3-14
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Binary output OUTP: USER Outp Rel Block 021 014 Fig. 3-26
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
Main function MAIN: Protection Enabled 003 030 Fig. 3-41
Switching the device off-line or on-line.

MAIN: Time Switching 003 095 Fig. 3-54
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.

This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
MAIN: USER Test Mode 003 012 Fig. 3-58
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
MAIN: Frequency fn 010 030 Fig. 3-40,
3-120
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
MAIN: In CT. prim.,end a 019 020 Fig. 3-36
MAIN: In CT. prim.,end b 019 021 Fig. 3-36
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer of
end a or b .
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-51

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: IN,n C.T. prim. 010 018 Fig. 3-37
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
MAIN: Vn V.T. prim. 010 002 Fig. 3-38
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: In Device, end a 010 024 Fig. 3-35
MAIN: In Device, end b 010 025 Fig. 3-35
Setting for the nominal device current of the measuring inputs for end a or
b.
MAIN: IN,n device 010 026 Fig. 3-35
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of residual current. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: Vn VT. Sec. 010 009 Fig. 3-35
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the voltage transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: Wdng a CT Orientat'n 010 140 Fig. 3-35
MAIN: Wdng b CT Orientat'n 010 150 Fig. 3-35
The vector sum of the phase currents of ends a and b is governed by the
connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in
Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard'. If the connection direction is
reversed then the setting must be 'Reversed'.
MAIN: VT Orientation 010 158 Fig. 3-35
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the

measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the
setting must be 'Standard'. If the connection direction is reversed then the
setting must be 'Reversed'.
MAIN: Minimum I Measurem't 011 030 Fig. 3-36
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents
are displayed.
MAIN: Minimum IN Meas'mt 011 031 Fig. 3-37
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the
measured operating value of the residual current is displayed.
MAIN: Minimum V Meas'mt 011 032 Fig. 3-38
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages,
and, if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Reset 1 005 248 Fig. 3-56
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if

M A I N : G r o u p R e s e t 1 U S E R is enabled.
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Reset 2 005 249 Fig. 3-56
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if

M A I N : G r o u p R e s e t 2 U S E R is enabled.
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Block 1 021 021 Fig. 3-42
Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 1

(M A I N : B l o c k i n g 1 E X T ) .
7-52 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Block 2 021 022 Fig. 3-42
Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 2

(M A I N : B l o c k i n g 2 E X T ) .
MAIN: Trip Cmd.Block USER 021 012 Fig. 3-51
Blocking of the trip commands from the user interface (HMI).

MAIN: Main-Trip 'OR'gate 1 021 007 Fig. 3-46
Assignment of the signals leading to a main-trip command 1.

MAIN: Main-Trip 'OR'gate 2 021 008 Fig. 3-46
Assignment of the signals leading to a main-trip command 2.

MAIN: Re-Trip 'OR' gate 1 021 025 Fig. 3-47
Assignment of the signals leading to a Re-Trip command 1.

MAIN: Re-Trip 'OR' gate 2 021 026 Fig. 3-47
Assignment of the signals leading to a Re-Trip command 2.

MAIN: Back-Trip 'OR'gate 1 021 027 Fig. 3-48
Assignment of the signals leading to a Trip command 1.

MAIN: Back-Trip 'OR'gate 2 021 028 Fig. 3-48
Assignment of the signals leading to a Trip command 2.

MAIN: tDWELL M-Trip Cmd 1 021 034 Fig. 3-46
Setting for the minimum duration of the Main-Trip command 1.

MAIN: tDWELL M-Trip Cmd 2 021 035 Fig. 3-46
Setting for the minimum duration of the Main-Trip command 2.

MAIN: tDWELL Re-Trip Cmd 1 021 036 Fig. 3-47
Setting for the minimum duration of the Re-Trip command 1.

MAIN: tDWELL Re-Trip Cmd 2 021 037 Fig. 3-47
Setting for the minimum duration of the Re-Trip command 2.

MAIN: tDWELL B-Trip Cmd 1 021 038 Fig. 3-48
Setting for the minimum duration of the Trip command 1.

MAIN: tDWELL B-Trip Cmd 2 021 039 Fig. 3-48
Setting for the minimum duration of the Trip command 2.

MAIN: Latch M-Trip Cmd 1? 021 040 Fig. 3-46
Specification as to whether the main-trip command 1 should latch.

MAIN: Latch M-Trip Cmd 2? 021 041 Fig. 3-46
Specification as to whether the main-trip command 2 should latch.

MAIN: Latch Re-Trip Cmd 1? 021 042 Fig. 3-47
Specification as to whether the re-trip command 1 should latch.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-53

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Latch Re-Trip Cmd 2? 021 043 Fig. 3-47
Specification as to whether the re-trip command 2 should latch.

MAIN: Latch B-Trip Cmd 1? 021 044 Fig. 3-48
Specification as to whether the trip command 1 should latch.

MAIN: Latch B-Trip Cmd 2? 021 045 Fig. 3-48
Specification as to whether the trip command 2 should latch.

MAIN: Fct Assign Fault 021 031 Fig. 3-43
Selection of signals whose appearance will result in a ‘Blocked/faulty’ signal

and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled ‘OUT OF SERVICE’.
Signals that lead to a blocking of the device are not configurable and always
result in the above signal and indication.
Setting group selection GROUP: Control via USER 003 100 Fig. 3-59
If setting group selection is to be handled from the integrated user interface

(HMI) rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting 'Yes'.
GROUP: Setting Grp Sel USER 003 060 Fig. 3-59
Selection of the setting group from the user interface (HMI).

GROUP: Hold Timer 003 063 Fig. 3-59
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if setting group selection is
carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may
occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no
binary signal input has yet been set, then the setting group selected from
the user interface (HMI) shall apply.
Self-monitoring CHECK: Fct Assign. Alarm 021 030 Fig. 3-60
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals ‘Alarm
(LED)’ and ‘Alarm (relay) and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled
‘ALARM’. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to blocking of the
device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and
indication.
CHECK: Mon.Sig. Retention 021 018 Page: 3-86
This setting determines how long monitoring signals remain in the

monitoring signal memory before a reset occurs.
Fault recording OSCIL: Fct Assig. Trigger 003 085 Fig. 3-71
This setting defines the signals that will trigger disturbance recording.
OSCIL: I>, end a 016 014 Fig. 3-71
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase current in end A of the
transformer that will trigger disturbance recording.
OSCIL: I>, end b 016 015 Fig. 3-71
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase current in end B of the
transformer that will trigger disturbance recording.
OSCIL: Id> 016 018 Fig. 3-71
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will
trigger disturbance recording.
OSCIL: IN> 016 017 Fig. 3-71
This setting defines the threshold value of the residual current that will
trigger disturbance recording.
7-54 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
OSCIL: Pre-Fault Time 003 078 Fig. 3-73
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a
fault (pre-fault recording time).
OSCIL: Post-Fault Time 003 079 Fig. 3-73
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a
fault (post-fault recording time).
OSCIL: Max Record Time 003 075 Fig. 3-73
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault
and post-fault recording times.
Differential protection DIFF: Minimum Id Meas'mt 011 041 Fig. 3-78
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating values of the differential currents to be displayed.
DIFF: Minimum IR Meas'mt 011 042 Fig. 3-78
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating values of the restraining currents to be displayed.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-55

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.2 General Functions
Differential protection DIFF: General Enable USER 019 080 Fig. 3-74
Disabling or enabling differential protection.

DIFF: Vn prim., end a 019 017 Fig. 3-75
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of end a of the transformer.

DIFF: Vn prim., end b 019 018 Fig. 3-75
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of end b of the transformer.

DIFF: Rated Ref Power Sref 019 016 Fig. 3-75
Setting for the rated reference power. Normally this is the rated power of
the transformer.
DIFF: Ref. Curr. Iref,a 019 023 Fig. 3-75
Display of the reference current calculated by the P638 for end a.

DIFF: Ref. Curr. Iref,b 019 024 Fig. 3-75
Display of the reference current calculated by the P638 for end b.

DIFF: Matching Fact. kam,a 004 105 Fig. 3-75
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P638 for end a.

DIFF: Matching Fact. kam,b 004 106 Fig. 3-75
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P638 for end b.
Transverse differential DIF_a: General Enable USER 019 081 Fig. 3-81
protection, end a Disabling/enabling of the transverse differential protection end a.
Note: The screening out of zero current of the differential protection

may not be enabled if the P638 has to work in end a with
transverse differential protection.
Transverse differential DIF_b: General Enable USER 019 082 Fig. 3-81
protection, end b Disabling/enabling of the transverse differential protection end b.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC1: General Enable USER 031 135 Fig. 3-84
protection 1 Disabling or enabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function 1.

DTOC1: Select Meas. Input 031 130 Fig. 3-85
Selection of the measuring input – end a or end b – the definite-time

overcurrent protection 1 is controlled by its current.
DTOC1: Direction Measurem. 031 131 Fig. 3-87
The user can specify whether the definite-time overcurrent protection 1 is

operated with or without the direction determination function.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC2: General Enable USER 031 136 Fig. 3-84
protection 2 Disabling or enabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function 2.

DTOC2: Select Meas. Input 031 140 Fig. 3-85

overcurrent protection 2 is controlled by its current.
7-56 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
Definite-time overcurrent DTOCN: General Enable USER 031 138 Fig. 3-93
protection Disabling or enabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function for

residual current.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT: General Enable USER 017 096 Fig. 3-95
protection Enabling/disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.

IDMT: Select Meas. Input 017 108 Fig. 3-95

overcurrent protection is controlled by its current.
IDMT: Direction Measurem. 017 109 Fig. 3-102
The user may select a definite-time overcurrent protection with or without

direction measurement.
Thermal overload protection THERM: General Enable USER 022 050 Fig. 3-107
Enabling/disabling thermal overload protection.

THERM: Select Meas. Input 022 055 Fig. 3-108
Selection of measuring input – end a or end b – the thermal overload

protection is controlled by its current.
THERM: Relative Replica 022 064 Fig. 3-111
Disabling or enabling the Relative replica mode of operation.

THERM: Absolute Replica 022 065 Fig. 3-111
Disabling or enabling the Absolute replica mode of operation.

THERM: O/T f. Iref Persist 004 138 Fig. 3-111
Display of over-temperature as a result of persisting Iref.
Note: This display is only visible in the Relative replica mode of

operation.
Time-voltage protection V<>: General Enable USER 023 030 Fig. 3-113
Enabling/disabling time-voltage protection.
Over-/ Underfrequency f<>: General Enable USER 023 031 Fig. 3-116
Protection Enabling or disabling over-/ underfrequency protection

f<>: Evaluation Time 018 201 Fig. 3-118
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time so that a signal is issued.
f<>: Undervolt. Block. V< 018 200 Fig. 3-118
Setting for the threshold for undervoltage blocking. If it falls below the set
threshold, the over-/under frequency protection is blocked.
Circuit breaker failure CBF_1: General Enable USER 022 100 Fig. 3-121
protection, channel 1 Disabling or enabling the circuit breaker failure protection function,
channel 1.
CBF_1: Select Meas. Input 022 102 Fig. 3-123
Selection of measuring input – end a or end b – the circuit breaker failure

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-57

7 Settings
(continued)
Circuit breaker failure CBF_2: General Enable USER 022 101 Fig. 3-121
protection, channel 2 Disabling or enabling the circuit breaker failure protection function,
channel 2.
CBF_2: Select Meas. Input 022 103 Fig. 3-123
Selection of measuring input – end a or end b – the circuit breaker failure

Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_1: General Enable USER 022 010 Fig. 3-124
Channel 1 Enabling/disabling circuit breaker condition monitoring.

CBM_1: Blocking USER 022 150 Fig. 3-132
Setting for temporary blocking of circuit breaker condition monitoring when

protection injection testing is being carried out.
CBM_1: Select Meas. Input 022 178 Fig. 3-126
Selection of measuring input – end a or end b – the circuit breaker

monitoring function is controlled by its current.
CBM_1: Operating Mode 022 007 Fig. 3-127
Setting for start criteria for circuit breaker condition monitoring. To evaluate
all trip commands issued by the protection device "With Trip Cmd. Only"
must be selected. For further evaluation of operational trip commands the
additional CB auxiliary contact "CB Sig. EXT or Trip" is used.
CBM_1: In,CB 022 012 Fig. 3-129
Setting for the circuit breakers nominal current.

CBM_1: Perm. CB Op. In,CB 022 013 Fig. 3-129
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at nominal current.

CBM_1: Med. Curr. Itrip,CB 022 014 Fig. 3-129
Setting for the average ruptured current for the CB.
Note: Generally valid only for pneumatically operated circuit breakers.

CBM_1: Perm. CB Op. Imed,CB 022 015 Fig. 3-129
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at average ruptured

current.

CBM_1: Max. Curr. Itrip,CB 022 016 Fig. 3-129
Setting for the maximum ruptured current for the CB.

CBM_1: Perm. CB Op. Imax,CB 022 017 Fig. 3-129
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at maximum ruptured

current.
CBM_1: No. CB Operations > 022 019 Fig. 3-131
Setting for the maximum permitted number of mechanical switching

operations of the CB.
CBM_1: Remain No. CB Op. < 022 020 Fig. 3-130
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the number of remaining CB
operations at CB nominal current.
7-58 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
CBM_1: –Itrip> 022 022
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the accumulated ruptured current
values.
CBM_1: –Itrip**2> 022 081
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the second power of the
accumulated ruptured current values.
CBM_1: –I*t> 022 096
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the sum of the current-time
integral of the ruptured currents.
CBM_1: Corr. Acqu.t. Trip 022 153 Fig. 3-127
Correction of the delay period between the forming of the device internal trip
command and the actual opening of the CB contacts.
CBM_1: Corr. Acqu.t.CB Sig. 022 018 Fig. 3-127
Correction of time tolerances by leading or lagging auxiliary contacts of the

circuit breaker.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_2: General Enable USER 007 170 Fig. 3-124
Channel 2 Enabling/disabling circuit breaker condition monitoring.

CBM_2: Blocking USER 007 171 Fig. 3-132
Setting for temporary blocking of circuit breaker condition monitoring when

protection injection testing is being carried out.
CBM_2: Select Meas. Input 007 216 Fig. 3-126
Selection of measuring input – end a or end b – the circuit breaker

monitoring function is controlled by its current.
CBM_2: Operating Mode 007 172
Setting for start criteria for circuit breaker condition monitoring. To evaluate
all trip commands issued by the protection device "With Trip Cmd. Only"
must be selected. For further evaluation of operational trip commands the
additional CB auxiliary contact "CB Sig. EXT or Trip" is used.
CBM_2: In,CB 007 173
Setting for the circuit breakers nominal current.

CBM_2: Perm. CB Op. In,CB 007 174
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at nominal current.

CBM_2: Med. Curr. Itrip,CB 007 175
Setting for the average ruptured current for the CB.

CBM_2: Perm. CB Op. Imed,CB 007 176
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at average ruptured

current.

CBM_2: Max. Curr. Itrip,CB 007 177
Setting for the maximum ruptured current for the CB.

CBM_2: Perm. CB Op. Imax,CB 007 178
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at maximum ruptured

current.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-59

7 Settings
(continued)
CBM_2: No. CB Operations > 007 179 Fig. 3-131
Setting for the maximum permitted number of mechanical switching

operations of the CB.
CBM_2: Remain No. CB Op. < 007 180 Fig. 3-130
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the number of remaining CB
operations at CB nominal current.
CBM_2: –Itrip> 007 181
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the accumulated ruptured current
values.
CBM_2: –Itrip**2> 007 182
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the second power of the
accumulated ruptured current values.
CBM_2: –I*t> 007 183
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the sum of the current-time
integral of the ruptured currents.
CBM_2: Corr. Acqu.t. Trip 007 184
Correction of the delay period between the forming of the device internal trip
command and the actual opening of the CB contacts.
CBM_2: Corr. Acqu.t.CB Sig. 007 185
Correction of time tolerances by leading or lagging auxiliary contacts of the

circuit breaker.
Limit value monitoring LIMIT: General Enable USER 014 010 Fig. 3-133
Enabling/disabling limit value monitoring.

LIMIT: IDC,lin> 014 110 Fig. 3-133
Setting for operate threshold IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin>> 014 111 Fig. 3-133
Setting for operate threshold IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> 014 112 Fig. 3-133
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> 014 113 Fig. 3-133
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.

LIMIT: IDC,lin< 014 114 Fig. 3-133
Setting for operate threshold IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin<< 014 115 Fig. 3-133
Setting for operate threshold IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< 014 116 Fig. 3-133
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< 014 117 Fig. 3-133
Setting for the operate delay of the undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.

LIMIT: T> 014 100 Fig. 3-134
Setting for the operate threshold of temperature monitoring T>.
7-60 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: T>> 014 101 Fig. 3-134
Setting for the operate threshold of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: tT> 014 103 Fig. 3-134
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: tT>> 014 104 Fig. 3-134
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: T< 014 105 Fig. 3-134
Setting for the operate threshold of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: T<< 014 106 Fig. 3-134
Setting for the operate threshold of temperature monitoring T<<.

LIMIT: tT< 014 107 Fig. 3-134
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: tT<< 014 108 Fig. 3-134
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
Logic LOGIC: General Enable USER 031 099 Fig. 3-141
Enabling/disabling the logic function.

LOGIC: Set 1 USER 034 030 Fig. 3-140,
3-147
LOGIC: Set 2 USER 034 031
LOGIC: Set 8 USER 034 037 Fig. 3-147
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. Outp. 1 030 000 Fig. 3-141
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. Outp. 2 030 004
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. Outp.10 030 036
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-61

7 Settings
(continued)
These settings assign functions to the outputs.

LOGIC: Op. Mode t Output 1 030 001 Fig. 3-141
LOGIC: Op. Mode t Output 2 030 005
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
7-62 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t1 Output 1 030 002 Fig. 3-141

LOGIC: Time t1 Output 2 030 006
Settings for timer stage t1 of the respective outputs.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-63

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t2 Output 1 030 003 Fig. 3-141

Settings for timer stage t2 of the respective outputs.

Note: This setting has no effect in the ‘minimum time’ operating mode.
7-64 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig. Assig Outp. 1 044 000 Fig. 3-147
LOGIC: Sig. Assig Outp. 2 044 002
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-65

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.Assig.Outp. 1(t) 044 001 Fig. 3-147
LOGIC: Sig.Assig.Outp. 2(t) 044 003
LOGIC: Sig. Assig Outp10(t) 044 019
LOGIC: Sig.Assig.Outp.17(t) 044 033
LOGIC: Sig.Assig.Outp.18(t) 044 035
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
7-66 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.3 Setting Groups
Differential protection DIFF: Enable SGx 072 152 073 152 074 152 075 152 Fig. 3-74
This setting defines the setting group in which differential protection is

enabled.
DIFF: Idiff> SGx 072 142 073 142 074 142 075 142 Fig. 3-78
Threshold of the differential protection referred to the reference current of

the regarded end.
DIFF: Idiff>> SGx 072 143 073 143 074 143 075 143 Fig. 3-78
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current with which
inrush stabilization becomes ineffective.
Note: If the threshold exceeds its normal setting, the P638 may not
start if there are internal faults with transformer saturation.
DIFF: Idiff>>> SGx 072 144 073 144 074 144 075 144 Fig. 3-78
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will
trigger the differential protection regardless of hold time, inrush stabilization
and saturation detection.
Note: If the threshold is set too low, the P638 may start if there are
external faults with transformer saturation.
DIFF: m1 SGx 072 145 073 145 074 145 075 145 Fig. 3-78
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of the differential protection in the

range 0.5 ⋅ I diff > I R ,m 2 .
DIFF: IR,m2 SGx 072 147 073 147 074 147 075 147 Fig. 3-78
Knee point from which the characteristic runs with a set gradient of m2.
DIFF: Inrush 2nd HarmonSGx 072 159 073 159 074 159 075 159 Fig. 3-79
Threshold of the Inrush stabilization of the differential protection as ratio of

the second harmonic with the fundamental component of the differential
current in percent.
DIFF: I0 Filt a Enab SGx 072 155 073 155 074 155 075 155 Fig. 3-68,
3-76
Disabling/enabling of the zero current filter of end a.
Note: The zero current filter may not be enabled if the P638 has to
work in end a with transverse differential protection.
DIFF: I0 Filt b Enab SGx 071 060 071 061 071 062 071 063 Fig. 3-68,
3-76
Disabling/enabling of the zero current filter of end b.
Note: The zero current filter may not be enabled if the P638 has to
work in end b with transverse differential protection.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-67

7 Settings
(continued)
Transverse differential DIF_a: Enable SGx 072 130 073 130 074 130 075 130 Fig. 3-81
protection, end a
This setting defines the setting group in which transverse differential
protection is enabled.
DIF_a: Itrans> SGx 072 131 073 131 074 131 075 131 Fig. 3-83
Threshold of the transverse differential protection referred to the nominal

current of the regarded end.
DIF_a: m1 SGx 072 132 073 132 074 132 075 132 Fig. 3-83
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of the transverse differential protection

Iq >
in the range I R > .
m1
Transverse differential DIF_b: Enable SGx 072 134 073 134 074 134 075 134 Fig. 3-81
protection, end b
This setting defines the setting group in which transverse differential
DIF_b: Itrans> SGx 072 135 073 135 074 135 075 135 Fig. 3-83
Threshold of the transverse differential protection referred to the nominal

current of the regarded end.
DIF_b: m1 SGx 072 136 073 136 074 136 075 136 Fig. 3-83
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of the transverse differential protection

Iq >
in the range I R > .
m1
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC1: Enable SGx 076 050 077 050 078 050 079 050 Fig. 3-84
protection 1
This setting defines the setting group in which definite-time overcurrent
DTOC1: I> SGx 076 051 077 051 078 051 079 051 Fig. 3-87
Setting for operate threshold I>.

DTOC1: I>> SGx 076 052 077 052 078 052 079 052 Fig. 3-87
Setting for operate threshold I>>.

DTOC1: tI> SGx 076 057 077 057 078 057 079 057 Fig. 3-87
Setting for operate delay I>.

DTOC1: tI>> SGx 076 058 077 058 078 058 079 058 Fig. 3-87
Setting for operate delay I>>.

DTOC1: Timer Start tI> SGx 071 146 071 147 071 148 071 149 Fig. 3-87
This setting defines whether the stage timer tI> is started when the current
thresholds I> are triggered or, additionally, with direction signaling.
DTOC1: Inrush Stab ="on"SGx 076 063 077 063 078 063 079 063 Fig. 3-86
The setting defines whether the definite-time overcurrent protection 1 can

be blocked by the inrush stabilization of the differential protection.
DTOC1: I>lift Rush Rest.SGx 076 064 077 064 078 064 079 064 Fig. 3-86
Setting for the current threshold to be exceeded for the inrush stabilization
to become ineffective.
7-68 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC1: Beta (I>) SGx 076 068 077 068 078 068 079 068 Fig. 3-88
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I> starting signal logic determines
that the direction is 'Forward'.
DTOC1: Gamma (I>) SGx 076 073 077 073 078 073 079 073 Fig. 3-88
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I> starting signal logic determines
that the direction is 'Forward'.
DTOC1: Direction (I>) SGx 076 080 077 080 078 080 079 080 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tI> trip signal is sent: forward,
reverse or non-directional.
DTOC1: V< (I>) SGx 076 131 077 131 078 131 079 131 Fig. 3-90
The tI> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
If it has been set to 'Blocked' the enabling is permanently active.
DTOC1: Vmin (I>) SGx 076 157 077 157 078 157 079 157 Fig. 3-90
A direction decision of the I> overcurrent stage is possible only if the short
circuit voltage is higher than this set value.
DTOC1: Mode V<Vmin (I>) SGx 076 113 077 113 078 113 079 113 Fig. 3-90
This setting defines whether, for a short circuit voltage which is lower than
Vmin, the I> overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be
blocked.
DTOC1: Mode w/o V (I>) SGx 076 128 077 128 078 128 079 128 Fig. 3-90
This setting defines whether, for a voltage measuring circuit failure, the I>
overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be blocked.
DTOC1: Timer Start tI>> SGx 072 245 073 044 074 044 075 044 Fig. 3-87
This setting defines whether the stage timer tI>> is started when the current
thresholds I>> are triggered or, additionally, with direction signaling.
DTOC1: Beta (I>>) SGx 076 069 077 069 078 069 079 069 Fig. 3-88
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I>> starting signal logic
determines that the direction is 'Forward'.
DTOC1: Gamma (I>>) SGx 076 074 077 074 078 074 079 074 Fig. 3-88
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I>> starting signal logic
determines that the direction is 'Forward'.
DTOC1: Direction (I>>) SGx 076 088 077 088 078 088 079 088 Fig. 3-91
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tI>> trip signal is issued:
forward, reverse or non-directional.
DTOC1: V< (I>>) SGx 076 150 077 150 078 150 079 150 Fig. 3-91
The tI>> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
If it has been set to "blocked" the enabling is permanently active.
DTOC1: Vmin (I>>) SGx 076 158 077 158 078 158 079 158 Fig. 3-91
A direction decision of the I>> overcurrent stage is possible only if the short
circuit voltage is higher than this set value.
DTOC1: Mode V<Vmin(I>>) SGx 076 127 077 127 078 127 079 127 Fig. 3-91
Vmin, the I>> overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be
blocked.
DTOC1: Mode w/o V (I>>) SGx 076 129 077 129 078 129 079 129 Fig. 3-91
This setting defines whether, for a voltage measuring circuit failure, the I>>
overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be blocked.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-69

7 Settings
(continued)
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC2: Enable SGx 076 070 077 070 078 070 079 070 Fig. 3-84
protection 2
protection 2 is enabled.
DTOC2: I> SGx 076 071 077 071 078 071 079 071 Fig. 3-92
Setting for operate threshold I>.

DTOC2: I>> SGx 076 072 077 072 078 072 079 072 Fig. 3-92
Setting for operate threshold I>>.

DTOC2: tI> SGx 076 077 077 077 078 077 079 077 Fig. 3-92
Setting for operate delay I>.

DTOC2: tI>> SGx 076 078 077 078 078 078 079 078 Fig. 3-92
Setting for operate delay I>>.

DTOC2: Inrush Stab ="on"SGx 076 083 077 083 078 083 079 083 Fig. 3-86,
3-92
The setting defines whether definite-time overcurrent protection 2 can be
blocked by the inrush stabilization of the differential protection function.
DTOC2: I>lift Rush Rest.SGx 076 084 077 084 078 084 079 084 Fig. 3-86,
3-92
Setting for the current threshold to be exceeded for the inrush stabilization
to become ineffective.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOCN: Enable SGx 076 110 077 110 078 110 079 110 Fig. 3-93
protection
protection for residual current is enabled.
DTOCN: IN>H SGx 076 111 077 111 078 111 079 111 Fig. 3-94
Setting for operate threshold IN>.

DTOCN: tIN>H SGx 076 114 077 114 078 114 079 114 Fig. 3-94
Setting for operate delay IN>.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT: Enable SGx 072 000 073 000 074 000 075 000 Fig. 3-95
protection
This setting defines the setting group in which IDMT protection is enabled.
IDMT: Inrush Stab ="on"SGx 072 129 073 129 074 129 075 129 Fig. 3-101
The setting defines whether the definite-time overcurrent protection can be

blocked by the inrush stabilisation of the differential current.
IDMT: I>lift Rush Rest.SGx 072 101 072 102 072 103 072 104 Fig. 3-101
Setting for the current threshold for deactivation of inrush stabilization.

IDMT: Iref Rating SGx 072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050 Fig. 3-102
Setting for the reference current of the curve.

IDMT: Characteristic SGx 072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056 Fig. 3-102
Setting for the tripping characteristic.

IDMT: kt Time Dial/TMS SGx 072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053 Fig. 3-102
Setting for the characteristic time multiplier
7-70 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT: Min. Trip Time SGx 072 077 073 077 074 077 075 077 Fig. 3-102
Setting for the minimum trip time.

IDMT: Hold Time SGx 072 071 073 071 074 071 075 071 Fig. 3-102
Setting for the hold time or intermittent faults.

IDMT: Release SGx 072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059 Fig. 3-102
Setting for the release or reset characteristic.

IDMT: Timer St. tIref> SGx 006 061 006 062 006 063 006 064 Fig. 3-102
This setting defines whether the stage timer tIref> is started when the IDMT
protection is triggered or, additionally, with direction signaling.
IDMT: Beta SGx 072 046 073 046 074 046 075 046 Fig. 3-103
Angles β and γ set the range in which the inverse-time overcurrent starting
signal logic determines that the direction is 'Forward'.
IDMT: Gamma SGx 072 047 073 047 074 047 075 047 Fig. 3-103
Angles β and γ set the range in which the inverse-time overcurrent starting
signal logic determines that the direction is 'Forward'.
IDMT: Direction (I>) SGx 072 048 073 048 074 048 075 048 Fig. 3-105
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tIref> trip signal is sent:
forward, reverse or non-directional.
IDMT: V< SGx 072 081 073 081 074 081 075 081 Fig. 3-105
The tIref> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
If it has been set to "blocked" the enabling is permanently active.
IDMT: Vmin SGx 072 133 073 133 074 133 075 133 Fig. 3-105
A direction decision of the definite-time overcurrent protection is possible

only if the short circuit voltage is higher than this set value
IDMT: Op. Mode V<Vmin SGx 072 138 073 138 074 138 075 138 Fig. 3-105
Vmin, the definite-time overcurrent protection should operate non-
directional or should be blocked.
IDMT: Mode w/o Voltage SGx 072 119 073 119 074 119 075 119 Fig. 3-105
This setting defines whether, in case of voltage measuring circuit failure, the
definite-time overcurrent protection should operate non-directional or should
be blocked.
Thermal overload protection THERM: Enable SGx 072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175 Fig. 3-107
This setting defines the setting group in which thermal overload protection is
enabled.
THERM: Iref Rating SGx 072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the reference current.

THERM: Start Fact.OL_RC SGx 072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the characteristic time multiplier
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-71

7 Settings
(continued)
THERM: Tim.Const 1(Heat)SGx 072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current
flow (heating time constant).
THERM: Tim.Const 2(Cool)SGx 072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (cooling time constant).
Note:
This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all other
cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
THERM: O/T f.Iref Pers. SGx 072 167 073 167 074 167 075 167 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the overtemperature resulting from persistent thermal limit

current.
Note: This setting is only enabled in the Absolute replica mode of

operation.
THERM: T> Alarm Reset,% SGx 072 184 073 184 074 184 075 184 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the operate threshold of the warning stage.

THERM: T> Trip Reset,% SGx 072 181 073 181 074 181 075 181 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the operate threshold of the trip stage.

Note:
If the operating mode has been set to 'Absolute replica', the value here will
be automatically set to 100% and this setting is hidden as far as the user
interface is concerned.
THERM: Alarm Temp. SGx 072 153 073 153 074 153 075 153 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the temperature (in °C) to trigger a warning alarm.

Note: This setting is only enabled in the Absolute replica mode of
operation.
THERM: Max Perm Obj Tmp.SGx 072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Max Perm Cool TmpSGx 072 185 073 185 074 185 075 185 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.

THERM: Select CT AmbientSGx 072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177 Fig. 3-110
Selecting if and how the coolant temperature is measured: Via the PT100,
the 20 mA input or Tx (x = 1 to 9).
THERM: Default CT Amb SGx 072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the default coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the
trip time if coolant temperature is not measured.
THERM: Funct.f.CTA Fail.SGx 076 177 077 177 078 177 079 177 Fig. 3-110
The setting defines how the thermal overload protection function will
continue to operate in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
User can select between 'Default Temp. Value', 'Last Meas.Temperat.' and
'Blocking'.
7-72 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
THERM: Minimum Temperat.SGx 076 178 077 178 078 178 079 178 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the minimum coolant temperature to be used to calculate the

tripping time if the catenary section is situated in a long tunnel.
THERM: Trip Hysteresis SGx 072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183 Fig. 3-111
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.

THERM: Pre-Trip Alarm SGx 072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191 Fig. 3-111
An alarm will be raised in advance of the trip. The time difference between
the alarm and the trip time is set here.
Time-voltage protection V<>: Enable SGx 076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000 Fig. 3-113
This setting defines the setting group in which V<> protection is enabled.
V<>: V> SGx 076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003 Fig. 3-114
Setting for operate threshold V>.

V<>: V>> SGx 076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004 Fig. 3-114
Setting for operate threshold V>>.

V<>: tV> SGx 076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005 Fig. 3-114
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.

V<>: tV>> SGx 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006 Fig. 3-114
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.

V<>: V< SGx 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007 Fig. 3-115
Setting for operate threshold V<.

V<>: V<< SGx 076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008 Fig. 3-115
Setting for operate threshold V<<.

V<>: Vmin SGx 076 046 077 046 078 046 079 046 Fig. 3-115
Setting for the lower threshold of the window function.

V<>: tV< SGx 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009 Fig. 3-115
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.

V<>: tV<< SGx 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010 Fig. 3-115
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.

V<>: tTransient SGx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029 Fig. 3-115
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage
stages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048 Fig. 3-114
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-73

7 Settings
(continued)
Over-/ Underfrequency f<>: Enable SGx 018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199 Fig. 3-116
Protection
This setting defines the setting group in which over-/underfrequency
f<>: Oper. Mode f1 SGx 018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123 Fig. 3-120
f<>: Oper. Mode f2 SGx 018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147
f<>: Oper. Mode f3 SGx 018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171
f<>: Oper. Mode f4 SGx 018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195
Setting for operating mode for stages of over-/underfrequency protection.

f<>: f1 SGx 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103 Fig. 3-120
f<>: f2 SGx 018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
f<>: f3 SGx 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
f<>: f4 SGx 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection

function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal
frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the
chosen operating mode, either a signal is issued without further monitoring,
or further monitoring mechanisms are started.
f<>: tf1 SGx 018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107 Fig. 3-120
f<>: tf2 SGx 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
f<>: tf3 SGx 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
f<>: tf4 SGx 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
Setting for operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.

f<>: df1/dt SGx 018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111 Fig. 3-120
f<>: df2/dt SGx 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
f<>: df3/dt SGx 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
f<>: df4/dt SGx 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
Setting for frequency gradient to be monitored.

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f with df/dt" has been selected.
f<>: Delta f1 SGx 018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115 Fig. 3-120
f<>: Delta f2 SGx 018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139
f<>: Delta f3 SGx 018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163
f<>: Delta f4 SGx 018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187
Setting for Delta f.

"f + Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
f<>: Delta t1 SGx 018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119 Fig. 3-120
f<>: Delta t2 SGx 018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143
f<>: Delta t3 SGx 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167
f<>: Delta t4 SGx 018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191
Setting for Delta t.

"f + Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
7-74 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
Circuit breaker failure CBF_1: Enable SGx 072 110 073 110 074 110 075 110 Fig. 3-121
protection, channel 1
This setting defines the setting group in which breaker failure protection is
enabled.
CBF_1: tBF1 Init M-Trip SGx 072 115 073 115 074 115 075 115 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the monitoring time of the main-trip command before issuing a
re-trip.
CBF_1: tBF2 Init ReTrip SGx 072 116 073 116 074 116 075 116 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the monitoring time of the re-trip command before issuing a
back-trip.
CBF_1: Imin< SGx 072 112 073 112 074 112 075 112 Fig. 3-123
Setting for the Imin< current threshold. Current falling below this threshold
will be interpreted as breaker opening, and reset the CBF timers.
CBF_1: tImin< SGx 072 113 073 113 074 113 075 113 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the operate delay of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.

CBF_1: tOp SGx 072 114 073 114 074 114 075 114 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the operative time of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.
Circuit breaker failure CBF_2: Enable SGx 072 120 073 120 074 120 075 120 Fig. 3-121
protection, channel 2
This setting defines the setting group in which breaker failure protection is
enabled.
CBF_2: tBF1 Init M-Trip SGx 072 125 073 125 074 125 075 125 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the monitoring time of the main-trip command before issuing a
re-trip.
CBF_2: tBF2 Init ReTrip SGx 072 126 073 126 074 126 075 126 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the monitoring time of the re-trip command before issuing a
back-trip.
CBF_2: Imin< SGx 072 122 073 122 074 122 075 122 Fig. 3-123
Setting for the Imin< current threshold. Current falling below this threshold
will be interpreted as breaker opening, and reset the CBF timers.
CBF_2: tImin< SGx 072 123 073 123 074 123 075 123 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the operate delay of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.

CBF_2: tOp SGx 072 124 073 124 074 124 075 124 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the operative time of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-75

7 Settings
(continued)
Limit value monitoring LIMIT: Enable SGx 072 240 073 240 074 240 075 240 Fig. 3-133
This setting defines the setting group in which the limit value monitoring
function is enabled.
LIMIT: Ia> SGx 072 221 073 221 074 221 075 221 Fig. 3-135
Setting for operate threshold Ia> for end a.

LIMIT: Ia>> SGx 072 223 073 223 074 223 075 223 Fig. 3-135
Setting for operate threshold Ia>> for end a.

LIMIT: tIa> SGx 072 224 073 224 074 224 075 224 Fig. 3-135
Setting for operate delay tIa> for end a.

LIMIT: tIa>> SGx 072 225 073 225 074 225 075 225 Fig. 3-135
Setting for operate delay tIa>> for end a.

LIMIT: Ib> SGx 072 229 073 229 074 229 075 229 Fig. 3-135
Setting for operate threshold Ib> for end b.

LIMIT: Ib>> SGx 072 230 073 230 074 230 075 230 Fig. 3-135
Setting for operate threshold Ib>> for end b.

LIMIT: tIb> SGx 072 231 073 231 074 231 075 231 Fig. 3-135
Setting for operate delay tIb> for end b.

LIMIT: tIb>> SGx 072 232 073 232 074 232 075 232 Fig. 3-135
Setting for operate delay tIb>> for end b.

LIMIT: IN> SGx 072 234 073 234 074 234 075 234 Fig. 3-136
Setting for operate threshold IN>.

LIMIT: IN>> SGx 072 235 073 235 074 235 075 235 Fig. 3-136
Setting for operate threshold IN>>.

LIMIT: tIN> SGx 072 236 073 236 074 236 075 236 Fig. 3-136
Setting for operate delay tIN>.

LIMIT: tIN>> SGx 072 237 073 237 074 237 075 237 Fig. 3-136
Setting for operate delay tIN>>.

LIMIT: V> SGx 072 247 073 247 074 247 075 247 Fig. 3-137
Setting for operate threshold V>.

LIMIT: V>> SGx 072 248 073 248 074 248 075 248 Fig. 3-137
Setting for operate threshold V>>.

LIMIT: tV> SGx 072 249 073 249 074 249 075 249 Fig. 3-137
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.

LIMIT: tV>> SGx 072 250 073 250 074 250 075 250 Fig. 3-137
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.

LIMIT: V< SGx 072 251 073 251 074 251 075 251 Fig. 3-137
Setting for operate threshold V<.

LIMIT: V<< SGx 072 252 073 252 074 252 075 252 Fig. 3-137
Setting for operate threshold V<<.

LIMIT: tV< SGx 072 253 073 253 074 253 075 253 Fig. 3-137
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.

LIMIT: tV<< SGx 072 254 073 254 074 254 075 254 Fig. 3-137
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
7-76 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: f> SGx 072 211 073 211 074 211 075 211 Fig. 3-138
Setting for operate threshold f>.

LIMIT: f>> SGx 072 212 073 212 074 212 075 212 Fig. 3-138
Setting for operate threshold f>>.

LIMIT: tf> SGx 072 213 073 213 074 213 075 213 Fig. 3-138
Setting for the operate delay for f>.

LIMIT: tf>> SGx 072 214 073 214 074 214 075 214 Fig. 3-138
Setting for the operate delay for f>>.

LIMIT: f< SGx 072 215 073 215 074 215 075 215 Fig. 3-138
Setting for operate threshold f<.

LIMIT: f<< SGx 072 216 073 216 074 216 075 216 Fig. 3-138
Setting for operate threshold f<<.

LIMIT: tf< SGx 072 217 073 217 074 217 075 217 Fig. 3-138
Setting for the operate delay for f<.

LIMIT: tf<< SGx 072 218 073 218 074 218 075 218 Fig. 3-138
Setting for the operate delay for f<<.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7-77

7-78 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
8 Information and Control Functions
The P638 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and
acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as
fault-related data. A number of counters are maintained for statistical purposes.
This information can be read out from the integrated user interface. All this information
can be found in the ‘Measurements + Tests’ and ‘Fault + Event Record’ folders in the
menu tree.
8.1 Operation
8.1.1 Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data
Measured data input RTDmA: Current IDC 004 134 Fig. 3-23
Display of the milliamp current loop input current.

RTDmA: Current IDC p.u. 004 135 Fig. 3-23
Display of the current loop input current referred to IDC,nom.

RTDmA: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. 004 136 Fig. 3-23
Display of the linearized current loop input current referred to IDC,nom.

RTDmA: Scaled Value IDC,lin 004 180 Fig. 3-24
Display of the scaled linearized value.

RTDmA: Temperature 004 133 Fig. 3-25
Display of the temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature input on

the analog p/c board.
RTDmA: Temperature p.u. 004 221 Fig. 3-25
Display of the temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature input on

the analog p/c board referred to 100°C.
mA_OP: Current A-1 005 100 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: Current A-2 005 099
Display of the current on the analog measured data output

(A1: channel 1, A-2: channel 2).
Main function MAIN: Date 003 090 Fig. 3-54
Date display.
Note: The date can also be set here.
MAIN: Time 003 091 Fig. 3-54
Display of the time (real time clock).

Note: The time can also be set here.
MAIN: Current IA,a prim. 005 021 Fig. 3-36
Display of phase current A, end a, as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current IC,a prim. 006 021 Fig. 3-36
Display of phase current C, end a, as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current IA,b prim. 005 022 Fig. 3-36
Display of phase current A, end b, as a primary quantity.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-1

(continued)
MAIN: Current IC,b prim. 006 022 Fig. 3-36
Display of phase current C, end b, as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current IN prim. 004 043 Fig. 3-37
Display of the updated residual current value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage prim. 004 112 Fig. 3-38
Display of the updated voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current IA,a p.u. 005 031 Fig. 3-36
Display of phase current A, end a, referred to In.

MAIN: Current IC,a p.u. 006 031 Fig. 3-36
Display of phase current C, end a, referred to In.

MAIN: Current IA,b p.u. 005 032 Fig. 3-36
Display of phase current A, end b, referred to In.

MAIN: Current IC,b p.u. 006 032 Fig. 3-36
Display of phase current C, end b, referred to In.

MAIN: Current IN p.u. 004 044 Fig. 3-37
Display of the updated residual current value referred to In.

MAIN: Voltage p.u. 004 113 Fig. 3-38
Display of the voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Frequency f 004 040 Fig. 3-40
Measurement of system frequency.

MAIN: Load Angle end a 005 014 Fig. 3-39
Display of the load angle at end a.

MAIN: Load Angle end b 005 016 Fig. 3-39
Display of the load angle at end b.

MAIN: Frequency f p.u. 004 070 Fig. 3-40
Display of system frequency referred to fnom.

MAIN: Load Angle p.u.end a 005 015 Fig. 3-39
Display of load angle, end a referred to 100°.

MAIN: Load Angle p.u.end b 005 017 Fig. 3-39
Display of load angle, end b, referred to 100°.
Differential protection DIFF: Diff Current 1 005 080 Fig. 3-78
Display of differential current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref.

DIFF: Restrain Current 1 005 081 Fig. 3-78
Display of restraining current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref.

DIFF: Diff Current 2 006 080 Fig. 3-78

DIFF: Restrain Current 2 006 081 Fig. 3-78
8-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Thermal overload protection THERM: Status Therm.Replica 004 016 Fig. 3-111
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

THERM: Object Temperature 004 137 Fig. 3-111
Display of the temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Coolant Temperature 004 149 Fig. 3-111
Display of coolant temperature. Depending on the setting at

T H ER M : Se l e c t C T Am b i e n t for coolant temperature acquisition, one
of the following values will be displayed:
When set to 'Default Temp. Value' the set temperature value will be
displayed. When set to 'From PT100' the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer will be displayed. When set to 'From 20 mA Input'
the temperature measured via a 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
THERM: Pre-Trip Time left 004 139 Fig. 3-111
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold ("time-to-trip").
THERM: Therm. Replica p.u. 004 017 Fig. 3-111
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function

referred to a buffer content of 100 %.
THERM: Object Temp. p.u. 004 179 Fig. 3-111
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100 °C.

THERM: Coolant Temp. p.u. 004 178 Fig. 3-111
Display of the coolant temperature referred to 100 °C.

THERM: Temp. Offset Replica 004 109 Fig. 3-111
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account

and if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of
the current only. The additional reserve amounts to zero in this case.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-3

(continued)
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Output 1 State 106 010
Substation Event
GOOSE: Output 2 State 106 012
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.

GOOSE: Input 1 State 106 200
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
8-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Output 1 State 104 100
Status Events
GSSE: Output 2 State 104 103
Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-5

(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 State 105 000
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
Function keys F_KEY: State F1 080 122 Fig. 3-18

F_KEY: State F2 080 123
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:
'Without Function': No functions are assigned to the function key.

'Off': The function key is in the "Off" position.
'On': The function key is in the "On" position.
Binary input INP: State U 601 152 090 Fig. 3-19

INP: State U 602 152 093
INP: State U 603 152 096
INP: State U 604 152 099
INP: State U 605 152 102
8-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
INP: State U 606 152 105
INP: State U 701 152 108
INP: State U 702 152 111
INP: State U 703 152 114
INP: State U 704 152 117
INP: State U 705 152 120
INP: State U 706 152 123
INP: State U 801 152 126
INP: State U 802 152 129
INP: State U 803 152 132
INP: State U 804 152 135
INP: State U 1001 152 162
INP: State U 1002 152 165
INP: State U 1003 152 168
INP: State U 1004 152 171
INP: State U 1005 152 174
INP: State U 1006 152 177
INP: State U 1201 152 198
INP: State U 1202 152 201
INP: State U 1203 152 204
INP: State U 1204 152 207
INP: State U 1205 152 210
INP: State U 1206 152 213
INP: State U 1401 190 001
INP: State U 1402 190 005
INP: State U 1403 190 009
INP: State U 1404 190 013
INP: State U 1405 190 017
INP: State U 1406 190 021
INP: State U 1601 192 001
INP: State U 1602 192 005
INP: State U 1603 192 009
INP: State U 1604 192 013
INP: State U 1605 192 017
INP: State U 1606 192 021
INP: State U 2001 153 086
INP: State U 2002 153 089
INP: State U 2003 153 092
INP: State U 2004 153 095
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
'Disabled': No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.

'Low': Not energized.
'High': Energized.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode set.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-7

(continued)
Binary output OUTP: State K 601 150 120
OUTP: State K 602 150 123
OUTP: State K 1001 150 216
OUTP: State K 1002 150 219
OUTP: State K 1003 150 222
OUTP: State K 1004 150 225
OUTP: State K 1005 150 228
OUTP: State K 1006 150 231
OUTP: State K 1007 150 234
OUTP: State K 1008 150 237
OUTP: State K 1201 151 008
OUTP: State K 1202 151 011
OUTP: State K 1203 151 014
OUTP: State K 1204 151 017
OUTP: State K 1205 151 020
OUTP: State K 1206 151 023
OUTP: State K 1207 151 026
OUTP: State K 1208 151 029
OUTP: State K 1401 169 001
OUTP: State K 1402 169 005
OUTP: State K 1403 169 009
OUTP: State K 1404 169 013
OUTP: State K 1405 169 017
OUTP: State K 1406 169 021
OUTP: State K 1407 169 025
OUTP: State K 1408 169 029
OUTP: State K 1601 171 001
OUTP: State K 1602 171 005
OUTP: State K 1603 171 009
OUTP: State K 1604 171 013
OUTP: State K 1605 171 017
OUTP: State K 1606 171 021
OUTP: State K 1607 171 025
OUTP: State K 1608 171 029
OUTP: State K 1801 173 001
OUTP: State K 1802 173 005
OUTP: State K 1803 173 009
OUTP: State K 1804 173 013
OUTP: State K 1805 173 017
8-8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
OUTP: State K 1806 173 021
OUTP: State K 2001 151 200
OUTP: State K 2002 151 203
OUTP: State K 2003 151 206
OUTP: State K 2004 151 209
OUTP: State K 2005 151 212
OUTP: State K 2006 151 215
OUTP: State K 2007 151 218
OUTP: State K 2008 151 221
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
'Disabled': No functions are assigned to the output relay.

'Low': The output relay is not energized.
'High': The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the output relay mode set.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-9

(continued)
LED indicator LED: State H 1 Green 085 180 Fig. 3-34

LED: State H 2 Amber 085 000
LED: State H 3 Amber 085 003
LED: State H 4 Red 085 006 Fig. 3-34

LED: State H 5 Red 085 009
LED: State H10 Red 085 024
LED: State H17 Red. 085 181
LED: State H 4 Green 085 056 Fig. 3-34

LED: State H 5 Green 085 059
LED: State H10 Green 085 074
LED: State H23 Green 085 176 Fig. 3-34
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
'Disabled': The LED indicator is not energized.

'Enabled': The LED indicator is energized.
8-10 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
8.1.1.3 Logic state signals
User interface HMI: Illumination on EXT 037 101 Chapter 6.3

HMI: Trig. Menu Jmp 1 EXT 030 230
HMI: Trig. Menu Jmp 2 EXT 030 231
HMI: Edit Mode 080 111
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command Block. EXT 003 173 Fig. 3-6
COMM1: Sig/meas. Block EXT 037 074 Fig. 3-7, 3-8,
3-9
COMM1: Command Blocking 003 174 Fig. 3-6
COMM1: Sig/Meas. Val.Block 037 075 Fig. 3-7, 3-8,
3-9
COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 003 219 Fig. 3-7
COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 003 218 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: IEC 870-5,ILS 003 221 Fig. 3-9
COMM1: MODBUS 003 223 Fig. 3-10
COMM1: DNP3 003 230 Fig. 3-11
COMM1: COURIER 103 041 Fig. 3-12
IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Comm. Link Faulty 105 180
Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC
address is missing or there is a non-plausible setting parameter!
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: IED Link Faulty 107 250
Substation Event Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE

sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will
attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried
out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time
period at which the next state signal must be received.
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: IED Verb. Gestört 105 181
Status Events Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE

sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. To each GSSE the GSSE sending device will
attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GSSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period
at which the next state signal must be received.
IRIG-B IRIGB: Enabled 023 201 Fig. 3-17

IRIGB: Ready 023 202 Fig. 3-17
Measured data input RTDmA: Enabled 035 008 Fig. 3-20

RTDmA: PT100 Open Circuit 040 190 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: Overload 20 mA input 040 191 Fig. 3-23
RTDmA: Open Circ. 20mA inp. 040 192 Fig. 3-23
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-11

(continued)
Binary output OUTP: Block Outp.Rel. EXT 040 014 Fig. 3-26
OUTP: Reset Latch. EXT 040 015 Fig. 3-26
OUTP: Outp. Relays Blocked 021 015 Fig. 3-26
OUTP: Latching Reset 040 088 Fig. 3-26
Measured data output mA_OP: Outp. Enabled EXT 036 085 Fig. 3-29
mA_OP: Reset Output EXT 036 087 Fig. 3-30
mA_OP: Enabled 037 102 Fig. 3-28
mA_OP: Output Reset 037 117 Fig. 3-30
mA_OP: Valid BCD Value 037 050 Fig. 3-31
mA_OP: 1-dig. Bit 0 (BCD) 037 051 Fig. 3-31
mA_OP: Value A-1 Valid 069 014 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: Value A-1 Output 037 118 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: Value A-2 Valid 069 015
mA_OP: Value A-2 Output 037 119
Main function MAIN: Enable Protect. EXT 003 027 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Group Reset 1 EXT 005 209 Fig. 3-56
MAIN: Rst.Co.Cl/Tr.Cmd EXT 005 210 Fig.*: 3-56
MAIN: Group Reset 2 EXT 005 252 Fig. 3-56
MAIN: General Reset EXT 005 255 Fig. 3-2
MAIN: Disable Protect. EXT 003 026 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Time Switching EXT 003 096 Fig. 3-54
MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT 040 060 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Blocking 2 EXT 040 061 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Parallel Trip 1 EXT 037 019 Fig. 3-122
MAIN: Parallel Trip 2 EXT 037 022 Fig. 3-122
MAIN: Reset Latch.Trip EXT 040 138 Fig. 3-50
MAIN: Trip Cmd. Block. EXT 036 045 Fig. 3-51
MAIN: M.c.b. Trip V EXT 004 061 Fig. 3-88,
3-90, 3-91,
3-103, 3-105,
3-113
MAIN: En.Man.Trip Cmd. EXT 039 053 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. M-Trip Cmd1 EXT 039 054 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. M-Trip Cmd2 EXT 039 056 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. ReTrip Cmd1 EXT 039 055 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. ReTrip Cmd2 EXT 039 057 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. B-Trip Cmd1 EXT 039 107 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. B-Trip Cmd2 EXT 039 108 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: CB1 Trip EXT 044 131
MAIN: CB2 Trip EXT 044 208
MAIN: Test Mode EXT 037 070 Fig. 3-58

MAIN: Reset Indicat. EXT 065 001 Fig. 3-55
MAIN: Min-Pulse Clock EXT 060 060 Fig. 3-54
8-12 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
MAIN: Healthy 060 001
Signal that the protection unit is operational. As a standard this signal is

linked to L E D : F c t . A s s i g . H 1 G r e e n .
MAIN: Prot. Ext. Enabled 003 028 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Prot. Ext. Disabled 038 046 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Protect. Not Ready 004 060 Fig. 3-43
MAIN: Test Mode 037 071 Fig. 3-58
MAIN: Blocked/Faulty 004 065 Fig. 3-43
MAIN: Trip Cmd. Blocked 021 013 Fig. 3-51
MAIN: Latch.Trip Cmd Reset 040 139 Fig. 3-50
MAIN: Enable Man. Trip Cmd 039 080 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. M-Trip Signal 1 039 081 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. M-Trip Signal 2 039 084 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. ReTrip Signal 1 039 082 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. ReTrip Signal 2 039 085 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. B-Trip Signal 1 039 083 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Man. B-Trip Signal 2 039 098 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 036 251 Fig. 3-53
MAIN: Main-Trip Signal 1 039 101 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: Main-Trip Signal 2 039 102 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: Re-Trip Signal 1 039 103 Fig. 3-47
MAIN: Re-Trip Signal 2 039 104 Fig. 3-47
MAIN: Back-Trip Signal 1 039 105 Fig. 3-48
MAIN: Back-Trip Signal 2 039 106 Fig. 3-48
MAIN: Main-Trip Command 1 039 011 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: Main-Trip Command 2 039 058 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: Re-Trip Command 1 039 012 Fig. 3-47
MAIN: Re-Trip Command 2 039 059 Fig. 3-47
MAIN: Back-Trip Command 1 039 013 Fig. 3-48
MAIN: Back-Trip Command 2 039 060 Fig. 3-48
MAIN: General Start 036 000 Fig. 3-45
MAIN: Fault Forward 036 018 Fig. 3-44
MAIN: Fault Reverse 036 019 Fig. 3-44
MAIN: CB Failure 036 017 Fig. 3-122
MAIN: Disabled 060 000
MAIN: Disabled 061 000
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-13

(continued)
Setting group selection GROUP: Control Via User EXT 036 101 Fig. 3-59
GROUP: Activate Grp 1 EXT 065 002 Fig. 3-59
GROUP: Control Via User 036 102 Fig. 3-59
GROUP: Ext.Sel. Settg. Grp 003 061 Fig. 3-59
GROUP: Grp1 Activated Ext. 036 094 Fig. 3-59
GROUP: Actual Setting Group 003 062 Fig. 3-59
GROUP: Group 1 Active 036 090 Fig. 3-59
Self-monitoring CHECK: Alarm (LED) 036 070 Fig. 3-60

(see also Chapter 10) CHECK: Alarm (Relay) 036 100 Fig. 3-60
CHECK: Warm Restart Exec. 041 202
CHECK: Cold Restart Exec. 041 201
CHECK: Cold Restart 093 024
CHECK: Cold Rest /SW Update 093 025
CHECK: Blocking /HW Failure 090 019
CHECK: Relay Kxx Faulty 041 200
CHECK: Hardware Clock Fail 093 040
CHECK: Battery Failure 090 010
CHECK: Invalid SW DnLoaded 096 121
CHECK: +15V Supply Faulty 093 081
CHECK: -15V Supply Faulty 093 080
CHECK: Wrong Module Slot 1 096 100
CHECK: Defect.Module Slot 1 097 000
CHECK: Defect.Module Slot10 097 009
CHECK: Module A DPR Faulty 093 070
CHECK: Module A RAM Faulty 093 071
CHECK: Module Y DPR Faulty 093 110
CHECK: Module Y RAM Faulty 093 111
8-14 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
CHECK: IRIGB faulty 093 117
CHECK: Error K 801 097 086
CHECK: Undefined Op Code 093 010
CHECK: Invalid Op 093 011
CHECK: Undefined Interrupt 093 012
CHECK: Exception Oper.Syst. 093 013
CHECK: Protection Failure 090 021
CHECK: Checksum Sett Error 090 003
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-15

(continued)
CHECK: Clock Sync. Error 093 041
CHECK: Interm Volt Fail RAM 093 026
CHECK: Overflow MT_RC 090 012 Fig. 3-62

CHECK: Semaph. MT_RC Block. 093 015
CHECK: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. Y 093 113
CHECK: Time-out Module Y 093 112
CHECK: Matching Fail. End a 098 031 Fig. 3-75

CHECK: Matching Fail. End b 098 032 Fig. 3-75
CHECK: Match.Factor Invalid 098 033 Fig. 3-75
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers DHMI 093 145
CHECK: CTA Error 098 034 Fig. 3-110

CHECK: Setting Error THERM 098 035 Fig. 3-111
CHECK: Setting Error CBM_1 098 020
CHECK: CB1 No. CB Op. > 098 066
CHECK: CB2 No. CB op. > 098 079
CHECK: CB1 Rem. No. CB op.< 098 067
CHECK: CB2 Rem. No. CB Op.< 098 085
CHECK: CB1 –Itrip > 098 068
CHECK: CB1 –Itrip**2 > 098 069
CHECK: CB1 tmax> A 098 070
CHECK: CB1 tmax> C 098 077
CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-1 093 114 Fig. 3-33

CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-2 093 115
CHECK: Invalid Scaling IDC 093 116 Fig. 3-23

CHECK: PT100 Open Circuit 098 024 Fig. 3-25
CHECK: Overload 20 mA input 098 025 Fig. 3-23
CHECK: Open Circ. 20mA inp. 098 026 Fig. 3-23
CHECK: Setting Error f<> 098 028 Fig. 3-120
CHECK: Inv Inp f Clock Sync 093 120
CHECK: Output 30 098 053
CHECK: Output 30 (t) 098 054
Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset Record. EXT 005 213 Fig. 3-56
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Reset Record. EXT 005 240 Fig.*: 3-56
Overload recording OL_RC: Reset Record. EXT 005 241 Fig.*: 3-56
OL_RC: Record. in Progress 035 003 Fig. 3-65
OL_RC: Overl. Mem. Overflow 035 007 Fig. 3-66
8-16 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Fault recording OSCIL: Reset Record. EXT 005 243 Fig.*: 3-56
OSCIL: Trigger EXT 036 089 Fig. 3-71
OSCIL: Trigger 037 076 Fig. 3-71
OSCIL: I> Triggered, End a 035 014 Fig. 3-71
OSCIL: I> Triggered, End b 035 015 Fig. 3-71
OSCIL: Id> Triggered 035 018 Fig. 3-71
OSCIL: IN> Triggered 035 017 Fig. 3-71
OSCIL: Record. in Progress 035 000 Fig. 3-71
OSCIL: System Disturb. Runn 035 004 Fig. 3-71
OSCIL: Fault Mem. Overflow 035 001 Fig. 3-72
OSCIL: Faulty Time Tag 035 002
Differential protection DIFF: Enabled 041 210 Fig. 3-74

DIFF: Ready 041 216 Fig. 3-74
DIFF: Not Ready 041 217 Fig. 3-74
DIFF: Inrush Stabil.Trigg. 041 127 Fig. 3-79
DIFF: Harm.Block. 1 Trigg. 041 118 Fig. 3-79
DIFF: Harm.Block. 2 Trigg. 041 119 Fig. 3-79
DIFF: Sat.Detect.Triggered 041 012 Fig. 3-80
DIFF: Sat.Discr. 1 Trigg. 041 115 Fig. 3-80
DIFF: Sat.Discr. 2 Trigg. 041 116 Fig. 3-80
DIFF: Trip Signal 041 075 Fig. 3-78
DIFF: Trip Signal 1 041 002 Fig. 3-78
DIFF: Trip Signal 2 041 003 Fig. 3-78
DIFF: Matching Fail. End a 041 213 Fig. 3-75
DIFF: Matching Fail. End b 041 214 Fig. 3-75
DIFF: Match.Factor Invalid 041 215 Fig. 3-75
Transverse differential DIF_a: Enabled 041 130 Fig. 3-81

protection, end a DIF_a: Trip Signal 041 211 Fig. 3-83
Transverse differential DIF_b: Enabled 041 131 Fig. 3-81

protection, end b DIF_b: Trip Signal 041 212 Fig. 3-83
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-17

(continued)
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC1: Blocking tI> EXT 035 120 Fig. 3-87
protection 1 DTOC1: Blocking tI>> EXT 035 121 Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: Enabled 035 102 Fig. 3-84
DTOC1: Starting I> 035 108 Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: Starting I>> 035 109 Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: tI> Elapsed 035 098 Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: Phase A Triggered 035 104 Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: tI>> Elapsed 035 099 Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI> 035 114 Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI>> 035 115 Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: Phase C Triggered 035 105 Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: Inrush Stabil.Trigg. 035 127 Fig. 3-86
DTOC1: Dir.Meas. I> Blocked 035 080 Fig. 3-90
DTOC1: Meas. I> Non-Direct. 035 077 Fig. 3-90
DTOC1: Fault I> Forward 035 137 Fig. 3-88
DTOC1: Power Flow I> Forw. 035 223 Fig. 3-88
DTOC1: Fault I> Reverse 035 140 Fig. 3-88
DTOC1: Power Flow I> Rev. 035 224 Fig. 3-88
DTOC1: Dir.Meas. I>> block. 035 133 Fig. 3-90
DTOC1: Meas. I>> Non-direct 035 078 Fig. 3-91
DTOC1: Fault I>> Forward 035 147 Fig. 3-88
DTOC1: Power Flow I>> Forw. 035 227 Fig. 3-88
DTOC1: Fault I>> Reverse 035 148 Fig. 3-88
DTOC1: Power Flow I>> Rev. 035 228 Fig. 3-88
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC2: Blocking tI> EXT 035 150 Fig. 3-92
protection 2 DTOC2: Blocking tI>> EXT 035 151 Fig. 3-92
DTOC2: Enabled 035 132 Fig. 3-84
DTOC2: Starting I> 035 138 Fig. 3-92
DTOC2: Starting I>> 035 139 Fig. 3-92
DTOC2: Starting Phase A 035 134 Fig. 3-92
DTOC2: Starting Phase C 035 135 Fig. 3-92
DTOC2: Trip Signal tI> 035 144 Fig. 3-92
DTOC2: Trip Signal tI>> 035 145 Fig. 3-92
DTOC2: Inrush Stabil.Trigg. 035 157 Fig. 3-86
Definite-time overcurrent DTOCN: Block. tIN>H EXT 035 201 Fig. 3-94
protection DTOCN: Enabled 035 192 Fig. 3-93
DTOCN: Starting IN>H 035 195 Fig. 3-94
DTOCN: Trip Signal tIN>H 035 198 Fig. 3-94
8-18 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT: Block. tIref> EXT 040 101 Fig. 3-102
protection IDMT: Enabled 040 100 Fig. 3-95
IDMT: Starting Iref> 040 080 Fig. 3-102
IDMT: Phase A Triggered 038 117 Fig. 3-102
IDMT: tIB> Elapsed 040 082 Fig. 3-102
IDMT: Phase C Triggered 038 118 Fig. 3-102
IDMT: Trip Signal tIref> 040 084 Fig. 3-102
IDMT: Hold Time Running 040 053 Fig. 3-102
IDMT: Inrush Stabil.Trigg. 040 118 Fig. 3-101
IDMT: Buffer Empty 040 110 Fig. 3-102
IDMT: Dir. Meas. Blocked 041 006 Fig. 3-105
IDMT: Meas.Non-Directional 041 007 Fig. 3-105
IDMT: Fault Forward 041 008 Fig. 3-103
IDMT: Power Flow Forward 041 017 Fig. 3-103
IDMT: Fault Reverse 041 009 Fig. 3-103
IDMT: Power Flow Reverse 041 018 Fig. 3-103
Thermal overload protection THERM: Replica Block EXT 041 074 Fig. 3-107
THERM: CTA Error EXT 038 062 Fig. 3-110
THERM: Reset Replica EXT 038 061 Fig. 3-112
THERM: Enabled 040 068 Fig. 3-107
THERM: Not Ready 040 035 Fig. 3-107
THERM: Reclosure Blocked 039 024 Fig. 3-111
THERM: Starting k*Iref> 041 108 Fig. 3-111
THERM: Trip Signal 039 020 Fig. 3-111
THERM: Reset Replica 039 061 Fig. 3-112
THERM: Buffer Empty 039 112 Fig. 3-111
THERM: CTA Error 039 111 Fig. 3-110
THERM: Within Pre-trip Time 041 109 Fig. 3-111
THERM: Alarm 039 025 Fig. 3-111
THERM: Setting Error,Block. 039 110 Fig. 3-111
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-19

(continued)
Time-voltage protection V<>: Blocking tV> EXT 041 068 Fig. 3-114
V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT 041 069 Fig. 3-114
V<>: Blocking tV< EXT 041 070 Fig. 3-115
V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT 041 071 Fig. 3-115
V<>: Enabled 040 066 Fig. 3-113
V<>: Ready 042 003 Fig. 3-113
V<>: Not Ready 042 004 Fig. 3-113
V<>: Starting V> 041 030 Fig. 3-114
V<>: Starting V>> 041 096 Fig. 3-114
V<>: Starting V< 041 037 Fig. 3-115
V<>: Starting V<< 041 099 Fig. 3-115
V<>: tV> Elapsed 041 034 Fig. 3-114
V<>: tV>> Elapsed 041 035 Fig. 3-114
V<>: tV< Elapsed 041 041 Fig. 3-115
V<>: tV< Elapsed & Vmin 041 026 Fig. 3-115
V<>: tV< Elaps. Transient 042 023 Fig. 3-115
V<>: tV<< Elapsed 041 042 Fig. 3-115
V<>: tV<< Elapsed & Vmin 041 066 Fig. 3-115
V<>: tV<< Elapsed Trans. 042 025 Fig. 3-115
V<>: Fault V< 041 110 Fig. 3-115
V<>: Fault V<< 041 112 Fig. 3-115
V<>: tV</<< Elaps. Trans. 042 007 Fig. 3-115
Over-/ Underfrequency f<>: Blocking f1 EXT 042 103 Fig. 3-120

Protection f<>: Blocking f2 EXT 042 104
f<>: Blocking f3 EXT 042 105
f<>: Blocking f4 EXT 042 106
f<>: Enabled 042 100 Fig. 3-116

f<>: Ready 042 101 Fig. 3-116
f<>: Not Ready 042 140 Fig. 3-116
f<>: Blocked by V< 042 102 Fig. 3-118
f<>: Starting f1 042 107 Fig. 3-120
f<>: Starting f1/df1 042 108 Fig. 3-120
f<>: Delta f1 Triggered 042 109 Fig. 3-120
f<>: Delta t1 Elapsed 042 110 Fig. 3-120
f<>: Starting f2 042 115
f<>: Starting f2/df2 042 116
f<>: Delta f2 Triggered 042 117
f<>: Delta t2 Elapsed 042 118
f<>: Trip Signal f1 042 111 Fig. 3-120

f<>: Trip Signal f2 042 119
8-20 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Circuit breaker failure CBF_1: CB Closed Sig. EXT 036 107 Fig. 3-122
protection, channel 1 CBF_1: Enabled 040 055 Fig. 3-121
CBF_1: CB Superv. Signal 039 000 Fig. 3-122
CBF_1: Failure Main-Trip 039 021 Fig. 3-122
CBF_1: Failure Re-Trip 036 056 Fig. 3-122
CBF_1: Re-Trip Signal 039 022 Fig. 3-122
CBF_1: B-trip Signal 039 023 Fig. 3-122
CBF_1: Timer tBF1 Running 036 066 Fig. 3-122
CBF_1: CB Failure 006 051
Circuit breaker failure CBF_2: CB Closed Sig. EXT 036 108 Fig. 3-122
protection, channel 2 CBF_2: Enabled 040 048 Fig. 3-121
CBF_2: CB Superv. Signal 039 039 Fig. 3-122
CBF_2: Failure Main-Trip 036 059 Fig. 3-122
CBF_2: Failure Re-Trip 036 106 Fig. 3-122
CBF_2: Re-Trip Signal 040 089 Fig. 3-122
CBF_2: B-trip Signal 040 104 Fig. 3-122
CBF_2: CB Failure 006 052
Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_1: Reset Meas.Val. EXT 005 247 Fig.*: 3-56
Channel 1 CBM_1: Blocking EXT 044 128 Fig. 3-132
CBM_1: Enabled 044 130 Fig. 3-124
CBM_1: Blocked 044 199 Fig. 3-132
CBM_1: Setting Error CBM_1 044 204 Page: 3-171
CBM_1: Cycle Running A 044 205 Fig. 3-127
CBM_1: Cycle Running C 044 207 Fig. 3-127,
3-129
CBM_1: Sig. No. CB op. > 044 135 Fig. 3-131
CBM_1: Sig. Rem. No.CB op.< 044 136 Fig. 3-130
CBM_1: Signal –Itrip> 044 137
CBM_1: Signal –Itrip**2> 044 138
CBM_1: Signal –I*t> 044 139
CBM_1: tmax> A 044 177 Fig. 3-127

CBM_1: tmax> C 044 179 Fig. 3-127
CBM_1: Curr. Flow Ended A 044 201 Fig. 3-127
CBM_1: Curr. Flow Ended C 044 203 Fig. 3-127
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-21

(continued)
Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_2: Reset Meas.Val. EXT 007 111 Fig.*: 3-56
Channel 2 CBM_2: Blocking EXT 007 112 Fig. 3-132
CBM_2: Enabled 007 113 Fig. 3-124
CBM_2: Blocked 007 116 Fig. 3-132
CBM_2: Setting Error CBM_2 007 126 Page: 3-171
CBM_2: Cycle Running A 007 114
CBM_2: Cycle Running C 007 115
CBM_2: Sig. No. CB op. > 007 117 Fig. 3-131

CBM_2: Sig. Rem. No.CB op.< 007 118 Fig. 3-130
CBM_2: Signal –Itrip> 007 119
CBM_2: Signal –Itrip**2> 007 120
CBM_2: Signal –I*t> 007 127
CBM_2: tmax> A 007 122
CBM_2: tmax> C 007 123
CBM_2: Curr. Flow Ended A 007 124
CBM_2: Curr. Flow Ended C 007 125
Limit value monitoring LIMIT: Enabled 040 074 Fig. 3-133

LIMIT: tIA> Elapsed 040 147 Fig. 3-135
LIMIT: tIA>> Elapsed 040 148 Fig. 3-135
LIMIT: tIB> Elapsed 040 122 Fig. 3-135
LIMIT: tIB>> Elapsed 040 151 Fig. 3-135
LIMIT: tIN> Elapsed 040 153 Fig. 3-136
LIMIT: tIN>> Elapsed 040 154 Fig. 3-136
LIMIT: tV> Elapsed 040 140 Fig. 3-137
LIMIT: tV>> Elapsed 040 141 Fig. 3-137
LIMIT: tV< Elapsed 040 142 Fig. 3-137
LIMIT: tV<< Elapsed 040 143 Fig. 3-137
LIMIT: tV> & tV< Elapsed 040 144 Fig. 3-137
LIMIT: tV>> & tV<< elapsed 040 145 Fig. 3-137
LIMIT: tf> Elapsed 040 196 Fig. 3-138
LIMIT: tf>> Elapsed 040 197 Fig. 3-138
LIMIT: tf< Elapsed 040 198 Fig. 3-138
LIMIT: tf<< Elapsed 040 199 Fig. 3-138
LIMIT: Starting ID,Clin> 040 180 Fig. 3-133
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>> 040 181 Fig. 3-133
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> Elapsed 040 182 Fig. 3-133
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> Elapsed 040 183 Fig. 3-133
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin< 040 184 Fig. 3-133
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<< 040 185 Fig. 3-133
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< Elapsed 040 186 Fig. 3-133
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< Elapsed 040 187 Fig. 3-133
LIMIT: Starting T> 040 170 Fig. 3-134
LIMIT: Starting T>> 040 171 Fig. 3-134
LIMIT: tT> Elapsed 040 172 Fig. 3-134
LIMIT: tT>> Elapsed 040 173 Fig. 3-134
LIMIT: Starting T< 040 174 Fig. 3-134
LIMIT: Starting T<< 040 175 Fig. 3-134
LIMIT: tT< Elapsed 040 176 Fig. 3-134
LIMIT: tT<< Elapsed 040 177 Fig. 3-134
8-22 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Logic LOGIC: Input 1 EXT 034 000 Fig. 3-141

LOGIC: Input 2 EXT 034 001
LOGIC: Input 16 EXT 034 015 Fig. 3-141

LOGIC: Set 1 EXT 034 051 Fig. 3-140
LOGIC: Set 2 EXT 034 052
LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT 034 059 Fig. 3-140

LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT 034 060
LOGIC: Enabled 034 046 Fig. 3-141

LOGIC: 1 Has Been Set 034 067 Fig. 3-140
LOGIC: 2 Has Been Set 034 068
LOGIC: 1 Set Externally 034 075 Fig. 3-140

LOGIC: 2 Set Externally 034 076
LOGIC: Output 1 042 032 Fig. 3-141

LOGIC: Output 1 (t) 042 033 Fig. 3-141
LOGIC: Output 2 042 034
LOGIC: Output 2 (t) 042 035
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-23

(continued)
8-24 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-25

(continued)
8.1.2 Control and testing
Device DVICE: Service Info 031 080 031 080
User interface HMI: Param. Change Enabl. 003 010
To allow settings to be changed from the user interface (HMI).
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Sel.Spontan.Sig.Test 003 180 Fig. 3-13
Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM1: Test Spont.Sig.Start 003 184 Fig. 3-13
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘start‘).
COMM1: Test Spont.Sig. End 003 186 Fig. 3-13
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘end‘).
Communication interface 2 COMM2: Sel.Spontan.Sig.Test 103 180 Fig. 3-15
Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM2: Test Spont.Sig.Start 103 184 Fig. 3-15
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘start‘).
COMM2: Test Spont.Sig. End 103 186 Fig. 3-15
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘end‘).
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Reset Statistics 105 171
Status Events Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below.

GSSE: Enroll. IEDs Flags L 105 160
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to
16).
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs Flags H 105 161
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to
32).
GSSE: Tx Message Counter 105 162
Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Reset counters.
GSSE: Rx Message Counter 105 163
Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Reset counters.
GSSE: No. Bin.State Chang. 105 164
Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Reset Statistics.
GSSE: Tx Last Sequence 105 165
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent
with each GSSE.
8-26 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
GSSE: Tx Last Message 105 166
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each
GSSE.
GSSE: No. Reject. Messages 105 167
Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible

message content. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t S t a t i s t i c s .
GSSE: IED View Selection 105 170
Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is
to be displayed.
GSSE: IED Receiv. Messages 105 172
Counter of the received GSSE telegrams.

GSSE: IED Rx Last Sequence 105 173
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received
with each GSSE.
GSSE: IED Rx Last Message 105 174
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with
each GSSE.
GSSE: IED Missed Messages 105 175
Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t S t a t i s t i c s .
GSSE: IED Missed Changes 105 176
Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t S t a t i s t i c s .
GSSE: IED Time-Outs 105 177
Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed. This
counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t S t a t i s t i c s .
Binary output OUTP: Reset Latch. USER 021 009 Fig. 3-26
Reset of latched output relays from the user interface.

OUTP: Relay Assign. f.Test 003 042 Fig. 3-27
Selection of the relay to be tested.

OUTP: Relay Test 003 043 Fig. 3-27
The output relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration of the set
time ( O U T P : H o l d - T i m e f o r t e s t ).
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-

Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
OUTP: Hold-Time for Test 003 044 Fig. 3-27
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for
functional testing.
mA_OP: Reset Output USER 037 116 Fig. 3-30
Resetting the measured data output function.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-27

(continued)
Main function MAIN: General Reset USER 003 002 Fig. 3-55
Reset of the following memories:

All counters
LED indicators
Operating data memory
All event memories
Event counters
Fault data
Measured overload data
Recorded fault values
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-
Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Reset Indicat. USER 021 010 Fig. 3-55
Reset of the following displays:

LED indicators
Fault data
MAIN: Rset Latch Trip USER 021 005 Fig. 3-50
Reset of latched trip commands from the user interface.

MAIN: Rst.C.Cl/Tr.Cmd USER 003 007 Fig.*: 3-56
The counters for counting the close and trip commands are reset.
MAIN: Group Reset 1 USER 005 253 Fig. 3-56
MAIN: Group Reset 2 USER 005 254 Fig. 3-56
Group of resetting commands.

MAIN: Man.M-Trip Cmd1 USER 003 065 Fig. 3-49
A trip command is issued from the front panel HMI for the 100 ms. This
setting is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected
Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Man.M-Trip Cmd2 USER 003 082 Fig. 3-49
A trip command is issued from the front panel HMI for the 100 ms. This
MAIN: Man.ReTrip Cmd1 USER 003 066 Fig. 3-49
A trip command is issued from the user interface (HMI) for the 100 ms. This
Note: This command is not executed unless the manual trip has been
configured as re-trip command.
MAIN: Man.ReTrip Cmd2 USER 003 083 Fig. 3-49
configured as a re-trip command 2.
8-28 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
MAIN: Man.B-Trip Cmd1 USER 003 067 Fig. 3-49
configured as a back-trip command.
MAIN: Man.B-Trip Cmd2 USER 003 087 Fig. 3-49
configured as a back-trip command 2.
MAIN: Warm Restart 003 039
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the
power supply is turned on.
MAIN: Cold Restart 000 085
A cold restart is executed. This setting is password-protected (see section

entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). A cold
restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. The values with
which the device operates after a cold restart are selected so as to block
the device after a cold restart.
MAIN: En.Man.Trip Cmd.USER 003 064 Fig. 3-49
Enabling of manual trip commands from the local control panel.
Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset Record. USER 100 001 Fig. 3-61
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Reset Record. USER 003 008 Fig. 3-62
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording OL_RC: Reset Record. USER 100 003 Fig. 3-66
Reset of the overload memory.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-29

(continued)
Fault recording OSCIL: Trigger USER 003 041 Fig. 3-71
To manually trigger fault recording from the user interface for a "fault"
window of 500 ms.
OSCIL: Reset Record. USER 003 006 Fig. 3-72
Reset of the following memories:

LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Recorded fault values
Thermal overload protection THERM: Reset Replica USER 022 061 Fig. 3-112
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_1: Initialize Values 003 011
Channel 1 Setting default values.

CBM_1: Reset Meas.Val. USER 003 013 Fig.*: 3-56
Resetting the measured value memories.

CBM_1: Set No. CB Oper. A 022 131 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Set No. CB Oper. C 022 133 Fig. 3-129
Set the number of CB operations.

CBM_1: Set Remain. CB Op. A 022 134 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Set Remain. CB Op. C 022 136 Fig. 3-129
Set the remaining CB operations.

CBM_1: Set –Itrip A 022 137 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Set –Itrip C 022 139 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Set –Itrip**2 A 022 140 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Set –Itrip**2 C 022 142 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Set –I*t A 022 143 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Set –I*t C 022 145 Fig. 3-129
Set the limit values for the ruptured currents and their squares. (An alarm is
displayed if these limit values are exceeded.)
8-30 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_2: Initialize Values 007 128
Channel 2 Setting default values.

CBM_2: Reset Meas.Val. USER 007 129 Fig.*: 3-56
Resetting the measured value memories.

CBM_2: Set No. CB Oper. A 007 130
CBM_2: Set No. CB Oper. C 007 131

CBM_2: Set Remain. CB Op. A 007 132
CBM_2: Set Remain. CB Op. C 007 133

CBM_2: Set –Itrip A 007 134
CBM_2: Set –Itrip C 007 135
CBM_2: Set –Itrip**2 A 007 136
CBM_2: Set –Itrip**2 C 007 137
CBM_2: Set –I*t A 007 138
CBM_2: Set –I*t C 007 139
Set the limit values for the ruptured currents and their squares. (An alarm is
displayed if these limit values are exceeded.)
Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1 034 038 Fig. 3-141

LOGIC: Trigger 2 034 039
LOGIC: Trigger 8 034 045 Fig. 3-141
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.
8.1.3 Operating data recording
Operating data recording OP_RC: Operat. Data Record. 003 024 Fig. 3-61
Point of entry into the operating data log.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Mon. Signal Record. 003 001 Fig. 3-62
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-31

(continued)
8.2 Fault and Event Records
8.2.1 Event Counters
Main function MAIN: No. General Start. 004 000 Fig. 3-45
Number of general starting signals.

MAIN: No. Main-Trip 1 Cmds 009 005 Fig. 3-52
Number of main-trip commands.

MAIN: No. Main-Trip 2 Cmds 009 027 Fig. 3-52
Number of main-trip 2 commands.

MAIN: No. Re-Trip 1 Cmds 009 006 Fig. 3-52
Number of re-trip commands.

MAIN: No. Re-Trip 2 Cmds 009 028 Fig. 3-52
Number of re-trip 2 commands.

MAIN: No. Back-Trip 1 Cmds 009 007 Fig. 3-52
Number of back-trip commands.

MAIN: No. Back-Trip 2 Cmds 009 029 Fig. 3-52
Number of back-trip 2 commands.
Operating data recording OP_RC: No. Oper. Data Sig. 100 002 Fig. 3-61
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: No. Monit. Signals 004 019 Fig. 3-62
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording OL_RC: No. Overload 004 101 Fig. 3-65
Number of overload events.
Fault recording OSCIL: No. of Faults 004 020 Fig. 3-71
Number of faults.
OSCIL: No. System Disturb. 004 010 Fig. 3-71
Number of system disturbances (starts).
Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_1: No. of CB Oper. A 008 011 Fig. 3-129
Channel 1 CBM_1: No. of CB Oper. C 008 013 Fig. 3-129
Number of mechanical switching operations made.

CBM_1: Remain. No. CB op. A 008 014 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Remain. No. CB op. C 008 016 Fig. 3-129
Number of remaining switching operations (as shown by evaluating wear

with reference to the CB wear characteristic).
8-32 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_2: No. of CB Oper. A 007 142
Channel 2 CBM_2: No. of CB Oper. C 007 143
Number of mechanical switching operations made.

CBM_2: Remain. No. CB op. A 007 144
CBM_2: Remain. No. CB op. C 007 145
Number of remaining switching operations (as shown by evaluating wear

with reference to the CB wear characteristic).
8.2.2 Measured Event Data
Overload data acquisition OL_DA: Overload Duration 004 102 Fig. 3-63
Duration of the overload event.

OL_DA: Status THERM replica 004 147 Fig. 3-64
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

OL_DA: Load Current THERM 004 058 Fig. 3-64
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function
to calculate the tripping time.
OL_DA: Object Temp. THERM 004 035 Fig. 3-64
Display of the temperature of the protected object.

OL_DA: Coolant Temp. THERM 004 036 Fig. 3-64
Display of coolant temperature. Depending on the setting at

T H ER M : Se l e c t C T Am b i e n t for coolant temperature acquisition, one
of the following values will be displayed:
When set to 'Default Temp. Value' the set temperature value will be
displayed. When set to 'From PT100' the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer will be displayed. When set to 'From 20 mA Input'
the temperature measured via a 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
OL_DA: Pre-Trip t.LeftTHERM 004 148 Fig. 3-64
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold ("time-to-trip").
OL_DA: Offset THERM Replica 004 154 Fig. 3-64
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into

account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to
a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other
words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant

temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature
is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the current
only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-33

(continued)
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Fault Duration 008 010 Fig. 3-67
Display of the fault duration.

FT_DA: Running Time 004 021 Fig. 3-67
Display of the running time.

FT_DA: Fault Determ. with 004 198 Fig. 3-68,
3-76
Display of the protection element/zone that has identified the fault.
FT_DA: Run Time to Meas. 004 199 Fig. 3-68,
3-76
Display of the fault data acquisition time from the onset of the fault.
FT_DA: Fault Current N p.u. 004 107 Fig. 3-69
Display of the ground fault current referred to IN,n.

FT_DA: Fault Curr.IA,a p.u. 004 116 Fig. 3-69
Display of the fault current in phase A, end a, referred to In.

FT_DA: Fault Curr.IC,a p.u. 004 117 Fig. 3-69
Display of the fault current in phase C, end a, referred to In.

FT_DA: Fault Curr.IA,b p.u. 004 118 Fig. 3-69
Display of the fault current in phase A, end b, referred to In.

FT_DA: Fault Curr.IC,b p.u. 004 119 Fig. 3-69
Display of the fault current in phase C, end b, referred to In.

FT_DA: Diff Current 1 005 082 Fig. 3-70

FT_DA: Diff Current 1(2*fn) 005 084 Fig. 3-70
Display of second harmonic in differential current, measuring system 1,

referred to Iref.
FT_DA: Restrain Current 1 005 083 Fig. 3-70

FT_DA: Diff Current 2 006 082 Fig. 3-70

FT_DA: Diff Current 2(2*fn) 006 084 Fig. 3-70
Display of second harmonic in differential current, measuring system 2,

referred to Iref.
FT_DA: Restrain Current 2 006 083 Fig. 3-70

FT_DA: Faultvoltage p.u. 004 108 Fig. 3-69
Display of the fault voltage referred to Vn.
8-34 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_1: Itrip,prim A 009 212 Fig. 3-129

Channel 1 CBM_1: Itrip,prim C 009 214 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Itrip A 009 047 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Itrip C 009 049 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Itrip**2 A 009 051 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: Itrip**2 C 009 053 Fig. 3-129
Ruptured currents and their squared values.

CBM_1: –Itrip A 009 071 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: –Itrip C 009 076 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: –Itrip**2 A 009 077 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: –Itrip**2 C 009 079 Fig. 3-129
CBM_1: I*t A 009 061
CBM_1: I*t C 009 063
CBM_1: –I*t A 009 087 Fig. 3-129

CBM_1: –I*t C 009 089 Fig. 3-129
Sum of the ruptured currents and of their squared values.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring, CBM_2: Itrip,prim A 007 148
Channel 2 CBM_2: Itrip,prim C 007 149
CBM_2: Itrip A 007 150
CBM_2: Itrip C 007 151
CBM_2: Itrip**2 A 007 152
CBM_2: Itrip**2 C 007 153
Ruptured currents and their squared values.

CBM_2: –Itrip A 007 154
CBM_2: –Itrip C 007 155
CBM_2: –Itrip**2 A 007 156
CBM_2: –Itrip**2 C 007 157
CBM_2: I*t A 007 158
CBM_2: I*t C 007 159
CBM_2: –I*t A 007 166
CBM_2: –I*t C 007 167
Sum of the ruptured currents and of their squared values.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 8-35

(continued)
8.2.3 Event Recording
Overload recording OL_RC: Overload Recording 1 033 020 Fig. 3-66

OL_RC: Overload Recording 2 033 021 Fig. 3-66
Point of entry into the overload log.
Fault recording OSCIL: Fault Recording 1 003 000 Fig. 3-72

OSCIL: Fault Recording 2 033 001 Fig. 3-72
Point of entry into the fault log.
8-36 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
9 Commissioning
9.1 Introduction
Easergy MiCOM P638 transformer protection relays are fully numerical in their design,
implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays employ
a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm.
As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with
non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is

functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to
the relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings
have been verified by one of the following methods:
Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software
(preferred method – using MiCOM S1)
Via the operator interface
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for
determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the relay and for testing of
any scheme logic applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the relay’s internal
programmable scheme logic.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with
the contents of the Technical Data section and the ratings on the equipment’s
rating label.
The Easergy MiCOM P638 relay must not be disassembled in any way during
commissioning.
9.2 Product Familiarisation
Settings
When commissioning a P638 relay for the first time, sufficient time should be
allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied.
With the secondary front cover in place all keys except the key are accessible. With
the cover fitted, no protection or configuration settings can be changed.
Removing the secondary front cover allows access to all keys so that settings can be
changed, LED’s and alarms reset, and fault and event records cleared. However, for
setting and configuration cells, the appropriate password has to be entered before
changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

MiCOM S1), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of data
and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file
on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC
software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow
sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-1

Commissioning
(continued)
Reference to Menu
Addresses
To simplify the specifying of menu cell locations in these Commissioning Instructions,
they will be given in the form [menu address: FUNCTION GROUP, Cell Description].
For example, the cell for selecting the menu language (first cell in the function group) is
located in the menu under Parameters… Config Parameters… Local HMI (abbreviated
LOC) so it would be given as [003.020: Config/LOC, Language].
THESE INSTRUCTIONS ASSUME THAT THE MENU LANGUAGE WILL BE CHANGED
FROM THE FACTORY SUPPLIED REFERENCE TO THE ENGLISH 2nd LANGUAGE,
set at address 003.020.
When using MiCOM S1 software, the toolbar command Edit… Find… can be used to
jump directly to a chosen address.
Module Positions
Each internal circuit board/module has its connections terminated at a block on the rear
of the relay. The slot position of each module is numbered from 01 to 20, with slot 01 on
the left, and slot 20 at the right (viewed from rear). Each module also has a generic
alpha identifier: A, T, V, X, Y used in documentation, used to abbreviate its purpose (e.g.
V denotes a power supply module).
Terminal References
All terminals are prefixed by identifier X, and then a numeric location. The first two digits
of the location denote the module slot position as described above. Thus, X20nn would
be connection number “nn” for the terminal block in slot 20.
9.3 Equipment Required for Commissioning
Minimum Equipment
Required
Multifunctional current and voltage injection test set.
Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0 – 300V.
Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter)
Optional Equipment
Multi-finger test plug type P992 (if test block type P991 installed) or MMLB (if using
MMLG blocks)
An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance testing when required).
A portable PC, with appropriate MiCOM S1 software (this enables the rear
communications port to be tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable
time during commissioning).
EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 converter, if rear communications ports COMM1 and

COMM2 are to be tested. Example converter is AREVA type CK222.
A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).
9-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.4 Product Checks
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure
that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly
and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning,
it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their restoration later. This
could be done by:
Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (this requires a portable PC
with appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to the relay)
Extracting the settings from the relay itself (this again requires a portable PC with
appropriate setting software)
With the Relay

De-Energised
The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being
applied to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated.
The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for
these checks. If a P991 or MMLG test block is provided, the required isolation can easily
be achieved by inserting test plug type P992 / MMLB which effectively open-circuits all
wiring routed through the test block.
Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring) diagram
to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard. For example,
the test block may be associated with protection current transformer circuits. It is
essential that the sockets in the test plug that correspond to the current transformer
secondary windings be shorted. In the case of an MMLB test plug, the user must make
the shorts manually on the plug BEFORE it is inserted into the MMLG test block.
Warning: Never open circuit the secondary circuit of a current transformer since the
high voltage produced may be lethal and could damage insulation.
Warning: For pin terminal relays, never disconnect the T module terminal block - it is
NOT a shorting block, and CT connections will be open circuited.
If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relay should be
isolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks. The line current transformers
should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals. Where means of
isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links, fuses, MCB, etc.) are
provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the wiring to these circuits will
have to be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent them from
being a safety hazard.
Visual Inspection
Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since
installation.
The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should
be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.
Ensure that the case earthing connection, is used to connect the relay to a local earth
2
bar using a conductor of minimum cross-sectional area 2.5mm . The case earth should
be verified, made tight to the side of the case by nut/bolt.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-3

Visual Inspection
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for
them to be done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless
insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the same circuits
should be temporarily connected together.
The main groups of relay terminals are:
Voltage transformer circuits (situated on module T, slot 04 on rear of relay)

Current transformer circuits (situated on module T, slot 04)
Power supply (situated on module V, slot 20)
Opto-isolated binary inputs, situated on V (slot 20) and X/Y (populated slots in the
range 08 to 18) modules
Relay output contacts, situated on V (slot 20) and X/Y (populated slots in the range
08 to 18) modules. Also, milliamp current loop measured inputs and outputs,
situated on module Y (slot 08)
EIA(RS)485 COMM1 and COMM2 ports, situated on module A (slot 02)
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly
reconnected to the relay.
External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or scheme
diagram. The relay diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access
cover on the front of the relay, written in the form P638.4xx.
If a P991 or MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked against
the scheme (wiring) diagram. Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the
installation to ensure compliance with the customers' normal practice.
Auxiliary supply
The P638 relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply
depending on the relay’s nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the
operating range specified in Table 9-1.
Without energising the relay measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the
operating range.
Nominal Supply Rating DC [AC rms] DC Operating Range AC Operating Range

24V [N/A] 19.2 to 26.4V -
48 – 250V [100 – 230V] 38 to 275V 80 to 254V
Table 9-1 Operational range of auxiliary supply Vx
It should be noted that the P638 relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the
upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply.
Do not energise the relay using the battery charger with the battery disconnected
as this can irreparably damage the relay’s power supply circuitry.
9-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Energise the relay only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges,
and also the power supply protective earth/ground connection is connected. The ground
conductor is connected to terminal X2027 (ring terminal relay) or X2039 (pin terminal
relay), and the minimum wire cross section is 1.5mm2. If a test block is provided, it may
be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the
relay.
With the Relay Energised

The following group of tests verifies that the relay hardware and software is functioning
correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for
these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation
of the associated circuit breaker.
Power-Up Verification
On application of the supply voltage, the P638 will start-up. During start-up LEDs will
flash, and the display will show a sequence of arrows on the LCD display >>>>>. After
approximately 15s the display will stabilise showing “P438”, and the relay is ready.
Verify that the “HEALTHY” LED is illuminated.
If no settings have previously been applied to the relay, the “OUT OF SERVICE” LED
may also be showing.
Change of Menu Language

to English
Navigate the menu via Parameters… Config Parameters… Local HMI (abbreviated
LOC) to reach address [003.020: Config/LOC, Language]. Press , and the password
prompt will appear (asterisks: ******). Input the password, which by default is a press of
the four arrow keys , left-right-up-down in sequence. Press , and if the
password has been accepted the EDIT mode LED will light. The up or down key can
nd
now be used to toggle the setting to “2 Language”, then press . The P638 display
will now be shown in the correct English.
Date and Time

The date and time should now be set to the correct values. The method of setting will
depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the optional Inter-Range
Instrumentation Group standard B (IRIG-B) port on the rear of the relay.
With an IRIG-B Signal

If a satellite time clock signal conforming to IRIG-B is provided and the relay has the
optional IRIG-B port fitted at slot 02, the satellite clock equipment should be energised.
To allow the relay’s time and date to be maintained from an external IRIG-B source cell
[056.072: Settings/Configuration/IRIGB, IRIG-B Time Synch] must be set to ‘Enabled’
and [023.200: Settings/Configuration/IRIGB, General Enable USER] must be set to ‘Yes’.
Ensure the relay is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell [023.202:
Measurements/Log.State signals/IRIGB, IRIG-B Ready] reads ‘Yes’.
Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co-ordinated time
(satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is displayed.
Check the time is correct in cell [003.091: Measurements/Analogue Readings/MAIN,

Time]. The IRIG-B signal does not contain the current year so it will need to be set
manually in the date cell. Set the year in cell [003.090: Measurements/Analogue
Readings/MAIN, Date], and verify the date shown is correct.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-5

In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, the time and date will be maintained.
Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not
need to be set again.
To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, then remove the auxiliary supply from the relay.
Leave the relay de-energised for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energisation, the
date and time in cells 003.090 and 003.091 should be correct.
Reconnect the IRIG-B signal.
Without an IRIG-B Signal

If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, ensure that cell
[056.072: Settings/Configuration/IRIGB, IRIG-B Time Synch] is set to ‘Disabled’
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cells [003.091:
Measurements/Analogue Readings/MAIN, Time] and [003.090: Measurements/Analogue
Readings/MAIN, Date].
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, the time and date will be maintained.
Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not
need to be set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30 seconds.
On re-energisation, the date and time in cells 003.090 and 003.091 should be correct.
Light Emitting Diodes

(LED’s)
On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that the
relay is HEALTHY. (The Out of Service LED will also be lit if no settings have yet been
applied to the relay). Any LEDs still illuminated from previous faults or injection tests
should be reset by pressing the CLEAR ()) key.
Check that on pressing the ) key ALL LED indicators momentarily light and then
extinguish.
Check and record that the HEALTHY LED remains lit.
Input Opto-Isolators
(Binary Status Inputs)
This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs on the relay are functioning correctly.
The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time, as per the external wiring
diagram. Ensure correct polarity, with the positive battery voltage applied to the lowest
numbered terminal, and negative to the highest number for the input concerned (e.g.
Opto input U201 for the ring terminal relay should be energised at terminals X2013 (+ve)
and X2014 (-ve)).
If possible, the voltage applied to the opto should be generated by operation of the item
of plant which that opto normally monitors. e.g. If an opto input is assigned to 52b
(circuit breaker open), then correct wire routing and indication is best ascertained by
movement of the real contacts, or a test short connected across them.
Opto inputs are polarity-sensitive, and DC rated only. Do not energise from an
alternating current supply.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed in the Measurements & Tests
subheading in the menu, under Measurements/I.O.Status Monitor, example cell for opto
9-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
input U201 [153.086: Measurements/I.O.Status/INP, State U201]. A de-energised input

is indicated by the display ‘Low’, and when an input is energised the display should read
‘High’.
Output Relays
This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. It can also be used to
verify that output contact wiring is routed to the correct location, via the panel/cubicle
wiring.
Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to the output relay being
tested, as given in the external connection diagram.
Output contacts will be operated by manual commands – ensure that contact

operation is permitted, without dangerous/unwanted consequences. For example,
operation of contacts assigned to trip or close duties should only be undertaken if
the CB is locked for no operation, or if operation is permitted.
The output relays should be energised one at a time. The means of operating contacts
is within the Control and Testing sub-heading in the menu, via the heading
Measurements and Tests. The user first selects which contact should be operated, at
cell [153.086: Control and Testing/OUTP, Relay assign. f test]. The contact to be
operated is selected by scrolling down the list and selecting Configure.
Once configured, stepping down to the next cell in the menu [003.043: OUTP, Relay
Test] allows the user to apply the test by selecting ‘Execute’. With default settings, the
selected contact will be operated for 1 second. Operation will be confirmed by the
continuity tester operating for a normally open contact and ceasing to operate for a
normally closed contact. Measure the resistance of the contacts in the closed state
Note: It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected to the output
relays during the contact test procedure is not exceeded by the associated
output relay being operated for too long. It is therefore advised that the time
between application and removal of contact test is kept to the minimum.
Rear Communications
Port(s): COMM1 and
COMM2 (If Used)
This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote
location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the
relay to the remote location, just the relay’s rear communications port and any protocol
converter necessary.
IEC60870-5-103
Communications COMM1
Connect a portable PC running the appropriate IEC60870-5-103 Master Station software
to the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface converter. It is
strongly recommended that MiCOM S1 software is used for this test, as it uses the –103
protocol for its communication.
Where the communication is –103 protocol over fibre optic, the appropriate fibre link will
need to be made and tested.
Ensure that the Relay/Octet communication address, Baud rate, and Parity settings in
the COMM1 Configuration sub-heading are set to match the Master Station set-up.
Check that communications with this relay can be established.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-7

Modbus Communications
COMM1
Connect a portable PC running the appropriate Modbus Master Station software to the
relay’s EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface converter.
DNP 3.0 Interface COMM1

Connect a portable PC running the appropriate DNP3 Master Station software to the
relay’s EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface converter.
IEC60870-5-103
Communications COMM2
This test is only valid for relays having a second communications port fitted, COMM2.
Connect a portable PC running MiCOM S1 software to the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port via a
EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface converter. If the second port is being used for an
off-site MODEM link, remote access can be tested at this stage.
PT100 Temperature RTD

Probe (Where Fitted)
This tests that where ambient temperature compensation of the thermal protection is
applied, the RTD probe is connected/measuring correctly, and that the correct ambient
temperature is being measured.
To check correct RTD fitting:
[039.111: Measurements/Log.State Signals/THERM, CTA Error]
Must show “No” error, and…
[004.149: Measurements/Analogue Readings/THERM, Coolant temperature]
Must show an ambient air temperature as expected for the weather conditions.
9-8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Apply Application-Specific
Settings
There are two methods of applying the settings to the relay:
Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PC
running the appropriate software via the relay’s front EIA(RS)232 port, located under
the bottom access cover, or rear communications port. This method is preferred for
transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for error
If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on a diskette,
this will further reduce the commissioning time and should always be the case where
application-specific programmable scheme logic is to be applied to the relay.
Enter them manually via the relay’s operator interface
Current Inputs
This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable
tolerances.
All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50 Hz.
If operation at 16⅔ Hz, 25 Hz or 60 Hz is required then this must be set in cell
[010.030: Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Frequency fn].
To avoid spurious operation of protection elements during injection testing,

ensure that the Protection is “Disabled” at cell [003.030: Function
Settings/Global/MAIN, Protection Enabled].
Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to each
current transformer input in turn, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The
corresponding reading can then be checked under Measurements/Analogue Readings.
When reading the per unit (p.u.) measurements of current, the relevant reading should
be 1 (unity).
The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±1%. However, an additional allowance must
be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Voltage Input
Apply voltage equal to the line voltage transformer secondary winding rating to the VT
input, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading can then
be checked under Measurements/Analogue Readings. When reading the per unit (p.u.)
measurements of voltage, the relevant reading should be 1 (unity).
The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±0.5%. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
9.5 Setting Checks
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both the
relay’s function and programmable scheme logic settings), for the particular installation,
have been correctly applied to the relay.
Note (1): The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
Note (2): If the user wishes the relay to be incapable of tripping the circuit breaker by
means of inhibiting the trip output contact(s), this can be set at:
[021.012: Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Trip Cmd. Block USER]
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-9

Demonstrate Correct Relay
Operation
The current and voltage tests have already demonstrated that the relay is within
calibration, thus the purpose of these tests is as follows:
To determine that the primary protection function of the relay, differential protection,
can trip according to the correct application settings
To verify correct setting of any backup overcurrent protection
To verify correct assignment of the trip contacts, by monitoring the response to a
selection of fault injections
The customer’s desired setting group to be left in-service after testing is used. This
is generally Settings Group SG1, and verification that the relay has the correct group
applied should be done by reading cell [003.062: Measurements/Log.State
Signals/GROUP, Actual Setting Group]
To enable the protection elements, ensure that the Protection is “Enabled” at cell
[003.030: Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Protection Enabled]
Checking differential
sensitivity
For single-side infeeding to an in-zone fault, the fault current characteristic crosses the
first knee of the tripping characteristic of the P638, so that an injection test will find the
Idiff> setting [072.142].
The current I to which the P638 responds for single-side feeding is calculated as follows:
I diff > ⋅I nom , z

I=
kz
z: Ends a or b
Idiff>: Set differential minimum sensitivity
Inom,z: Nominal CT current of the P638 for ends a or b
kz: Amplitude matching factor for end a or b [address 004.105 and 004.106]
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P638 are displayed as measured
operating data. They aid in assessing whether the connection of the P638 to the system
current transformers is correct. The display of differential and restraining currents is
prevented, however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can be set by the user.
Connect the test equipment to the relay via the test block(s) taking care not to open-
circuit any CT secondary. If MMLG type test blocks are used, the live side of the test
plug must be provided with shorting links before it is inserted into the test block.
Apply a current slightly less than the Idiff> setting to the HV side CT input only (this CT is
usually the input designated as „end a“). Observe that no trip should occur, and the red
Trip LED remains extinguished.
Ramp up the current until a trip occurs and the Trip LED illuminates.
Record the current at which the relay tripped. The measured current should be within +/-
10% of the Idiff> setting (relay accuracy 5%, plus test set accuracy 5%).
9-10 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking differential
through stability
The previous procedure should be repeated, but now to simulate current flowing through
the transformer to an out-of-zone external fault. Select an HV side (end A) CT current
equal to Inom, and an LV side (end B) current equal to: Inom x Ka / Kb .
Apply the fault currents for approximately one second. It should be observed that if both
CTs are in the correct orientation that no trip should occur.
Verifying the trip output

contact mapping
At the test set, retain the same injection currents as per the stability test, but invert the
LV side (end B) current to simulate an internal fault. To verify correct mapping feed the
trip contacts that would be expected to trip the circuit breaker into the injection test set,
to observe that the contact closes correctly.
Apply the fault current for 100ms – check and record the tripping time.
Checking transverse
differential sensitivity
These tests are performed on a per winding basis, depending on whether the DIF_a, or
DIF_b elements are enabled. The tripping sensitivity for the transverse differential
protection of either winding with a single end infeed is given by:
I = I trans > ⋅I nom, z
z: End a or b
Itrans>: Set operate value
Inom,z: CT nominal current rating for ends a or b
First start with winding (end) „a“ if enabled. Apply a current slightly less than the Itrans>
setting to one phase CT input only. Observe that no trip should occur, and the red Trip
LED remains extinguished.
Ramp up the current until a trip occurs and the Trip LED illuminates.
Record the current at which the relay tripped. The measured current should be within +/-
10% of the Itrans> setting (relay accuracy 5%, plus test set accuracy 5%).
Checking transverse
differential through stability
The previous procedure should be repeated, but with an equal and opposite current
flowing in the CT at the other end of the winding. The injection simulates current flowing
into the winding at one end, and out at the other – if the CT orientations are correct, no
trip will occur.
Apply the fault currents for approximately one second. No trip should occur.
Verifying the trip output

contact mapping
At the test set, retain the same injection currents as per the stability test, but invert one of
the injected currents (only), in order to simulate an internal fault. To verify correct
mapping feed the trip contacts that would be expected to trip the circuit breaker into the
injection test set, to observe that the contact closes correctly.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-11

Apply the fault current for 100ms – check and record the tripping time.
Repeat the transverse differential tests for the second winding, if necessary.
Check Application Settings

Upon completion of the tests any protection or supervision elements which were
disabled for testing purposes must have their application settings restored. It is
not essential to injection test non-differential elements, as the basic integrity of
the setting file, and relay calibration have already been verified.
The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-
specific settings to ensure that they are correct, and have not been mistakenly altered
during the injection test.
There are two methods of checking the settings:
Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running MiCOM S1 software
via the front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear
communications port. Compare the settings transferred from the relay with the
original written application-specific setting record. (For cases where the customer
has only provided a printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is
available)
Step through the settings using the relay’s operator interface and compare them with
the original application-specific setting record
It is very important that the key settings below are investigated:
Checking that the Correct

Settings Group is Active
Ensure that the active setting group left applied is as expected. In the menu, navigate to:
[003.062: Measurements/Log.State Signals/GROUP, Actual Setting Group]

Read out and record the Setting Group shown, Setting Group SGx
Checking that the

Protection is Switched On
Ensure that this is set to Yes (= On). In the menu, navigate to:
[003.030: Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Protection Enabled]

Read out and record that this shows “Yes”
Checking that No Blocking

of Output Relays is
Inadvertently Left Applied
In the menu, navigate to both of the following addresses to check that no User
programmable inhibits (blocks) on contact operation remain. All should show “No”.
[021.014: Function Settings/Global/OUTP, USER Outp Rel Block]

[021.012: Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Trip Cmd. Block USER]
9-12 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking that the Primary

Protection Function
(Differential) is Enabled
In the menu, navigate to all of the following addresses to check that the display reads
“Enabled” or “Yes” in each instance:
[056.027: Configuration/DIFF, Differential Pr.]

[019.080: Function Settings/Common Settings/DIFF, General Enable USER]
[07y.152: Function Settings/Setting Group SGx/DIFF, Enable]
Note that address “y” is the required setting group “x”, plus one
Ensuring that All Records

and Memories Have Been
Reset
In the menu, navigate to both of the following addresses to execute resetting. The
general reset is password protected… (Input the password, which by default is a press
of the four arrow keys , left-right-up-down in sequence. Press , and if the
password has been accepted the EDIT mode LED will light. The up or down key can
now be used to toggle the setting to “Execute”, then press .)
[003.002: Measurements & Tests/Control & Testing/MAIN, General Reset]

[003.008: Measurements & Tests/Control & Testing/MT_RC, Reset Recording]
Check Correct Display of

Status LEDs
The status of the 5 LED indicators on the left hand-side of the relay front panel should be
checked.
The TRIP LED should not be showing

The ALARM LED should not be showing
The OUT OF SERVICE LED should not be showing
The green HEALTHY LED must be illuminated
The ENTER/edit mode LED should not be showing
9.6 On-Load Checks
The objectives of the on-load checks are to:
Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct
Directionality check for any directionalised IDMT or DTOC1 elements
Check to ensure load angle measurements will be correct
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
energisation of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring
that has been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced
in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-13

When advised by the system operator that it is permitted to energise the primary
circuit, arrange for the protected transformer to be made live by closing the circuit
breaker. This will make VT and CT circuits live.
Confirm Current and

Voltage Transformer
Wiring Voltage Connection
For the voltage input to the relay, verify that the analogue reading is as expected. When
reading the per unit (p.u.) measurement of voltage, the relevant reading should be 1
(unity) when the line voltage is equal to the [010.002: Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Vn
V.T. Prim.] setting in kV.
Current Connections
For each current input to the relay, verify that the analogue reading is as expected.
When reading the per unit (p.u.) measurements of current, the relevant reading should
be 1 (unity) when the line current is equal to the [In C.T. Prim.] setting in A.
On Load Directional Test

This test is important to ensure that the relay functions have the correct forward/reverse
response to fault and load conditions. The check is not required if the voltage input is
not connected.
Firstly the actual direction of power flow on the system must be ascertained, using
adjacent instrumentation or protection already in-service, or a knowledge of the
prevailing network operation conditions.
Check the [005.014] and [005.016] load angle readings to check they are as
expected. In general, the end „a“ load angle for a transformer subjected to traction
loading would be expected to be small (within the range +/- 45o).
9.7 Final Checks
The tests are now complete.
Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to disconnect
any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it
should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant
external connection or scheme diagram.
If a P991/MMLG test block is installed, remove the P992/MMLB test plug and replace the
cover so that the protection is put into service.
If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the relay.
The green HEALTHY LED must be illuminated
9-14 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.8 P638 Commissioning Test Record
Date: Engineer:
S/Station Circuit:
System Frequency:
Front Plate Information
Model No. P638______________________

Variant P638-_________-3__-4__-6__-___-___-___-
Serial Number/MM/YY
/ /
(includes month and year of manufacture)
Front Plate Station Rating Used
Rated Current In 1A / 5A A
Rated Voltage Vn 50 – 130V V
Auxiliary Voltage Vx V
Test Equipment Used
This section should be completed to allow future identification of protective devices that have been commissioned using
equipment that is later found to be defective or incompatible but may not be detected during the commissioning
procedure.
Injection Test Set Model:

Serial No:
Multimeter: Model:
Serial No:
Insulation Tester Model:
Serial No:
Setting Software: Type: MiCOM S1
Version:
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-15

Tick as Appropriate
Have all relevant safety instructions been

Yes No
followed?
Product Checks
With the Relay De-energised
Visual Inspection Tick as Appropriate
Relay damaged? Yes No
Rating information correct for installation? Yes No
Case earth installed? Yes No
Tick as Appropriate
Insulation Resistance >100MΩ at 500V dc Visual Yes No Not tested

Inspection
External Wiring Tick as Appropriate
Wiring checked against diagram? Yes No
Test block connections checked? Yes No na
Tick as Appropriate
Measured Auxiliary Supply V ac V dc
Power supply protective earth installed? Yes No
With the relay energised
Tick as Appropriate
Healthy LED Illuminated After Boot-up? Yes No
Tick as Appropriate
Menu Language Changed to English? Yes No
9-16 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Date and Time Tick as Appropriate
Clock set to local time? Yes No
Time maintained when auxiliary supply removed? Yes No
Light Emitting Diodes Tick as Appropriate
All LEDs illuminate on press of “C” key? Yes No
Input Opto-isolators (Starting from Right Side) Tick as Appropriate
Opto input U201 working? Yes No
Opto input U___ working? Yes No na
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-17

Input Opto-isolators (Starting from Right Side) Tick as Appropriate
Output Relays (Starting from Right Hand Side)
Tick as Appropriate
Relay K201 Working? Yes No
Relay K___ Working? Yes No na
9-18 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Tick as Appropriate
Tick as Appropriate
COMM1 Communication Standard Modbus IEC -103 DNP 3.0
Communications established? Yes No
Protocol converter tested? Yes No na
COMM2 Communications established? Yes No
MODEM tested? Yes No na
Tick as Appropriate
RTD Probe Working? (Where Fitted) Yes No
Ambient temperature shown °C
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-19

Setting Checks
Tick as Appropriate
Application-specific function settings applied? Yes No
Current Inputs
In end a CT Ratio (HV winding) / (prim/sec)
In end b CT Ratio (LV winding) / (prim/sec)
IN neutral CT Ratio / (prim/sec)
Input CT Applied Value Displayed Value
Ιa1 (HV DIFF phase input) A p.u.
Ιa2 (transverse DIF_end a second CT input) A p.u. na
Ιb1 (LV DIFF phase input) A p.u.
Ιa2 (transverse DIF_end b second CT input) A p.u. na
ΙN A p.u. na
Voltage Input
VT Ratio / (prim/sec)
Input VT Applied Value Displayed Value
V V p.u.
Tick as Appropriate
DIFF Idiff> pickup sensitivity OK Yes No
DIFF through fault stability OK Yes No
DIFF Protection Trip Contact Routing OK? Yes No
DIFF trip time S
9-20 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
DIF_a Itrans> pickup sensitivity OK Yes No Na
DIF_a through fault stability OK Yes No Na
DIFF_a Protection Trip Contact Routing OK? Yes No Na
DIFF_a trip time s
DIF_b Itrans> pickup sensitivity OK Yes No Na
DIF_b through fault stability OK Yes No Na
DIFF_b Protection Trip Contact Routing OK? Yes No Na
DIFF_b trip time s
Tick as Appropriate
Application-Specific Function Settings Verified? Yes No na
Settings extracted and stored as filename….? ___________.x3v na
Active Setting Group left applied SG
Protection switched on? Yes No
Any user blocking of contacts? Yes No
Differential protection enabled Yes No
Records and memories reset Yes No
HEALTHY LED lit, and no alarms? Yes No
On-Load Checks
Tick as Appropriate
Test wiring removed? Yes No na
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Yes No na
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-21

System Measurements of Current/Voltage
Tick as Appropriate
Per unit voltage reading as expected? Yes No
Per unit current readings as expected? Yes No
Directionality test performed? Yes No
Final Checks
Tick as Appropriate
Test wiring removed? Yes No na
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Yes No na
HEALTHY LED still showing? Yes No
Secondary front cover replaced? Yes No na
Commissioning Engineer Customer's Witness
Date Date
9-22 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.9 “As-Fitted” Settings Record
It is recommended that either a MiCOM S1 print-out of settings applied is attached to the

commissioning record here, or preferably the file is stored electronically. The setting file
must be saved and stored securely, for example held on a CDROM kept within the
substation.
Safe electronic storage, under the control of the customer’s quality system, will permit
easy re-use and/or modification of settings in the future.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610 9-23

9-24 P638/EN M/Aa2 // P638-302-403/404-610
10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible
methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a guide only, and in cases of doubt it is
better to return the P638 to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging instructions
in the section entitled "Unpacking and Packing" in Chapter 5 when returning equipment
to the manufacturer.
Problem:
Lines of text are not displayed on the user interface (HMI).

Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points.
Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct. The P638
is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
Before checking further, disconnect the P638 from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is O.K.
If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of
failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger
that the damage will spread.
Required Fuses:
VA,nom = 24 V DC: Type M3.5

VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: Type M2
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 10-1

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The P638 issues an ‘Alarm’ signal on LED H3.
Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see
section "Monitoring Signal Memory Readout" in Chapter 6). The table below lists
possible monitoring or alarm indications (provided that a configuration setting has
been entered at C H E C K : F c t As s i g n . F a u l t, the faulty area, the P638
response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Alarm' and
'Blocked/Faulty'.
CHECK: Alarm (LED) 036 070
Alarm configured for LED H3.

CHECK: Alarm (Relay) 036 100
Alarm configured for an output relay.
Key:
-: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
Updating: The output relay configured for 'Alarm' starts only if the monitoring
signal is still present.
1)
: The 'Blocked/Faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at M A I N : F c t A s s i g n F a u l t .
2)
: The 'Alarm' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at C H EC K: F c t. As s i g n . Al a r m .
CHECK: Cold Restart 093 024
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Protection

blocking
'Alarm' output relay: Yes / Yes
‘Blocked/Faulty’ output relay: Yes / Yes
CHECK: Cold Rest /SW Update 093 025
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.

blocking
CHECK: Blocking /HW Failure 090 019
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
'Alarm' output relay: Updating / Updating
10-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Relay Kxx Faulty 041 200
Multiple signaling: output relay defective.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: -/-

'Blocked/Faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1)
CHECK: Hardware Clock Fail 093 040
The hardware clock has failed.

‘Blocked/Faulty’ output relay: -/-
CHECK: Battery Failure 090 010
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.

'Blocked/Faulty' output relay: -/-
CHECK: Invalid SW DnLoaded 096 121
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device

blocking
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.

blocking
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.

blocking
CHECK: -15V Supply Faulty 093 080
The - 15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.

blocking
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 10-3

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Module in wrong slot.

blocking
Defective module in slot x.

CHECK: Module A DPR Faulty 093 070
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only

detected during device startup.

CHECK: Module A RAM Faulty 093 071
RAM fault on communication module A.

CHECK: Module Y DPR Faulty 093 110
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the
data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

10-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Module Y RAM Faulty 093 111
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.

CHECK: IRIGB faulty 093 117
The IRIGB interface is enabled but there is no plausible input signal.

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 10-5

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Output relay K xxx defective.

CHECK: Undefined Op Code 093 010
Undefined operation code.

blocking
CHECK: Invalid Op 093 011
Invalid arithmetic operation.

blocking
CHECK: Undefined Interrupt 093 012
Undefined interrupt.

blocking
CHECK: Exception Oper.Syst. 093 013
Interrupt of the operating system.

blocking
CHECK: Protection Failure 090 021
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has

detected an error.

blocking
10-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Checksum Sett Error 090 003
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has

been detected.

blocking
CHECK: Clock Sync. Error 093 041
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between

the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is
greater than 10 ms.

CHECK: Interm Volt Fail RAM 093 026
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module
(digital). This fault is only detected during device start-up. After the fault is
detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are
deleted.

blocking
CHECK: Overflow MT_RC 090 012
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.

CHECK: Semaph. MT_RC Block. 093 015
Software overload.

CHECK: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.

CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. Y 093 113
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module has been downloaded.

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 10-7

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Time-out Module Y 093 112
Hardware fault in analog module.

CHECK: Matching Fail. End a 098 031
The matching factor is not in the range 0.5 ≤ kam,a ≤ 5.

CHECK: Matching Fail. End b 098 032
The matching factor is not in the range 0.5 ≤ kam,b ≤ 5.

CHECK: Match.Factor Invalid 098 033
The ratio kam,a/kam,b or kam,b/kam,a has exceeded the value 3.

CHECK: CTA Error 098 034
Coolant temperature acquisition is faulty.

'Alarm' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
CHECK: Setting Error THERM 098 035
the maximum permissible object temperature and the maximum permissible

coolant temperature were set to the same value contrary to permission.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking the thermal

overload protection
An invalid characteristic has been set for the circuit breaker monitoring
function.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault

detected.
10-8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: CB1 No. CB Op. > 098 066
CHECK: CB2 No. CB op. > 098 079
The maximum number of the circuit breaker operations has been exceeded.

detected.
CHECK: CB1 Rem. No. CB op.< 098 067
CHECK: CB2 Rem. No. CB Op.< 098 085
The remaining number of the circuit breaker operations at nominal current

has fallen below the set threshold.

detected.
The maximum ruptured current sum has been exceeded.

detected.
The maximum ruptured current squared sum has been exceeded.

detected.
The maximum opening time of a circuit breaker contact has been exceeded.
Disconnection is not determined for this CB pole.

detected.
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels
of analog I/O module Y.

detected.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 10-9

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Invalid Scaling IDC 093 116
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog
I/O module Y.

detected.
CHECK: PT100 Open Circuit 098 024
The P638 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer.

detected.
CHECK: Overload 20 mA input 098 025
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.

detected.
CHECK: Open Circ. 20mA inp. 098 026
The P638 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.

detected.
CHECK: Setting Error f<> 098 028
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for

'overfrequency' monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and
nominal frequency). This setting is not valid in the "f + Delta f/Delta t"
operating mode.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under

frequency protection
function
CHECK: Inv Inp f Clock Sync 093 120
The minute pulse has been assigned to an unsuitable binary input.

detected.
10-10 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of alarm signals by

selection at C H EC K: F c t. As s i g n . Al a r m . The warning signals are
also recorded in the monitoring signal memory.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: –/–

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 10-11

10-12 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
The P638 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected
to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
Maintenance procedures in
the power supply area
Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning
requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance
standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the
recommended temperature range (+55°C or 131°F), the useful life of these components
is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the
electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. When the
operating temperatures are approx. +45°C inside the devices, the required maintenance
interval can be increased by about 1 year.
The P638 is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for
keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply.
Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per
year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually
constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual
capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only
a few µA during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during
device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore
recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval
cited above.
Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible

without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the
auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 11-1

11 Maintenance
(continued)
The relevant components are located on the following modules:
Electrolytic capacitor:
on power supply module V.
Lithium battery:
on power supply module V.
Note: Only Schneider Electric-approved components may be used

(see Chapter 13).
Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
11-1 Component drawing for power supply module V.
11-2 P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

11 Maintenance
(continued)
There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly
replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and the
battery is correct.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

Note: The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be

disposed of in compliance with applicable national regulations.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 11-3

11 Maintenance
(continued)
Routine functional testing

The P638 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection tested for
proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to
12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be performed at intervals of 2 to
3 years – 4 years at the maximum.
The P638 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of sub-functions that cannot be checked by the self-
monitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The respective
device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the
outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
Analog input circuits

The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. However, it is still necessary to test
from the device terminals in order to make sure that the analogue measuring circuits are
functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary
measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a
suitable testing instrument. A "small" measured value (i.e. 0.5 In) and a "large"
measured value (i.e. 4 In) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D
converter. This makes it possible to check the entire dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating

device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous
measurements.
The dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since only the stability of a few passive
components is checked. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that
only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range.
11-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

11 Maintenance
(continued)
Additional analogue testing is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing
is completely numerical and is based on the measured analogue voltage values. Proper
operation was checked in conjunction with type testing.
Binary opto inputs

The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing
function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read
out (‘M+T/Meas/IO’ folder). This check should be performed for each input being used
and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring.
Binary outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even two-
phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no monitoring function for
the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by
way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes,
triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control
function (‘M+T/C+Test/’ folder).
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Serial interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also
includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including
connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long
as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 11-5

11-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
12 Storage
12 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of

-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled 'Technical Data'). The relative humidity must be controlled so that
neither condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic
capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every 4 years. Recharge the
capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P638 for approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply module is
used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working memory of the
processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required and discharges
rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is recommended to remove the
power supply module from the mounting rack during long storage periods. The contents
of the event memory should be previously read out and stored separately!
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 12-1

12-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
The P638 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators that
are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips supplied.
Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a Stabilo brand pen containing water-resistant ink
(Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description Order No.

Cable bushings 88512-4-0337414-301
Lithium battery, Type 1/2 AA 3.6 V
Electrolytic capacitor 100 µF, 385 V DC
Only the following brands of capacitor are
permitted:
Philips Type PUL-SI/159/222215946101
Panasonic Type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101
Nichicon Type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ
Nichicon Type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ
Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3.5-250V
Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC
and 100 to 230 V AC: M2-250V
Resistor 200 Ω 255.002.696
84TE frame 88512-4-9650723-301
Operating program for Windows On request (MiCOM S1)
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 13-1

13-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
14 Order Information
14.1 Order Information for P638
P638
PCS Cell No. 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12, 13 15 16 18
Transformer Differential Protection P638- N N N N N N N AA A A A
Transformer Differential Protection P638- 0 -302 -4xx -610 -46x -9x x -8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection, 7 -403
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -404
basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8 output relays
and 6 function keys
Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display 3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 4
Current transformer:
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11;T13 / T21;23 / T4)
2) 9
Voltage transformer:
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) 1
Additional binary I/O options:

Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) 1
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays) 2
Power supply and additional outputs:

VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor 6
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays 8
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays 9
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 4 high break contacts C
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 4 high break contacts D
Further add. options:

Without 0
With analog module 2
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

>18 V (standard variant) Without order extension No.
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) 8) -461
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V) 8) -462
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V) 8) -463
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) 8) -464
With communication / information interface:

Without Without order extension No.
Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization -90 0
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 only -91
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
Protocol IEC61850 -94

For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 6
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 7
Language:
English (German)
4) Without order extension No.
Px40 English (English)
4) On request -800
German (English)
4) -801
French (English)
4) On request -802
Spanish (English)
4) On request -803
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 14-1

14 Order Information
(continued)
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!

4) Second included language in brackets
8) Standard variant recommended if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
Information about ordering options
Binary inputs' switching threshold
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most

applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also "Technical Data" chapter) are provided for
applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
14-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

Appendix
A Glossary
B Signal List
C Overview of Changes
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 AN-1

Appendix
(continued)
Contents
A Glossary A-1
A1 Function Groups A-1
A2 Modules A-2
A3 Symbols A-3
A4 Examples of Signal Names A-10
A5 Symbols Used A-11
B List of Signals B-1

B1 Internal Signal Names B-1
B2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or B-3
IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
B 2.1 Interoperability B-3
B 2.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters) B-3
B 2.1.2 Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) B-4
B 2.1.3 Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) B-5
B 2.1.4 Application Layer B-6
B 2.1.5 Basic Application Functions B-12
B3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 B-15
B 3.1 Interoperability B-15
B 3.1.1 Physical Layer B-15
B 3.1.1.6 Electrical Interface B-15
B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface B-15
B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate B-15
B 3.1.2 Link Layer B-16
B 3.1.3 Application Layer B-16
B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data B-16
B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU B-16
B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor B-16
Direction
B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction B-16
B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction B-17
B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor B-18
Direction
B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction B-19
B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction B-20
B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction B-22
B 3.1.3.3.7 Measurands in Monitor Direction B-22
B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction B-23
B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control B-24
Direction
B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction B-24
B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction B-24
B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction B-25
B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions B-26
B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous B-26
AN-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

Appendix A - Glossary
A1 Function Groups
CBF_1: Circuit breaker failure protection, channel 1

CBF_2: Circuit breaker failure protection, channel 2
CBM_1: Circuit breaker monitoring, channel 1
CBM_2: Circuit breaker monitoring, channel 2
CHECK: Self-monitoring
COMM1: Communication interface 1
COMM2: Communication interface 2
DIF_a: Transverse differential protection a
DIF_b: Transverse differential protection b
DIFF: Differential protection
DTOC1: Definite-time overcurrent protection 1
DTOC2: Definite-time overcurrent protection 2
DTOCN: Overcurrent protection, residual current system
DVICE: Device
F_KEY: Configurable function keys
f<>: Over-/ Underfrequency protection
FT_DA: Fault data acquisition
GROUP: Setting group selection
HMI: User interface
IDMT: Inverse-time overcurrent protection
INP: Binary input
IRIGB: IRIG-B interface
LED: LED indicator
LIM_a: Limit value monitoring, end a
LIM_b: Limit value monitoring, end b
LIM_N: Limit value monitoring, residual current system
LIM_V: Limit value monitoring, voltage
LIMIT: Limit value monitoring
LOGIC: Logic
mA_OP: Measured data output
MAIN: Main function
MT_RC: Monitoring signal recording
OL_DA: Overload data acquisition
OL_RC: Overload recording
OP_RC: Operating data recording
OSCIL: Fault recording
OUTP: Binary output
PC: PC link
RTDmA: Measured data input
THERM: Thermal overload protection
V<>: Time-voltage protection
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 A-1

(continued)
A2 Modules
A: Communication module
B: Bus module
L: HMI module
P: Processor module
T: Transformer module
V: Power supply module
X: Binary I/O module
Y: Analog I/O module
A-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
A3 Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams
Binary elements in compliance with DIN 40900 part 12, September 1992, IEC 617-12:
modified 1991
Analog information processing according to DIN 40900 Part 13, January 1981;
To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols have been
used, taken from several DIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom. Other
flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of the
signal flow, output signals on the right side.
Symbol General Description
To obtain more space for representing a group of

related elements, contours of the elements may be
joined or cascaded if the following rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose

= common contour line is oriented in the signal flow
direction.
Note:
This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations
with two or more signal flow directions, such as for
symbols with a control block and an output block.
There exists at least one logical link between elements

whose common contour line runs perpendicularly to the
signal flow direction.
Components of a symbol
A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination
and one or more qualifiers.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 A-3

(continued)
Control block
A control block contains an input function common to
several symbols. It is used for the collective setting of
several trigger elements, for example.
Output block
An output block contains an output function common
to several symbols.
Settable control block

MAIN: Inom Device The 6 digits in square brackets represent the address
[ 010 003 ] under which the function shown in the text is
implemented.
D5Z08X5B
Settable control block with function blocks

MAIN: Inom Device The digits in the function block show the settings that
[ 010 003 ] are possible for this function.
1.0 The text below the symbol assigns the corresponding
5.0 unit or meaning to each setting.
1.0: 1.0 A
5.0: 5.0 A
D5Z08X6B
A-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
State input
Only the state of the binary input variable is read.
Rising edge-triggered input

Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 causes
operation.
Negation of an output
The value up to the boundary line is negated at the
output.
Negation of an input
The input value is negated before the boundary line.
Falling edge-triggered input with negation

Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 causes
operation.
AND element
The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables
are 1.
OR element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input
variable is 1.
Threshold element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input
variables are 1. The number in the symbol may be
replaced by any other number.
(m out of n) element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input
variable is 1.
The number in the symbol can be replaced by any

other numbers if the number of inputs is raised or
lowered accordingly.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 A-5

(continued)
Delay element
The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs
after a time delay of t1 relative to the corresponding
transition at the input.
The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs
after a time delay of t2 relative to the corresponding
transition at the input.
t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values

(in seconds or strobe ticks).
Monostable flip-flop
The output variable will be 1 if the input variable
changes to 1. The output variable will remain 1 for
100 ms, regardless of the duration of the input value
1 (non-retriggerable).
Without a 1 in the function block, the monostable flip-

flop is retriggerable.
The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be

changed to any other dwell time duration.
Analog-digital converter
An analog input signal is converted to a binary
signal.
Subtractor
The output variable is the difference between the
two input variables.
A summing element is obtained by changing the
minus sign to a plus sign at the symbol input.
Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal

The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal
exceeds a specific threshold. The output variable
remains 1 until the input signal drops below the
threshold again.
Memory, general
Storage of a binary or analog signal.
A-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Non-stable flip-flop
When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse
sequence is generated at the output.
The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse

sequence starts with the input variable transition
(synchronized start).
If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse
sequence ends with the ending of the 1 signal at the
input (synchronized stop).
Amplifier
The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is
also 1.
Band pass filter

The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of
the input signals. All other frequencies (above and
below 50 Hz) are attenuated.
Counter
At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to
1 are counted and stored in the function block.
At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable
from 0 to 1 resets the counter to 0.
Electromechanical drive
in general, here a relay, for example.
Signal level converter

with electrical isolation between input and output.
L+ = pos. voltage input
L- = neg. voltage input
U1 = device identifier
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 A-7

(continued)
Input transducer
with conductor and device identifiers
(according to DIN EN 60445)
Conductor identifiers for current inputs:

for A: A1 and A2
for B: B1 and B2
for C: C1 and C2
for N: N1 and N2
Conductor identifiers for voltage inputs

via transformer 1:
for A: 1U
for B: 1V
for C: 1W
for N: 1N
via transformer 2:
for A: 2U
for B: 2V
Device identifiers for current transformers:

for A: T1
for B: T2
for C: T3
for N: T4
for voltage transformer 1:
for A: T5
for B: T6
for C: T7
for N: T8
for VG-N transformer: T90
for voltage transformer 2:
for A: T15
Change-over contact
with device identifier
Special symbol
Output relay in normally-energized arrangement
(‘closed-circuit operation’).
A-8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
PC interface
with pin connections
Multiplier
The output variable is the result of the multiplication
of the two input variables.
Divider
The output variable is the result of the division of
the two input variables.
Comparator
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input
variable(s) are equal to the function in the function
block.
Formula block
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input
variable(s) satisfy the equation in the function block
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 A-9

(continued)
A4 Examples of Signal Names

All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of
Chapter 3 as follows:
Signal Name General Description
OSCIL: Fault recording n Internal signal names are not coded by a data model
305 100
address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a
diamond. The small figure underneath the signal
name represents a code that is irrelevant to the user.
The internal signal names used and their origins are
listed in Appendix B.
DIST: VNG>> triggered Signal names coded by a data model address are
[ 036 015 ] represented by their address (shown in square
brackets). Their origin is given in Chapters 7 and 8.
MAIN: General Reset A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its
[ 003 002 ] signal name, address, and the setting preceded by
1: Execute the setting arrow.
A-10 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
A5 Symbols Used
Symbol Meaning
t Time duration
V Voltage, potential difference
V Complex voltage
I Electrical current
I Complex current
Z Complex impedance
Z Modulus of complex impedance
f Frequency
δ Temperature in °C
Σ Sum, result
Ω Unit of electrical resistance
α Angle
ϕ Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a

defined current and a defined voltage.
τ Time constant
∆T Temperature difference in K (oC)
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 A-11

A-12 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B1 Internal Signal Names
CBF_y: Imin< Triggered Fig. 3-123

CBM_1: IA Fig. 3-126
CBM_1: IC Fig. 3-126
CBM_2: IA Fig. 3-126
CBM_2: IC Fig. 3-126
CHECK: Hardware fault Fig. 3-26
COMM1: Selected protocol Fig. 3-6
DIFF: I(2*fn),1 Fig. 3-79
DIFF: I(2*fn),2 Fig. 3-79
DIFF: Id,1 Fig. 3-78
DIFF: Id,2 Fig. 3-78
DIFF: Int. rush stab. trig Fig. 3-79
DIFF: IR,1 Fig. 3-78
DIFF: IR,2 Fig. 3-78
DTOC1: Harm.Block. 1 Trigg. Fig. 3-86
DTOC1: I> Triggered Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: I>> Triggered Fig. 3-87
DTOC1: V < V< (I>) Fig. 3-90
DTOC1: V < V< (I>>) Fig. 3-90
DTOC1: ¼ Vmin (I>) Fig. 3-90
DTOC1: ¼ Vmin (I>>) Fig. 3-91
DTOC1: Forwards trip I> Fig. 3-90
DTOC1: Forwards trip I>> Fig. 3-91
DTOC1: Non-direct. trip I> Fig. 3-90
DTOC1: Non-direct. trip I>> Fig. 3-91
DTOC1: ºA Fig. 3-85
DTOC1: ºC Fig. 3-85
DTOC1: Reverse trip I> Fig. 3-90
DTOC1: Reverse trip I>> Fig. 3-91
DTOC2: ºA Fig. 3-85
DTOC2: ºC Fig. 3-85
f<>: ¼meas Fig. 3-117
f<>: fMeas Fig. 3-118
f<>: No. periods reached Fig. 3-118
FT_DA: Save measured values Fig. 3-68
IDMT: Harm.Block. 1 Trigg. Fig. 3-101
IDMT: Harm.Block. 2 Trigg. Fig. 3-101
IDMT: Iref> Triggered Fig. 3-102
IDMT: ¼ Vmin Fig. 3-105
IDMT: Forward trip Fig. 3-105
IDMT: Non-directional trip Fig. 3-105
IDMT: ºA Fig. 3-100
IDMT: ºC Fig. 3-100
IDMT: Reverse trip Fig. 3-105
IDMT: V < V< Fig. 3-105
mA_OP: Enable Fig. 3-29
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-1

(continued)
mA_OP: Reset meas.val.outp. Fig. 3-30

MAIN: Blck. 1 sel.functions Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Blck. 2 sel.functions Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Protection active Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Reset LED Fig. 3-55
MAIN: Time tag Fig. 3-54
THERM: I Fig. 3-108
THERM: With CTA Fig. 3-110
THERM: Block. by CTA Fail Fig. 3-110
B-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
B2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a general definition of the telecontrol
interface for substation control systems.
B 2.1 Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets and other options from which subsets
are to be selected in order to implement specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of bytes
(octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This means that only one value of the defined
parameter is allowed per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the
command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of subsets that are suitable for the given
application. This section combines the parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate
selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system components supplied by different
manufacturers (“equipment stemming”), then it is necessary for all partners to agree on the selected parameters.
The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked. 1
Note: The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain parameters for specific
parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling factors for individually addressable measured
values.
B 2.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)
x Point-to-point configuration x Multipoint-party line
x Multiple point-to-point configuration Multipoint-star
1
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-3
(continued)
B 2.1.2 Physical Layer 1 (Network-Specific Parameters)
Transmission Rate (Control Direction) 2
Unbalanced Unbalanced Balanced interface X.24/X.27

interface V.24/V.28 interface V.24/V.28
Standardized Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
100 bit/s x 2 400 bit/s 2 400 bit/s 56 000 bit/s
300 bit/s x 9 600 bit/s 9 600 bit/s
x 600 bit/s 19 200 bit/s
x 1 200 bit/s 38 400 bit/s
Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction) 2
Unbalanced Unbalanced Balanced interface X.24/X.27

interface V.24/V.28 interface V.24/V.28
Standardized Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
300 bit/s x 9 600 bit/s 9 600 bit/s
x 600 bit/s 19 200 bit/s
x 1 200 bit/s 38 400 bit/s
1
2
The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be identical.
B-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
(continued)
B 2.1.3 Link Layer 1 (Network-Specific Parameters)
Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Link Transmission Procedure Address Field of the Link
x Balanced transmission x Not present

(balanced transmission only)
x Unbalanced transmission x One octet
x Two octets 2
Frame Length x Structured
240 Maximum length L (number of octets) x Unstructured
1
2
Balanced only.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-5
(continued)
B 2.1.4 Application Layer 1
Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet x Two octets 1
Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet x Structured
x Two octets x Unstructured
x Three octets
Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet x Two octets (with originator address)
1
B-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
(continued)
Selection of Standard ASDUs
Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x <1> = Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
x <2> = Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
x <3> = Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
x <4> = Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
x <5> = Step position information M_ST_NA_1
x <6> = Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
x <7> = Bit string of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1
x <8> = Bit string of 32 bit with time tag M_BO_TA_1
x <9> = Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
x <10> = Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1
x <11> = Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
x <12> = Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1
<13> = Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
<14> = Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
x <15> = Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
x <16> = Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-7

(continued)
x <17> = Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
x <18> = Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag ME_EP_TB_1
x <19> = Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
<20> = Packed single-point information with status change detection M_PS_NA_1
<21> = Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor M_ME_ND_1
B-8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Process Information in Monitor Direction 1 (Station-Specific Parameter)
x <45> = Single command C_SC_NA_1
x <46> = Double command C_DC_NA_1
x <47> = Regulating step command C_IT_NA_1
<48> = Set point command, normalized value C_RC_NA_1
<49> = Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
<50> = Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
<51> = Bit string of 32 bit C_BO_NA_1
System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x <70> = End of initialization ME_EI_NA_1
1
Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-9
(continued)
System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x <100> = Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
x <101> = Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
x <102> = Read command C_RD_NA_1
x <103> = Clock synchronization command 1 C_CS_NA_1
x <104> = Test command C_TS_NB_1
<105> = Reset process command C_RP_NC_1
<106> = Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
1
The command procedure is formally processed, but there is no change in the local time in the station.
B-10 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
(continued)
Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x <110> = Parameter of measured value, normalized value P_ME_NA_1
x <111> = Parameter of measured value, scaled value P_ME_NB_1
<112> = Parameter of measured value, short floating point value P_ME_NC_1
<113> = Parameter activation P_AC_NA_1
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
<120> = File ready F_FR_NA_1
<121> = Section ready F_SR_NA_1
<122> = Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
<123> = Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
<124> = Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
<125> = Segment F_SG_NA_1
<126> = Directory F_DR_TA_1
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-11

(continued)
1
B 2.1.5 Basic Application Functions
Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter)
x Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter)
x Global
x Group 1 x Group 7 x Group 13
x Group 5 x Group 11
x Group 6 x Group 12 Addresses per group have to be defined.
Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter)
x Clock synchronization
1
B-12 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
(continued)
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter)
x Direct command transmission Select and execute command
Direct set point command transmission Select and execute set point command
C_SE ACTTERM used
x No additional definition
Short pulse duration

(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Long pulse duration

(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Persistent output
Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific Parameter)
Counter request x General request counter
x Counter freeze without reset x Request counter group 1
Counter freeze with reset x Request counter group 2
Counter reset x Request counter group 3
Addresses per group have to be specified x Request counter group 4
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-13

(continued)
Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter)
x Threshold value
Smoothing value
Low limit for transmission of measured value
High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter)
Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
File transfer in monitor direction F_FR_NA_1
File transfer in control direction F_FR_NA_1
B-14 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
B3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103
This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions applicable to the P638.
B 3.1 Interoperability
B 3.1.1 Physical Layer
B 3.1.1.1 Electrical Interface
x EIA RS 485
x No. of loads 32 for one device
Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of them can be operated on one line. For detailed information
see EIA RS 485, Section 3.
B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface
x Glass fiber
x Plastic fiber
x F-SMA connector
BFOC/2.5 connector
B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate
x 9 600 bit/s
x 19,200 bit/s
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-15

(continued)
B 3.1.2 Link Layer
There are no selection options for the link layer.
B 3.1.3 Application Layer
B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4 is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU
x One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address)
More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction
INF General Description
x <0> End of general interrogation
x <0> Time synchronization
x <2> Reset FCB
x <3> Reset CU
x <4> Start / restart
<5> Power on
B-16 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction
Schneider Electric Designations

INF General Description Address Description
<16> Auto-recloser active
<17> Teleprotection active
x <18> Protection active 003 030 MAIN: Protection Enabled
x <19> LED reset 021 010 MAIN: Reset Indicat. USER
x <20> Blocking of monitor direction 037 075 COMM1: Sig/Meas. Val.Block
x <21> Test mode 037 071 MAIN: Test mode
<22> Local parameter setting
x <23> Characteristic 1 036 090 GROUP: Group 1 Active
x <27> Auxiliary input 1 034 000 LOGIC: Input 1 EXT
P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-17

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction

<32> Measurand supervision I
<33> Measurand supervision V
<35> Phase sequence supervision
x <36>1 Trip circuit supervision 041 200 CHECK: Relay Kxx Faulty
<37> I>> back-up operation
x <38> VT fuse failure 004 061 MAIN: M.c.b. Trip V EXT
<39> Teleprotection disturbed
x <46> Group warning 036 100 CHECK: Alarm (relay)
x <47> Group alarm 004 065 MAIN: Blocked/Faulty
1
The message content is formed from the OR operation of the individual signals
B-18 P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

<48> Earth fault A
<49> Earth fault B
<50> Earth fault C
<51> Earth fault forward, i.e. line
<52> Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar
P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-19

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

INF General Description Address Device Description
<64> Start /pick-up A
<65> Start /pick-up B
<66> Start /pick-up C
<67> Start /pick-up N
<68> General trip
<69> Trip A
<70> Trip B
<71> Trip C
<72> Trip I>> (back-up operation)
<73> Fault location X in ohms
x <74> Fault forward/line 036 018 MAIN: Fault Forward
x <75> Fault reverse/busbar 036 019 MAIN: Fault Reverse
<76> Teleprotection signal transmitted
<77> Teleprotection signal received
<78> Level 1
<79> Level 2
<80> Level 3
<81> Level 4
<82> Level 5
<83> Level 6
x <84> General Start 036 000 MAIN: General Start
B-20 P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)

INF General Description Address Device Description
x <85> Breaker failure 036 017 MAIN: CB Failure
x <86> Trip measuring system A 041 002 DIFF: Trip Signal 1
x <87> Trip measuring system B 041 003 DIFF: Trip Signal 2
<88> Trip measuring system C
<89> Trip measuring system E
<90> Trip I>
<91> Trip I>>
<92> Trip IN>
<93> Trip IN>>
P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-21

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction

<128> CB ‘on’ by AR
<129> CB ‘on’ by long-time AR
<130> AR blocked
B 3.1.3.3.7 Measurands in Monitor Direction
Designations as in the Device Address List

<144> Measurand I
<145> Measurands I, V
<146> Measurands I, V, P, Q
<147> Measurands IN, VEN
<148> Measurands IA,B,C, VA,B,C, P, Q, f
B-22 P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction
<240> Read headings of all defined groups
<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243> Read directory of a single entry
<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245> General interrogation of generic data
<249> Write entry with confirmation
<250> Write entry with execution
<251> Write entry abort
P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-23

(continued)
B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction
B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction
x <0> Initiation of general interrogation
x <0> Time synchronization
B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction

<16> Auto-recloser on/off
<17> Teleprotection on/off
x <18> Protection on/off 003 030 MAIN: Protection Enabled
x <19> LED reset 021 010 MAIN: Reset Indicat. USER
x <23>1 Activate characteristic 1 003 060 GROUP: Setting Grp Sel USER
1
Switches GROUP: Setting Grp Sel USER to "Setting Group SG1"
2
3
4
B-24 P638/EN M/Aa2-S // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610
(continued)
B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction
<240> Read headings of all defined groups
<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243> Read directory of a single entry
<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245> General interrogation of generic data
<248> Write entry
<249> Write entry with confirmation
<250> Write entry with execution
<251> Write entry abort
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 B-25

(continued)
B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions
x Test mode
x Blocking of monitor direction
x Disturbance data
Generic services
x Private data
B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous
Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can
be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words,
there is only one choice for each measurand.
Measured value Max. MVAL =

nom. value multiplied by
1,2 or 2,4
Current L1
Current L2
Current L3
Voltage L1-E
Voltage L2-E
Voltage L3-E
Active power P
Reactive power Q
Frequency f
Voltage L1-L2
B-26 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

Appendix C - Overview of Changes
Version Changes
P638-301-401/402-601 First delivery version
Release: 24/09/2002
P638-301-401/402-602 Hardware No modifications
Release: 20/01/2003 Diagram No modifications
Software
DVICE Bug fixing:
The device was blocked following a start-up if either one of the
protections V<> or f<> were enabled, due to erroneous hardware self-
identification.
PC The configuration option for cyclic telegrams with measured operating
values was modified in such a way that non-supported ASDUs per IEC
where removed from the selection table.
The selection table position “Spontaneous signal enable” (address
003.177) was expanded by the setting options “VDEW Only“ and
“VDEW + Selected Sig.”.
These configuration settings used to generate cyclic telegrams are not
supported and were therefore removed from the data model:
003 055 C O M M 1 : D e l t a V
003 056 C O M M 1 : D e l ta I
003 057 C O M M 1 : D e l t a f
003 059 C O M M 1 : D e l t a P
COMM1 The selection table position “Spontaneous signal enable” (address
003.177) was expanded by the setting options “VDEW Only“ and
“VDEW + Selected Sig.”.
003 050 C O M M 1 : D e l t a V
003 051 C O M M 1 : D e l t a I
003 052 C O M M 1 : D e l t a f
003 054 C O M M 1 : D e l t a P
COMM2 The configuration option for cyclic telegrams with measured operating
values was modified in such a way that non-supported ASDUs per IEC
where removed from the selection table.
103 050 C O M M 1 : D e l ta V
103 051 C O M M 1 : D e l ta I
103 052 C O M M 1 : D e l ta f
103 054 C O M M 1 : D e l ta P
CBF_1 The setting "Select meas. input" was removed from the setting groups
and included in "Main Function" (similar to DTOC, IDMT, THERM).
CBF_2 The setting "Select meas. input" was removed from the setting groups
and included in "Main Function" (similar to DTOC, IDMT, THERM).
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 C-1

(continued)
Version Changes
P638-301-401/402-602-701 Hardware No modifications
Software
THERM Bug fixing:
A setting error (if present) is now only signaled when the respective
function is enabled (e.g. 040 068 T H ER M : E n a b l e d = 'Yes').
The status signal 040 068 T H ER M : E n a b l e d is now independent
from the simultaneous (prohibited) enabling of the relative and absolute
replicas
(setting 022 064 T H ER M : R e l a ti ve R e p l i c a = 'Yes'
AND 022 065 T H ER M : Ab s o l u te R e p l i c a = 'Yes')
The coordination of the operate delay for the monitoring signal for the
measured data input 040 190 R T D m A: PT 1 0 0 F a u l t y = 'Yes' and
the plausibility check of the coolant temperature acquisition, integrated in
the thermal overload protection, have now been improved. This
measure prevents the danger of incorrect tripping when an open wire is
present.
P638-301-401/402-603 Hardware No modifications
Software
THERM Bug fixing:
In case the overload protection is blocked (setting 072 178
T H ER M : Bl k fo r C T A F a i l SG 1 = 'Yes') because of a faulty coolant
temperature acquisition then the trip signal is not reset if this fault
occurred simultaneously to the trip signal.
In case of a fault in the coolant temperature acquisition the thermal
modeling will then be continued on the basis of the measured current
alone. All THERM signals will be reset (except CTA fault signals) and all
THERM measured values (except the status of the thermal replica) will
be set to 'Not Measured'.
IDMT Bug fixing:
The minimum voltage for the directional operation
(072 133 ID M T : Vm i n SG 1 ) can now no longer be set to 'Blocked'.
OP_RC The list of possible entries has been modified such that all LIMIT stages
do no longer enter starting signals, but only the signal 'timer stage
elapsed'.
C-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Version Changes
P638-302-403/404-610 Hardware Now the new text display panel is available featuring 6 function keys that
offer user-definable functional assignment and a total of 23 multi-colored
Release: 15/08/2008
LED indicators. 18 of these red and green LED indicators offer user-
definable functional assignment (amber/yellow is present when both red
and green colors are illuminated simultaneously).
Furthermore there is an optional binary I/O module X (4H), with 4 high-
break contacts available.
As ordering options for input switching thresholds, further input switching
thresholds (e.g. 18V, 73V, 90V, 146V, 155V) are now available in
addition to the 24V standard variant.
A further new option is an Ethernet communication board providing the
communications protocol per IEC 61850.
Diagram The updated terminal connection diagrams now include the connections
of the new binary output module fitted with 4 high-break contacts.
Software
DVICE The previous menu point 000 001 D VIC E: O r d e r N o . is replaced by
001 000 D VIC E: AFS Order No.
001 200 D V I C E : P C S O r d e r N o .
The following device menu points have been added:
001 201 D VIC E: L o c a ti o n
002 059 D V I C E : D M I E C 6 1 8 5 0 V e r s i o n
002 131 D V I C E : S W V e r s i o n D H M I
002 132 D V I C E : S W V e r s i o n D H M I D M
PC, The values AREVA and AREVA D can now be selected as the
COMM1, manufacturer. This is relevant for the following menu points:
COMM2 003 183 P C : M a n u f a c t u r e r
003 161 C O M M 1 : M a n u f a c t u r e r
103 161 C O M M 2 : M a n u f a c t u r e r
(Remark: With the P638, as with all MiCOM P railway protection relays,
the manufacturer’s name is only visible in COMM1 when the setting at
address 003 215 C O M M 1 : IEC 8 7 0 - 5 E n a b l e d is set to 'Yes'.)
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 C-3

(continued)
Version Changes
IEC, The communications protocol per IEC 61850 has been implemented.
GOOSE, An active monitoring of the communications links to logged-on clients
GSSE has been implemented with setting:
104 062 T C P K e e p - A l i v e T i m e r
(This active monitoring replaces the passive monitoring at setting
104 050 IEC : In a c ti vi ty ti m e r .)
Implementation of an automatic switchover to daylight saving time,
activated by setting 104 219 IEC : Sw i tc h .d a yl .s a v.ti m e .
Switchover times for the automatic switch to daylight saving time are
governed by the following settings:
104 220 IEC : D a yl .Sa v.T i m e Sta r t
104 221 IEC : D a yl .Sa v.T i m e St. d
104 222 IEC : D a yl .Sa v.T i m e St. m
104 223 IEC : D a yl .Sa v. t . S t . 0 : 0 0 +
104 225 IEC : D a yl .Sa v.T i m e En d
104 226 IEC : D a yl .Sa v.T i m e En d d
104 227 IEC : D a yl .Sa v.T i m e En d m
104 228 IEC : D a yl .Sa v. t . E n d 0 : 0 0 +
Instead of setting a router address and target network so as to establish
a communications link to a client situated exterior to the local network,
now only the setting of the gateway address is required via:
104 011 IEC : G a te w a y Ad d r e s s .
F_KEY This new function group is now available and can be used to configure
function keys situated on the front panel user interface (HMI).
LED Configuration capabilities for the LED indicators (e.g. multi-colored and
increased numbers) have been adapted to the hardware.
INP In order to comply with standard IEC 60255-22-7, class A the setting
010 220 IN P: F i l te r is now available.
C-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Version Changes
MAIN A primary and a backup source for time of day synchronization may now
be set.
A menu jump function is now available for the READ Key .

The reset functions have been extended:
• Now there are two group reset settings available, each of which
will "simultaneously" reset several memories. The assignment of
eligible memories to the two group reset settings is configurable.
The group reset is now issued by a manual reset from the front
panel user interface (HMI), and may also be created by linking it
to a binary signal input or a function key.
• In similar fashion a selection of memories to be reset may be
assigned to the CLEAR key situated on the front panel user
interface (HMI). Now each time the CLEAR key is pressed, not
only the LED indicators and the display are reset but the
selected memory is also reset immediately.
These new signals have been added:
044 131 M AIN : C B1 T r i p EXT
044 208 M AIN : C B2 T r i p EXT
The following menu point has been renamed:
003 064 M A I N : E n . M a n . T r i p C m d . U S E R
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 C-5

(continued)
Version Changes
CHECK A number of device bugs previously led to a blocking with the second
entry to the monitoring signal memory (i.e. if the recurring fault was
already stored in the monitoring signal memory – see Chapter 10 in the
Technical Manual). This reaction was changed in such a manner that
device blocking will only occur if a renewed appearance of the same
device fault lies within a set "memory retention time" (021 018
C H E C K : M o n . S i g . R e t e n t i o n ). This makes it possible to tolerate
sporadic faults, resulting from control actions, without having to clear the
monitoring signal memory in the interim.
The significance of the time stamp was modified to accommodate this
new feature. The time stamp now represents the last appearance of the
fault.
In the course of platform harmonization, the configuration table of the
user-defined alarm condition has been supplemented by the
instantaneous outputs 30 to 32 and the timed outputs 30 to 32 (t) of the
programmable logic:
098 053 CHECK: Output 30 ↔ 042 090 LOGIC: Output 30
098 054 CHECK: Output 30 (t) ↔ 042 091 LOGIC: Output 30 (t)
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of alarm signals by
selection at C H EC K: F c t As s i g n . Al a r m and they are also recorded
in the monitoring signal memory.
These signals can be used to create an alarm signal under complex
application conditions. This signaling has no influence on the device's
operation (i.e. no warm restart or blocking).
The following new menu points / self-checking points have been added:
098 020, 098 078 C H E C K : S e t t i n g E r r o r C B M _ x (x=1, 2)
098 066, 098 079 C H E C K : C B x N o . C B O p . > (x=1, 2)
098 067, 098 085 C H E C K : C B x R e m . N o . C B o p . < (x=1, 2)
098 068, 098 086 C H E C K : C B x Σ I t r i p > (x=1, 2)
098 069, 098 087 C H E C K : C B x Σ I t r i p * * 2 > (x=1, 2)
098 070, 098 088 C H E C K : C B x t m a x> A (x=1, 2)
098 077, 098 090 C H E C K : C B x t m a x> C (x=1, 2)
FT_DA The following English menu point has been renamed (without changing
the German menu point text):
006 083 F T _ D A : R e s t r a i n C u r r e n t 2
(was previously: R e s tr a i n C u r r e n t 1 )
DIFF There is now a zero current filter available for the low voltage side of the
transformer.
THERM The further operation may now be selected when there is a CTA failure.
076 177 T H E R M : F u n c t . f . C T A F a i l . S G x
A minimum coolant temperature may be set for the power feed of
catenary sections situated in long tunnels:
076 178 T H E R M : M i n i m u m T e m p e r a t . S G x
The following setting has been deleted:
072 178 T H E R M : B l k f o r C T A F a i l S G x
C-6 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

(continued)
Version Changes
DTOC_1, The menu points
IDMT 071 146 D T O C 1 : T i m e r S t a r t t I > S G x
072 245 D T O C 1 : T i m e r S t a r t t I > > S G x
006 061 I D M T : T i m e r S t . t I r e f > S G x
can be used to define whether the respective stage timer is started when
the protection is triggered or, additionally, with direction signaling.
The load flow direction can now be determined when the short-circuit
direction determination has been enabled.
The following menu points have been renamed:
035 104 D T O C 1 : P h a s e A T r i g g e r e d
(previously: D T O C 1 : S t a r t i n g P h a s e A )
035 105 D T O C 1 : P h a s e C T r i g g e r e d
(previously: D T O C 1 : S t a r t i n g P h a s e C )
038 117 I D M T : P h a s e A T r i g g e r e d
(previously: I D M T : S t a r t i n g I r e f > ,A )
038 117 I D M T : P h a s e C T r i g g e r e d
(previously: I D M T : S t a r t i n g I r e f > ,C )
DTOCN The text in all menu points has been changed (if present) from "IN>" and
"tIN>" to "IN>H" and "tIN>H" where the letter "H" stands for "high
current". For example:
076 111 D T O C N : I N > H S G 1
(previously: D T O C N : IN> SG1)
CBF_1, The following signals are now available:
CBF_2
006 051 C BF _ 1 : C B F a i l u r e and
006 052 C BF _ 2 : C B F a i l u r e
The previous signals C BF _ x: C B F a i l u r e have all been renamed.
The new text is:
039 000 C BF _ 1 : C B S u p e r v . S i g n a l
039 039 C BF _ 2 : C B S u p e r v . S i g n a l
CBM_1. Circuit breaker monitoring (triggering circuits 1 and 2) is now available
CBM_2 with two new function groups.
LIMIT The previous function groups LIM_a, LIM_b, LIM_c and LIM_V have
been united in one single function group "LIMIT". Except for the
renaming of menu points, for example
072 221 LIM_a: I> SG1 → 072 221 LIMIT: Ia> SG1
this does not mean that associated functionalities have been changed.
P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 C-7

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 C-8
Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/ccc
 2016 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P638/EN M/Da2 // AFSV.12.10183 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 06/2016
Easergy MiCOM P638

P638/EN AD/Bb2
Version P638 -302 -403/404 -610

⇒ P638 -302 -403/404 -611
Upgrade Documentation
P638, Changes in software version -610 to -611
In the new versions of the Transformer Differential Protection Device for Railway
Applications Easergy MiCOM P638, several enhanced features and changes on
existing features have been included. These are described with reference to the
documentation listed below:
References
Released Version Documentation
15.08.2008 P638 -302 -403/404 -610 Technical Manual
P638/EN M/Da2
P638/EN AD/Bb2 // AFSV.12.11031 D /// P638-302-403/404-611 3

P638, Changes in software version -610 to -611
(continued)
1 Overview
Version Changes
P638-302-403/404-611 Hardware New Schneider-Electric design for the local control panel (HMI).
Diagram No change
Release: 23.02.2011 Software
PC The following menu point has been removed:
P C : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 183)
Note:
Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program
continues to be guaranteed.
COMM1 The data point C O M M 1 : M O D B U S p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 214) may
now be used to select between the MODBUS protocol variants Private
and Compatible.
The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS
implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices.
The protocol variant Private corresponds to the first implementation of
the MODBUS protocol.
Note:
As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1, The menu points C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 161)
COMM2 and C O M M 2 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (103 161) can no longer
be set by using a selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may
now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in individual cases, it
may become necessary to enter texts differing from the default.
Notes:
These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is
not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel
(HMI).
The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding
this will be truncated.
The parameter C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r is hidden
unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
4 P638/EN AD/Bb2 // AFSV.12.11031 D /// P638-302-403/404-611

P638/EN AD/Bb2 // AFSV.12.11031 D /// P638-302-403/404-611 5
Schneider Electric
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
Publication: P638/EN AD/Bb2 // AFSV.12.11031 D /// P638-302-403/404-611 06/2016
Easergy MiCOM P638

P638/EN AD/Bc3
Version P638 -303 -405/406 -612
Upgrade Documentation
2 P638/EN AD/Bc3 // AFSV.12.11431 D /// P638-303-405/406-612
P638, Changes in Software Version -611 to -612
In the new versions of the Transformer Differential Protection Device for

Railway Applications Easergy MiCOM P638, several enhanced features and
changes on existing features have been included.
These are described with reference to the documentation listed below:
References
Released Version Documentation
2008-08-15 P638 -302 Technical Manual
-403/404 P638/EN M/Da2
-610
2011-02-23 P638 -302 Upgrade Documentation
-403/404 P638/EN AD/Bb2
-611
P638/EN AD/Bc3 // AFSV.12.11431 D /// P638-303-405/406-612 3

P638, Changes in Software Version -611 to -612
(continued)
1 Overview
Version Changes
P638 -303 Hardware The P638 is now fitted with an improved power supply module.
-405/406 Note that the voltage range has changed for DC input:
-612 • For the DC / AC variant, the range is now
Release: 2012-12-01 60 … 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
(previously 48 … 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC).
• For the DC-only variant, the range is now
24 … 60 VDC
(previously 24 VDC).
A new communication module (“REB” = “Redundant Ethernet
Board”) is now available as an ordering option. This module
can be used for redundant communication via IEC 61850 and
may be fitted to slot 2, as an alternative to the other
communication modules. The following communication
protocols are supported:
• SHP (Self-Healing Protocol).
• RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).
• DHP (Dual-Homing Protocol).
A detailed description of the module and the appropriate
network connections is available as a separate document
(“Redundant Ethernet Board, Application Guide”).
The binary module X(6I 3O) with 6 binary signal inputs and 3
output relays is now optionally available and may be fitted to
slot 18.
Diagram The diagrams have been adapted to the new selection of
modules:
• P638 -405: Case 84TE, pin-terminal connection
• P638 -406: Case 84TE, ring-terminal connection
Software Note:
Software version P638 -612 is compatible with all previous
hardware releases.
IEC Bug fixing:
• In a few cases a data change report was not transferred
when a cyclic report was generated at the same time.
• Operate signals OpIn are available now in the Logical
Nodes RBRF1 and RBRF2.
DIFF The restrictions for setting the amplitude matching factors
have been relaxed as follows:
• 0.5 ≤kam,x ≤16 (instead of: kam,x ≤5)
• The restrictions kam,a / kam,b ≤3 and kam,b / kam,a ≤3 have

been removed.
4 P638/EN AD/Bc3 // AFSV.12.11431 D /// P638-303-405/406-612

P638/EN AD/Bc3 // AFSV.12.11431 D /// P638-303-405/406-612 5
Schneider Electric
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
Publication: P638/EN AD/Bc3 06/2016
Schneider Electric
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
Publication: P638/EN M/Bc3 Version: -610 -611 -612 06/2016

P638 EN M Bc3 610-612

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

P638 EN M Bc3 610-612

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Easergy MiCOM P638

Transformer Differential Protection Device

Version P638 -302 -403/404 -610

Content P638/EN M/Ca2 (-610)

Transformer Differential Protection Device

Version P638 -302 -403/404 -610

1 Application and Scope 1-1

2 Technical Data 2-1

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 7

3.12 General Functions of the P638 (Function Group MAIN) 3-54

8 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

5 Installation and Connection 5-1

6 User Interface (HMI) 6-1

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 9

8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1

14 Order Information 14-1

10 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

1 Application and Scope

This protection device may be installed in standard-gauge railway substations operating

Protection functions P638

87T DIFF Transformer differential protection

Vector group matching

Inrush restraint, through-stabilization

Zero current filter high and low voltage side

50 / 51 DTOC1 Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages

67 Short-circuit direction determination, per stage

Undervoltage enable, per stage

Starting conditions for timer stages (starting / direction), per stage

50 / 51 DTOC2 Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages

51 IDMT Inverse-time overcurrent protection, phase selective, with one stage

Short-circuit direction determination

Starting conditions for timer stages (starting / direction)

50 / 51 DTOCN Dead tank protection, definite-time ground overcurrent protection

Instantaneous high-current stage

49 THERM Thermal overload protection

27 / 59 V<> Time-voltage protection

81 f<> Over-/ Underfrequency Protection

50BF / 62 CBF_1, CBF_2 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

CBM_1. CBM_2 Circuit Breaker Monitoring

LIMIT Limit value monitoring

LOGIC Programmable logic

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 1-1

Global functions P638

GROUP Setting group selection

F_KEY Function keys 6

Measured Value Functions P638

RTDmA / mA_OP Analogue measured value input / output ( )

PT 100 measuring input ( )

20 mA measured value input, with one settable input value ( )

20 mA measured value output, with two settable output values ( )

Input/output functions P638

INP / OUTP Binary signal inputs / output relays (maximum number) 32 / 46

Current / voltage measuring inputs

Phase currents system 2X2

Communication Functions P638

COMM1, COMM2 2 communication interfaces, RS 485 or fibre-optics ( )

IRIGB IRIG-B time synchronization ( )

IEC Communication interface, RS 485 or fibre-optics (IEC 61850) ( )

1-2 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610

P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610 1-3

A function is selected by a mouse click in the operating program:

1-4 P638/EN M/Aa2 // AFSV.12.10180 D /// P638-302-403/404-610